Category: Simplex

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Multi-Candela Notification Appliances Notification Appliances with Speaker Multi-Candela Strobe; Non-Addressable (S/V) notification appliances with speaker and multi-tapped high xenon strobe with synchronized flash: Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic are available for wall or ceiling mount Operation is compatible with ADA requirements (refer to wall mount installation information on page 4) mount S/V features: Housings are available in red or white with clear lens contrasting white or red lettering Covers are available separately to convert housing color mount S/V features: Housing is white with clear lens Red lettering is printed on two sides notification appliance (speaker): High quality voice and tone reproduction with taps for , 1, or 2 W, at 25 or 70.7 VRMS Capacitor input for connection to supervised notification circuits Speakers are wired separately from strobe wiring UL listed to Standard 1480 and ULC-S541* notification appliance (strobe): 24 VDC xenon strobe; intensity is selectable as 15, 30, or 110 candela with visible selection jumper secured strobe housing Strobes are activated from NACs selected to provide strobe synchronization signals or from strobe Synchronization Modules that are for Class B or Class A operation Regulated circuit design ensures consistent flash output provides controlled inrush current UL listed to Standard 1971 and ULC-S526* for wall mounted S/Vs: Red or white adapters to cover surface mounted boxes Red adapter for mounting to Simplex 2975-9145 boxes Red wire guard See page 2 for additional listing details and wire guard listings. This product has been by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7320-0026:247 for allowable values conditions concerning material presented in this document. Accepted for use City New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable; your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. and Ceiling Mount S/Vs TrueAlert S/Vs with speaker and strobe provide convenient installation standard electrical boxes with extensions. The designs are both impact and vandal resistant provide a convenient strobe intensity selection. Since model can be selected for strobe intensity output, model inventory is minimized and changes during construction can be easily mount S/V housings are a one-piece assembly lens) that mounts to a 4 square electrical box extension (see details on page 4). The cover can be removed (a tool is required) and covers are separately for color conversion. mount S/Vs also install using 4 electrical with an extension (see details on page 4). Intensity Selection installation, a selection plug at the back of the determines the desired strobe intensity. An flag with black letters on a highly visible yellow allows the selected intensity to be seen at the of the strobe lens. 5/2013 Synchronized Strobes Strobes. When multiple strobes and their can be seen from one location, synchronized reduce the probability of photo-sensitive reactions well as the annoyance and possible distraction of flashing. The multi-candela strobes of these S/Vs activated by NACs that provide the Simplex format. For additional information, refer data sheet S4905-0003. Strobe Application Selection selection of visible notification is dependent on location, local codes, and proper applications the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 72), ANSI A117.1; the appropriate model code: BOCA, ICBO, or SBCCI; and the guidelines of th

SECURITY 3400 Workstation PC Pentium III MHz with 512 K Cache BX Chipset Four PCI slots Two ISA Slots (1 PCI/ISA shared) AGP Video AMI BIOS Ultra DMA IDE on Board Four DIMMs Wake-on-LAN USB Two Serial Ports One Parallel Port MB SDRAM, ECC DIMM 8.4 GB, IDE 5400 RPM, 33 48X IDE FDD 16 MB WRAM Millenium II AGP PCI 32-bit Combo Card Windows NT V4.0 Medium Tower Case H x 7.5 W x 17 D cm x 19.1cm x 43.2 cm) Three 5.25 Bays Three 3.5 Bays (one hidden) Auxiliary Cooling Kit Microsoft IntelliMouse 104 Key PS-2 Style keyboard ATX 250 Watt 100-120/200-240 VAC (switchable) Report Printer: Printer, 8 PPM, 600 dpi, MB RAM, IEEE 1284-compliant connector Serial Printer: Matrix Printer, RS232C, Feed Parallel Printer: Matrix Printer, Tractor Feed Disk Board 3400 Workstation Computer with Optional 17 Monitor) Windows NT 4.0 Workstation Operating Pentium 500 MHz or faster CPU MB SDRAM Memory GB EIDE Hard Drive CD-ROM Floppy Disk Drive MB WRAM Graphics Board PS-2 Style Keyboard Microsoft IntelliMouse Medium Tower case Monitor (Standard) Monitor (Optional) Monitor (Optional) 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. S3400-0010-4 02/00 Expansion Slots AGP Video PCI Shared ISA/PCI ISA AGP Video Slot Slot Ethernet Card Available Slot Slot Non-U.L.) Expansion Cards Port Card (3400-6005) serial ports, 1 parallel port. Frame Grabber use with the Video Option) Frame Grabber use with the CCTV Option) SCSI Interface included with and 3000-9506 Badging Port Expander (3400-7017). up to 8 serial ports. communications with matrix switchers when used CCTV interface. Serial Parallel Com. Port Card PCI Video Badging Video Card Choose 1 video card per computer. The PCI frame replaces the Standard AGP video card when either CCTV or Video Badging options. Image Board not install CCTV and Video Badging options on the computer. PCI CCTV Video Card Image Board SCSI Interface 8 Port 1 PCI Bus Slot Available on Workstations only on RAID Expansion card configuration options are dependent on bus slot availability. 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. Massachusetts 01441-0001 USA www.simplexnet.com the Simplex logo, and NT 3400 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Simplex Time Recorder Co. in the U.S. and/or other coun- S3400-0010-4 02/00 specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. Windows, and intelliMouse are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

Why You Need 850 & 830 Series Fire Detectors Established Innovators were the first to introduce triple-sensing technology CO, optical and heat detection in a single device. introduction of this next generation solution set a new for the industry, and with the more recent release of fully addressable TrueAlert ES LED notification appliances addressable speakers featuring revolutionary self-testing we continue to raise the bar in the fire industry. operating lifetime by automatically raising the alarm threshold the device ages. This means the sensor is able to achieve the amount of drift compensation and the longest possible life with the approved level of sensitivity. Flexible Option MX Sensors are available with or without an inbuilt short isolator to meet all specification requirements preferences. Adaptable and Flexible for a Wide Range Premises and Fire Risks MX 850 & 830 series of fire sensors are designed to be adaptable, allowing the fire alarm system to be tailored to a range of fire risks. They can be programmed individually a day and night mode and provide different modes of This makes the range flexible as each sensor can be for use in its specific environment. Better Environmental Performance entire range of MX 850 & 830 series sensors have been with a redesigned smoke chamber. By introducing an screen and conformal coated electronics (including printed boards) inside the sensor, they can better compensate for effects of environmental contamination caused by dust and This gives the range enhanced environmental performance greater tolerance in different environments. Reduced False Alarms sensor design, configurable detection modes, dynamic adjustment, and multi-sensor technology are just of the advanced features that help MX 850 & 830 series accurately detect fires and reduce false alarms. Lower Life Time Cost MX 850 & 830 series sensor is designed to save you costs delivering a longer and more reliable service life. The Extended Life (ESL) feature of the MX series range extends World Class Manufacturing 850 & 830 series sensors are made in world class, globally manufacturing centers located in Europe. factory maintains the highest employee safety standards delivers top quality products with the least possible impact to environment. UL Listing 850 & 830 series sensors are UL Listed. Our product and manufacturing procedures are regularly audited inspected by independent test houses from around the world. Triple Sensing Technology MX 850 series triple sensor combines heat, optical and CO in a compact, easy to install package. sensor transmits a continuous stream of environmental to the fire control panel. High speed processors and algorithms evaluate the information and determine there is a fire. Single sensors can only react to one of potential fire, meaning the risk of false alarm potentially greater. Improved Communication MX 850 & 830 series sensors use sophisticated and reliable digital communication protocols to send to the fire control unit. This improved communication the panel, is intended to achieve a more accurate sensing of and a quicker response. 2020 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.

prepared by storing fire alarm system parts on-site: efficiency and cost of fire alarm system by stocking commonly used spare parts in dedicated parts cabinet Whether accidentally damaged, vandalized, or in need of replacement, quickly the correct replacement part expedites your fire alarm system to normal parts kits are available for: Simplex Addressable fire alarm systems, BESAFEADDR or Simplex non-Addressable fire alarm systems, BESAFECONVEN or the parts cabinet can be ordered separately to a customized spare parts kit per your local needs, Model BESAFEBOX cabinet details: The BESAFE cabinet can be wall or floor Cabinet color is beige with highly visible black of ALARM PARTS KIT to locate Cabinet size is 22 W x 10 H x 8-1/2 D mm, x 254 mm, x 216 mm) The locking cabinet door uses a standard key and is bottom hinged to drop for easy internal access A door mounted label is provided for convenient logging Replacement. Ensuring a properly functioning alarm system often requires peripherals to be This can be due to damage (either intentional or accumulation of dirt, excessive moisture, other environmental conditions, or they may simply no work as intended. Whether replaced by on-site or by a Simplex product representative, having correct replacement part on-site saves time and Listings apply to individual parts, refer to the parts list and reference information on page 2 details. Accessories Fire Alarm System Spare Parts Kits, and Non-Addressable Spare Parts Kit Cabinet and Parts Spare Parts Kit with Door Open Spare Parts Kit Contents Non-Addressable parts kits include: One manual (pull) station, standard single action One pluggable 135 F (37 C) heat detector with detection Two pluggable photoelectric smoke detectors One detector base, compatible with either the smoke heat detector One wall mounted red strobe One wall mounted red horn/strobe Addressable parts kits include: One addressable manual (pull) station, standard single One pluggable heat sensor Two pluggable photoelectric smoke sensors One sensor base, compatible with either the smoke or sensor One wall mounted red strobe One wall mounted red horn/strobe to the Product Selection list on page 2 for specific model numbers.) 2/2008 Product Selection Fire Alarm System Spare Parts Kit Fire Alarm System Spare Parts Kit, includes the following parts: mounting box sensor base sensor sensor manual station, single action horn/strobe notification appliance, red wall mount strobe notification appliance, red wall mount (conventional) Fire Alarm System Spare Parts Kit Fire Alarm System Spare Parts Kit , includes the following parts: mounting box detector base detector detector, 135 F (37 C), with rate-of-rise detection station, single action horn/strobe notification appliance, red wall mount strobe notification appliance, red wall mount Sheet Sheet Parts Kit Box Only Please Note: Spare Parts Kit items comply with GSA specifications for USA manufacture. Products with multiple countr

File data Filename: File size: File type: Download count: Text Preview

Listed Peripherals Accessories Series Resistors : resistors are used with various Simplex fire products as part of the wiring supervision Mounted on a single gang plate, the resistors readily accessible for installation and service. values vary with different types of circuits. to the specific circuit information to determine proper value. 2081 Steel 2081 Steel Surface 2081 Flush 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 9/00 APPLICATION CHART Type Zone Monitor Zone Horn, Strobe, Speaker, etc. Station, Heat Detector, Detector, etc. Identification Gang Plate Value Value ohm, 1/2 Watt ohm, 1 Watt ohm, 1/2 Watt Separately Separately Separately Flush Flush Steel Flush Steel Flush Surface Surface Flush Steel Flush Surface 1W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W 1/2W Any resistor listed below may be ordered on this plate by ordering as an other line item and relating the lines. 9/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the World Wide Web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subejct to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Workforce Solutions 125-O Synchronized Time Stamp OATSSM Compliant Solutions to Indicate Loss of Sync Calendar to the Year 2094 Selectable Print Formats Memory Protection Master Clock Interface Ribbon Cartridge Resistant Security Lock Features Software to be used with 1603-9823 Converter and/or a time keeping PC time source. Line Driver to drive greater than 50 Backup Simplex 125-O is a full featured, premium product provides businesses a time and date stamp with assortment of user-selectable print formats and displays. this new version of a proven product, Simplex has new features, most notably is the capability to loss of synchronization to the 125-O Time The Simplex 125-O has been specifically de- for securities firms required to comply with the mandate (Rule 6953). the optional SimSYNC software and the Sim- Converter, single or multiple 125-O Time can receive time impulses from a Win-95, Win- or Windows NT based PC. This application is well to smaller securities locations that may need to Simplex 125-O Time Stamp only a few clocks or to larger firms that to achieve OATS compliance by using a master without installing and wiring a roof-mounted an- With its attractive yet rugged design, the Sim- 125-O is perfect for both office and industrial inches (11.94 cm) inches (16.25 cm) inches (19.05 cm) Specifications to 122(cid:176) F to 50 (cid:176) C) to 140 (cid:176) F to 60(cid:176) C) to 90%, non-condensing Specifications Crystal snap-in fabric ink 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 2/00 Source from NIST Network or Modem Connect from or Patch Panel Cable Block or Panel SimSYNC All wiring to Stamps is Belden 8760 or CAT5. An Optional 2301-9513 Amplified line driver can used when connecting more than 50 Stamps. connection from to Stamp 1. Simplex 125-O Configuration Using SimSYNC Converter and Software Source from NIST Network or Modem Connect from or Patch Panel Cable Block or Panel connection from to Stamp All wiring to Stamps is Belden 8760 or CAT5. An Optional 2301-9513 Amplified line driver can be when connecting more than 50 Stamps. When using a 6400, additional (opitional) devices clocks, bells, etc.) may be used. 2. Simplex 125-O Configuration Using SimSYNC Software and Master Clock 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 2/00 Antenna Connect from or Patch Panel WWV Cable Block or Panel SimSYNC All wiring to Stamps is Belden 8760 or CAT5. An Optional 2301-9513 Amplified line driver can used when connecting more than 50 Stamps. connection from to Stamp 3. Simplex 125-O Configuration Using SimSYNC Converter and WWV Receiver Antenna WWV Connect from or Patch Panel Block or Panel All wiring to Stamps is Belden 8760 or CAT5. An Optional 2301-9513 Amplified line driver can be when connecting more than 50 Stamps. When using a 6400, additional (opitional) devices clocks, bells, etc.) may be used. connection from to Stamp 4. Simplex 125-O Configuration Using Master Clock and WWV Receiver 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 2/00 Table Description Synchronized Time Stamp (order one Amplified Line Driver for each addi- 50 Time Stamps) S

Peripherals Accessories Listed; CSA Certified and Speakers Series AC or DC Operation Standard Finish: Red or Beige Operating Current High Output Level Wiring Terminals Standard 4 (10.16 cm) Outlet Box Mounting Surface or Semi-Flush Mounting are available for flush mounting) Modular Design HORN HORN : horns provide a loud penetrating sound that easily heard over most ambient noise levels. is available for surface or semi-flush Options are available for flush Refer to pages 2 and 3 for detailed DIMENSIONS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Square, 5 into Box (all) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 Square, 5 Deep 16mm) Deep 16mm) max. (37mm) 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 10/00 CHART dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. dB, @ 10 ft. Minimum dB calculated from integrated sound power measurements at UL per UL standard 464. Typical dB with conventional sound level meters will be higher in actual installations. HORN ACCESSORIES STYLE BOX WALL BOX Square* (102 mm) Square* (102 mm) Surface Surface Semi-Flush Semi-Flush Flush Flush SPECIFICATIONS Box for Flush Mounting for Flush Mounting Interior Type Knockout Box for Surface Mounting mm) mm) 1/2 mm) 3/8 mm) 3/8 mm) 9/16 mm) mm) mm) mm) CONFIGURATIONS MOUNTED HORN MOUNTED HORN (Red) (Beige) Square Wall Box Separately) Horn assembly method requires the surface horn plus surface outlet box. Four number 10 wood screws mounting the box are provided. Horn 8-32 X 1 1/2 (38mm) slotted screws are provided attaching the semi-flush horn to any 4 (102mm) outlet box. HORN ASSEMBLY BOX SURFACE HORN AND COVER PLATE. (Red) (Beige) surface horn and the 2905-9901 or -9902 plate provide true flush The 2975-9173 box accommodates the surface horn cover) and may be plastered in the wall. Each box has 1/2 3/4 knockouts. The grille is attached to the surface horn and as a support and cover, extending 1/8 beyond the wall surface. 10/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Listed Peripherals Accessories Series Surface or Semi-Flush Mount Shallow Wall Mounting Long Life LEDs Lamp Test Power On LEDs Audible and Visual Common Trouble 16000 series annunciator is a companion the 4002 series of fire alarm controls. It may also be in other applications where an LED type of annuncia- is desired. The 16000 series has a tamper proof face with no screws or fasteners. zone LEDs are for use with 24VDC power Power for their operation may be obtained from a control panel or from some other source. designations can be either numeric ( 1 etc.) or custom descriptions ( Lobby etc.). ALARM Annunciator Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 6/00 Backbox Backbox 6/00 Page 2 ALARM Annunciator NUMBER MOUNT INCHES 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 1 3 3 1 11 15 1 1 1 6/00 Page 3 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Designation Block COMMON POSITIVE BUZZER POSITIVE BUZZER NEGATIVE FOR LAMP TEST LIGHT POSITIVE LIGHT NEGATIVE FOR POWER ON LED POSITIVE COMMON ANNUNCIATOR Designation Block TEST OPTIONAL LOOP COMMON POSITIVE FOR LAMP TEST INTERNALLY TO 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 USED USED 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 POSITIVE COMMON ANNUNCIATOR TEST OPTIONAL LOOP 6/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World us on the World Wide Web @www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice.

firealarmresources.com

F i re Alarm ro d u c t s To Fire Pro t e c t i o n o n t e n t s n t ro d u c t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 i m p l ex Serv i c e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Fe at u re s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 o f t wa re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 i m p l ex Fi re Alarm Pro d u c t s . . . . . . .6 o d e l : 0 0 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0 0 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0 0 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0 0 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 0 0 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Miniplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 0 2 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 e A l a rm S y s t e m s . . . . . . . . . .8 Netwo rk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 0 Netwo rk Vo i c e . . . .1 0 Retro fi t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1 Products For Life Safe t y . . . . . .1 2 ri p h e ra l s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3 n t ro d u c t i o n Philosophy i m p l ex is a progre s s ive marke t – l e a d i n g o m p a ny with deep ly rooted tra d i t i o n a l Consistency, re l i ab i l i t y, dep e n d- these are the ch a ra c t e ri s t i c s wh i ch we base our products and e rvices, as well as our entire bu s i n e s s h i l o s o p hy. From our fi rst mech a n i c a l time re c o rder product (intro d u c e d 1894), to our most recent designs “stat e – o f – t h e – a rt” tech n o l ogy fo r re detection, securi t y, and commu n i c a- systems, Simplex has wo rked to e l iver solid value to our customers . a century in business, we remain We have also become a enterprise, with sales over a half- dollars. Over 4,000 Simplex serve more than a half million in more than 90 countries. rare combination of historical depth operational scope enables us to our customers needs with excep- success. roduct Philosophy u ring the century we have been in customer needs have grow n n c re a s i n g ly complex. This is the age of o f t wa re-based products, micro p ro c e s s o r- systems integration, and a maze of t ri n gent reg u l at o ry and stat u t o ry re q u i re- that va ry from city to city and stat e stat e. It is impossible to prov i d e ffe c t ive solutions simply by maintaining cat a l og of standard products on a take – i t – r- l e ave-it basis. Rat h e r, Simplex care- u l ly eva l u ates the customer situat i o n needs, then offe rs an ap p ro p ri at e, p e c i fic solution for each one. i m p l ex is, there fo re, far more than just supplier of advanced products and We wo rk with customers as a rt n e rs, offe ring life – cy cle serv i c e s , n cluding assistance in system design, a nu fa c t u re of the component part s , n s t a l l ation, maintenance, and tra i n i n g. i re Detection and Alarm bro ch u re focuses on Simplex fi re and alarm products. It discusses complete fi re detection and alarm ap p ro a ch from unders t a n d i n g re q u i rements to supplying high e r fo rmance products that satisfy yo u r p l i c ation. And, behind it all is the total i m p l ex commitment of providing the protection for both your people and bu i l d i n g s . roject Commitment i m p l ex has broad ex p e rience in re c o n- daily project va ri ations. We fl ex i bl e, easy-to-install with design assistance, instal- ation, and project management teams that in your best interest. Rest assured that you choose Simplex, your pro j e c t be considered as a commitment to from the leader in fi re alarm and alarm systems. i m p l ex has established ex p e rtise in all markets, including: hospitals, rsing homes, office buildings, sch o o l s , n ive rsity campuses, shopping malls, facilities, military installat i o n s , industrial facilities. With our ex p e- in all aspects of fi re detection and l a rm system design, installation, and e rv i c e, you can enjoy peace of mind that people and pro p e rty are prov i d e d the care they deserve. Serv i c e s Involvement eva l u ating your fi re detection and l a rm system re q u i rements, Simplex fully o n s i d e rs building codes, fi re safe t y and e

SCLK-0001 7/2017 DESCRIPTION Color Face / Display Face Included Wiring Includes Box Hanger & Molex Connector Kit Features 2.4GHz WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM PIDS (International) Simplex Retrofit: Ordered Separately) Clocks 2.4GHZ BLKSUR BAT DES 2.4GHZ BLKSUR BAT MIL 2.4GHz ALSUR BAT DES 2.4GHz ALSUR BAT MIL 2.4GHZ BLKSUR BAT DES 2.4GHZ BLKSUR BAT MIL 2.4GHZ ALSUR BAT DES 2.4GHZ ALSUR BAT MIL 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/110 DE 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/110 MI 2.4GHz ALSUR 24/110 DES 2.4GHz ALSUR 24/110 MIL 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/110 DE 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/110 MI 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/110 DES 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/110 MIL 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/230 DE 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/230 MI 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/230 DES 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/230 MIL 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/230 DE 2.4GHZ BLKSUR 24/230 MI 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/230 DES 2.4GHZ ALSUR 24/230 MIL 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 24V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 110V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 4D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V 2.4GHZ 6D REDLED 230V

2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart compatibility chart shows which smoke detectors are compatible with 4100ES, 4100U, 4010, 4006, 4004R, and 4005 Simplex fire control panels. Refer to the following tables*: Table 1: Simplex Detectors Table 2: Thorn Security Detectors Table 3: Autocall Detectors Table 4: Apollo Detectors Table 5: ESL/Sentrol Detectors Table 6: EST/Edwards Detectors Table 7: Faraday Detectors Table 8: FCI Detectors Table 9: Fenwal Detectors Table 10: Firecom Detectors Table 11: Gamewell Detectors Table 12: Hochiki Detectors Table 13: Mirtone Detectors Table 14: Notifier Detectors Table 15: Siemens/Cerberus/Pyrotronics Detectors Table 16: System Sensor Detectors sure to take notice of the footnotes below the tables. They provide important the 1. Locate the Panel Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) part number in the top row. 2. Locate the Detector part number in the left column and select the Base part number in the third 3. The intersection of the column and row defines the number of detectors allowed per IDC (Monitor 4. Do not intermix detectors from different tables on the same initiating device circuit. Detectors the same table may be intermixed without restriction unless otherwise indicated in the notes the tables 2005-2011 SimplexGrinnell LP. All rights reserved. specifications were current as of publication date and are subject to change without notice. and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its affiliates and are used under license. H Detectors 1: Simplex Detectors Panels Description (ZAMs) (ZAMs) 4005-9102 9806 9806 with ZAMs Photo Photo Photo/Heat Ion Ion Ion 135FT 135RR/FT 200FT 200RR/FT 135FT 135RR/FT 200FT 200RR/FT Photo Photo/Heat Ion 3.5% Photo

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

,- . .~————————~——- Fire Alarm 2700-8001 Security interconnection 19aOSlmp[ox Tlms ReccroerCo., Gardner, Mass., 01441 U.S.A. INTERCONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS 2001-8021 FIRE ALARM AND 2700-8001 SECURITY PURPOSE OF THIS PUBLICATION certain 2001-8021 Fire Alarm a~d 2700-8001 Security panels can be installed at customer location, special modifications to interconnect modules may have to be at the branch office_ The purpose of these instructions is to explain to the TR and how these modifications should be made. WHEN SPECIAL MODIFICATIONS ARE REQUIRED 2001-8021 and 2700-8001 panel is factory-wired for general alarm use; that is, when or more alarm-initiating zones is activated, all signal circuits will sound an uncoded If a system contains only a Control Module and one or more Zone Modules Signal Modules for general alarm use, then special modifications are not required. if other modules (such as Coders, Timers, City, Aux. Relays, etc.) are used, or other functions (selective signaling, coding, etc.) are desired, special are required. (Functions requiring special modifications are listed in the of System Function Diagrams on page 7.) THESE SPECIAL MODIFICATIONS INVOLVE these special modifications entail installing module interconnect jumpers jumper points (pads) on the panel mother board and/or removing certain items diodes, etc.) from daughter card modules. with each panel are six interconnect,jumpers – 1Q-inch jumpers (Part No. and three 20-inch jumpers (Part No. 564-059). On each end of a jumper is a pin is Inserted into one of the many plate-through-holes (pads) on the mother boards. numbered 1 thru 114 are actually double pads (two holes etched together). There also two sets of single pads referenced 1 thru 24 to terminal blocks TB1 and TB2. In some cases you may find only one hole of dual pad 61 usable. TO FIND OUT WHAT MODIFICATIONS NEED TO BE MADE are two sections of diagrams in this publication, “Fire Alarm Function Diagrams” “Security Function Diagrams.” Each diagram explains the modifications required a particular type of module use or system function. are shown on the diagrams in curved lines (straight lines indicate mother board With a few exceptions, the location of daughter board modules can vary from to system. Therefore, pad numbers usually aren shown on the function However, the pads are referenced to the PC socket pins to which they are After determining module locations for the system that you are working on, numbers can be determined by cross-referencing to the Module Interconnection and Record (Pub. No. 575-851) packed with the equipment. (See “Example of Required Modifications and Filling Out Worksheet.”) AND EQUIPMENT NEEDED Sales Data & Order Sheet – S330-7340 (DC Fire Alarm), S330-7343 (AC Fire Alarm), or (DC Security) Module Interconnection Worksheet and Record (Pub. No. 575-851) function diagrams in this publication pencil or pen Interconnect jumpers (Part Nos. 564-058 and 564-059) pliers diagonal pliers soldering iron Items packed with panel PROCEDURE Refer to the sales data and order form (5330 sheet) packed with the equipment. the types of modules, functions, and required programming. Refer to the appropriate function diagrams in this publication section on “Fire Function Diagrams” or “Security Function Diagrams” for modification (See “Example of Determining Required Modifications and Filling Worksheet”.) Fill out “Module Interconnection Worksheet and Record” (Pub. No. 575 In with the instructions on the publication. (See “Example of Deter Required Modifications and Filling Out Worksheet”.) Remove mother board from panel: Pull out all daughter card modules Remove card guide assembly from box (4 screws) Unplug harnesses to mother board Remove mother board from .box (6 screws) If your system is a 2001-8021 AC Fire Alarm, certain pins from the AC Signal (from AC Signal Module 2001-2077) must be soldered to mother board Thes

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

Q ,Simplex Modules Descriptions 1988 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 US A l-008 HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- – DUAL AMPLIFIER MONITOR:MODULE Fig. 1) 2001-6021 Dual Amplifier monitor each set of amplifiers within the system. An amplifier set consists of one primary and one secondary amplifier. Module used in 2001 (Dual Amplifier) Voice Communications Systems dual amp monitor module contains AMP TBL – AMP TBL – following TBL indicators: when the primary amp signal is missing. when the secondary amp signal is missing. ALL CKTS SWITCH TBL ALARM to 2001 Voice Communications a description this block diagram. Concepts REFERENCE dual amp monitor module circuitry following drawing: WD No. 841-052 Amplifier Monitor) shown on FUNCTION Fig. 2) Condition This module used systems with non- trouble. primary amp signal is fed to pins R and 14 of the amp monitor module, and secondary amp is fed to pins 1 and 2 of the dual amp monitor When both amp signals are present, relay Kl de-energized and the TBL indicators are off. Amplifier Monitor Module 1 Amp Trouble the primary amp signal relay Kl contacts MAIN AMP TBL indicator + V sent out pin 6 (System Trouble). missing at pins R and 14 for more than 20 seconds, Kl energizes. This transfer and the following conditions occur: + V sent out pin M (Amp Select Relay in Dual Power Amplifier Module). OV sent out pin 7 (to printer if used). the primary amplifier signal momentarily out. causing restored and the AUDIO TBL RESET switch is pressed, Kl de-energize. This, in turn, causes MAIN AMP TBL indicator + V on pin 12 missing at pins 1 and 2 for more than 20 seconds, following conditions the secondary amp signal is again applied to pins 1 and 2, the SECONDARY AMP TBL indicator goes out. Amp Trouble the secondary amp signal SECONDARY AMP TBL indicator + V sent out pin 6 (System Trouble). + V sent out pin J. OV sent out pin L (to printer if used). POWER SUPPLY FOR PRIMARY (+V), (-OV) (COMM) PRIMARY AMP OV IN (STEADY PULSING) (COMM) SECONDARY AMP > OUT TO PRINTER PRIMARY AMP TBL IN EXCEPT WHEN TBL RESET IS PRESSED > + V OUT WHEN PRIMARY AMP SECONDARY AMP TBL V OUT WHEN PRIMARY TBL (AMP SELECT) > +V OUT WHEN SECONDARY TBL > OUT TO PRINTER SECONDARY AMP TBL TBL LED SECONDARY Amplifier Monitor Module 2 DUAL AMPLIFIER MONITOR MODULE DESCRIPTION as 2001-6021 Dual Amplifier Monitor Module except for the following: This module is used in systems with resound During a primary amp or secondary amp trouble, a momentary + V (instead of a steady + V) is applied to pin Drawing Reference: the 6020 Dual Amplifier Monitor drawing, see 2001-6020, WD No. 841-255

Wimplex Communications Control Modules Descriptions 1999 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 199 HAZARD electrical power when maklrtg any adjustments servicing should be performed by quall- Simplex Representatives. repalrs. 0 1989 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. AUDIO CONTROL MODULE DESCRIPTION to Figures 1 & 2) function of the 2001-6005 Audio Control Module is to provide a preamplified audio signal for the audio amplifier. Audio Control Module performs this task as follows: Selects one of several audio inputs and allows it to operate in the system. Selection is determined by the audio priority rating in the system (see Module Function). Provides preamplification the tone signals, microphone and tape player. Provides the oscillator signals for the system. The alarm tones 1 and 2 (required), and the auxiliary tones and 2 (optional) are generated by the tone oscillator modules located on the Audio Control Module. Provides backup for the primary preamplifier. to 2001 Voice Communications a description this block diagram. Concepts Manual 1 Audio Control Module is made up of two motherboards: transformer and the music relay. to four tone oscillator boards; right-side motherboard left-side motherboard Interface/Music Board) houses Control with Pre-Amp) CONTROL WITH PRE-AMP INTERFACE/ BOARD CONTROL MODULE 2 REFERENCES Audio Control Module circuitry is shown on the following drawings: (Sh 1 of 4) WD No. 841-308 (Sh 2 of 4) WD No. 841-301 (Sh 3 of 4) WD No. 841-302 (Sh 4 of 4) WD No. 841-298 Control with Pre-Amp) Interface/Music Board) with InterfaceTransformer Oscillator ControVPre-Amp and Power Amplifiers) Diagram) STATUS Control with Preamplifier LIST (Relays normally de-energized) Name (relay energized) Stop Relay Tone 1 Tone 2 Command Switching all oscillators and music aux tones and music aux tone 2 and music music music to be played in system secondary pre-amp output to be to pins P2-2 & P2-4 Interface/Music LIST (Relays normally de-energized) Name (relay energized) Interface music to be used in system FUNCTION to WD No. 841-308 and Fig. 3) Voice Communications System uses several audio inputs. The audio inputs are: Microphone Tape Player (optional) Alarm Tones (1 & 2) Auxiliary Tone 1 (optional) Auxiliary Tone 2 (optional) Music Source (optional) one audio input is allowed to operate in the system at a time. If two or more audio inputs occur at the same time, input with the higher priority is allowed to operate the system. The list above shows the priority rating of each Kl thru K5), located on the Audio Control Module, selects the The priority control circuitry input. primary preamplifier a low power signal output is used as a backup when the primary preamplifier output is lost.) tape player or one of the auxiliary alarm oscillators. The secondary preamplifier 2 oscillator or from the microphone. and amplifies a low power signal from either the alarm tone 1 oscillator, and secondary either oscillator tones are generated by the tone

QSimplex Communications Analysis Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were Current as Of publication. are subject change without notice. 9 81 VOICE COMMUiWCATIONS SYSTEMS ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS Control Module 6005 ………………………………………………………….. Audio Power Amplifier 6001. …………………………………………………….. Audio Power Amplifier 6002 …………………………………………………….. Power Amplifiei6003 Power Amplifier 6004 …………………………………………………………. Power Amplifier6014 Speaker Circuit Module 6009 ……………………………………………………. Speaker Circuit Module 6011 ………………………………………………….. Speaker Circuit Module 6013 ………………………………………………….. Control Switch Module 6015 ……………………………………………….. Circuit Selector Switch Module 6016 ……………………………………………. Circuit Selector Switch Module 6017,6018 8.6019 …………………………………. Audio Amplifier Monitor 6021 …………………………………………………… Audio Amplifier Monitor6025 Preamplifier Monitor6027 Preamplifier Monitor 6029 ………………………………………………………. and Enclosure Module 6030 ………………………………………………. 9 81 HAZARD electrIcal power when making any adjustments servicing should be performed by quali- Simplex Representatives. repairs. VOICE COMMUNICATIONS ANALYSIS purpose of this manual is to analyze the circuitry of various modules and com- used in 2001 Voice Communications Systems. The wiring diagrams referred the headings just to the right of the type in each circuit analysis are indicated The wiring diagrams (seen in other publications) are cataloged ascending by the module type number. The box found in the lower corner of these wiring identifies part no. and WD no. this manual and associated wiring diagrams, system common is expressed as follows: ov System Common (-) System Common OV System Common -0V of these expressions negative side of the power supply. a system common reference point connected 9 81 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS ANALYSIS CONTROL MODULE.. & 841-302 continued provide dual switchable pre-amplification and mixing of low-level outputs produced Table l), microphone or tape player, so that the signal various tone oscillators the signal-to-noise ratio. be further processed without appreciable degradation module also has optional switchable provisions pre-ampli- music and paging. interfacing Audio Control Module, which consists of two motherboards, and 3 of four drawings indentified as part of 2001-6005: shown on sheets Sheet 1 of 4 WD No. 641-306 a schematic showing components and circuits the motherboard Control with Pre-amp. Mixer (OCPM). Sheet 3 of 4 WD No. 641-302 is a schematic showing components and circuits the motherboard Interface/Music helpful Control Module is shown on sheets 2 and 4 of the four

i HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- MICROPHONE AND ENCLOSURE MODULE DESCRIPTION (Refer to Fig. 1) 2001-6030 Microphone and Enclosure Module contains a microphone, a microphone enclosure and two oscillator control module and the dual pre-amp monitor module). The used to transmit voice messages over the 2001 Voice Communications System speakers. daughter cards (usually microphone contains a and allows any output signals preamplifiers via the mike interface which, when pressed, deactivates the voice coil cartridge 2) to transmit player, music and all the primary and REFERENCE enclosure module circuitry WD No. None shown on the following drawing: and Enclosure) And Enclosure Module 1 FUNCTION (Refer to Fig. 2) Condition microphone switch through the switch Sl contacts. in the released position, and any output signals the voice coil cartridge are COIL OUT WHEN MIKE SWITCH PRESSED STOP) PLUG P2 DISCONNECTED: BETWEEN PINS P2-2 AND WHEN MIKE SWITCH RELEASED; OHMS RESISTANCE BETWEEN PINS AND P2-3 WHEN MIKE SWITCH PRESSED OHMS (AUDIO SYSTEM COMMON) And Enclosure Module Cards Not Included) 2 Condition (Microphone Operation) operate the microphone when the system is in its normal condition, perform the following: Remove the microphone Set the OSC STOP switch to the up position. the panel. all oscillators and music. Set either the ALL CIRCUITS switch or selected SPKR CKT switches the up position. The ALL CIRCUITS switch activates all the system speakers. The selected SPKR CKT switches activates specific system speakers. Press the microphone switch to transmit voice messages over the selected system speakers. Switch Sl opens, and the output signals of the voice coil cartridge are fed to pins P2-2 and P2-3 The signals are then transmitted the mike interface transformer. Switch S2 closes, and – OV is sent out pin P2-1 (inhibits tape player, music and all oscillators). Reverse procedure when finished To operate the microphone when the system is in its alarm condition, you may eliminate steps 2 and 3. REMOTE MICROPHONE AND ENCLOSURE MODULE DESCRIPTION (Refer to Fig. 3) 2001-6037 Microphone speakers. daughter cards (the remote oscillator control module and the remote Enclosure Module contains a microphone, a microphone enclosure and two control module). The used to transmit voice messages a remote over the 2001 Voice Communications microphone contains a and allows any output signals Module located at the system panel. which, when pressed, deactivates voice coil cartridge 2) to transmit player, music and all the 6055 Mike CARDS INTERFACE (CONTRACTOR Kl RELAY) Microphone And Enclosure Module 3 REFERENCE enclosure module circuitry WD No. 841-479 shown on the following drawing: Microphone Panel) FUNCTION (Refer to Fig. 4) Condition microphone switch through the switch Sl contacts. in the released Kl on the mike interface energized. Loss position, and any output signal

– Communications Amplifiers Descriptions 1988 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing should be performed by quali- Simplex Representatives. repairs. DUAL POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE DESCRIPTION to Fig. 1) function of the Voice Communications of the input signal from the preamplifier. This signal is used to drive the system speakers. 2001-6001 Dual Power Amplifier to produce an enlarged dual amplifier consists of two amplifiers audio output transformers an Amplifier Tie Module. The dual amplifier operating voltage comes from the amplifier dedicated power supply WD No. 641-l 47) during normal conditions or from a battery reserve during a main power outage. amplifier, secondary amplifier), AMPLIFIER Kl OUTPUT to 2001 Voice Communications a description Concepts this block diagram. Kl Kl SELECT RELAY) MODULE AUDIO OUTPUT TRANSFORMER POWER AMPLIFIER MODULE 1 REFERENCES dual amplifier circuitry is shown on the following drawings: WD No. 841-279 (Amplifier Tie Module) No. 841-277 (Dual Power Amplifier No. 841-238 (Power Amplifier Board) Diagram) (primary amplifier), Kl (secondary amplifier) -de-energized loss of main power. STATUS Power Amplifier (841-238) Tie Module (841-279) -energized primary amplifier fails. FUNCTION to WD No. 841-277 and Fig. 2) Condition operating voltage energizes Kl (WD No. 841-238) on the primary and secondary amplifier boards. i-24V (WD No. 841-238) and energizes relay Kl . pin P2-4 of the 2001-3021 Power Supply (WD No. 841-147) applied to TBl-2 of the amplifier relay Kl is energized relay contacts transfer and the operating voltage is fed to the amplifiers. + 24V from pin Pl-1 of power supply (841-l 47) is applied to TBl-3 of the amplifier boards (WD No. 841-238). voltage is fed to Kl -A contacts and powers the amplifiers. low-level audio signal from the preamplifier This audio signal is fed through is now stepped up to the required voltage. applied to TBl-6 OV) terminals (WD No. 841- amplifier board and the audio output transformer. The audio output signal IN) and TBl-5 fed to the Amplifier Tie Module (the amplified output signal from the audio transformer of both amplifiers amplifier signal is fed to TBl-5 and TBl-3, and the secondary amplifier signal is fed to TBl-7 and TBl-9 output from the primary to the 841-2791). The tie module contains a relay which, when energized, switches output of the tie module (TBl-11 and amplifier. While in the normal condition (relay Kl de-energized), -12) comes from the primary amplifier. Separate outputs of the primary and secondary amplifier output signals seen on TBl -4 and TBl-6 amp) and TBl-8 and TBl -10 (secondary amp). Operation a failure of the primary amplifier occurs, a + 24V is applied to TBl -1 of the tie module, energizing 841-279). When relay Kl (backup) amplifier. output of the tie module transferred energized, Kl relay (WD the the primary a failure of the secondary amplifier occurs, the trouble will be detected and the system will continue functioning on primary amplifier. + V TRANSFERS RELAY CON- WHEN PRIMARY AMP TBl-6 MODULES SECONDARY ISECONDIRY AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER M

2001 Voice Communications Monitor Modules Descriptions when making any rapalrs. Instrlla~lon servicing performed Simplex Representatives. quail. DUAL PREAMPLIFIER MONITOR DESCRIPTION (Refer to Fig. 1) 2001-6027 which primary amplifiers. 2001 Voice Communications and Preamplifier Monitor Module used This module multi-amplifier a group one backup amplifier pre-amp monitor module contains following TBL indicators: 1 TBL – when the pre-amp 1 signal is missing. 2 TBL – when the pre-amp 2 signal is missing. to 2001 Voice Communications Concepts Manual for a this block diagram. PREAMPLIFIER MONITOR MODULE 1 REFERENCE pre-amp monitor module circuitry shown on the following drawing: WD No. 841-294 Preamplifier Monitor) 1997SimplexTime Co., Gardner, Mass 01441-0001 U S.A. FUNCTION (Refer to Fig. 2) Condition This module is used in systems with non-resound pre-amp 1 signal fed to pins R and 14 of the pre-amp monitor module, and the pre-amp 2 signal is fed pins 1 and 2 of the pre-amp monitor module. When both pre-amp signals are present, relay Kl is de-energized the TBL indicators are off. 1 Trouble the pre-amp 1 signal is missing at pins R and 14 for more than 20 seconds, relay Kl energizes. This causes Kl contacts transfer and the following conditions occur: PRE-AMP 1 TBL indicator + V sent out pin 6 (System Trouble). + V sent out pin M (to Pre-Amp Select Relay in Audio Control Module). OV sent out pin 7 (to printer if used). pre-amp 1 signal causing restored and the AUDIO TBL RESET switch Kl to de-energize. This, in turn, causes pressed, PRE-AMP 1 TBL indicator + V on pin 12 is go 2 Trouble the pre-amp 2 signal is missing at pins 1 and 2, the following conditions occur: PRE-AMP 2 TBL indicator + V sent out pin J. OV sent out pin L (to printer if used). the pre-amp 2 signal is again applied to pins 1 and 2, the PRE-AMP 2 TBL indicator goes out. POWER SUPPLY Kl PULSING) (COMM) PRE-AMP 2 1 LED PRE-AMP 1 TEL TEL RESET PRESSED VOUT WHEN PRE- 1 TEL V OUT WHEN PRE- TSL(PRE- – PIN VOUT WHEN PRE- 2 TEL PRINTER PREAMPLIFIER MODULE 2 DUAL PREAMPLlFlER MONITOR MODULE DESCRIPTION as 2001-6027 Dual Preamplifier Monitor Module except for the following: This module is used in systems with resound trouble. During a pre-amp 1 trouble, a momentary + V (instead of a steady + V) is applied to pin 6. Drawing Reference: the 6026 Dual Preamplifier Monitor drawing, see 2001-6026, WD No. 841-293. DUAL PREAMPLIFIER MONITOR MODULE DESCRIPTION to Fig. 3) as 2001-6027 Dual Preamplifier Monitor Module except for the following: This module is used in systems with resound trouble. During a pre-amp 1 trouble, a momentary V (instead of a + V) is applied to pin 6. After a pre-amp trouble, an AUDIO TBL RESET not reset the 6028 pre-amp monitor module. The 6028 its normal pins

,Simplex Voice Communications Modules Descriptions se&zing Simplex Representatives. when maklng any repairs. performed quail. OSCILLATOR DESCRIPTION SWITCH Fig. 1) 2001-6015 Oscillator Control Switch Module provides control of the system use of switches. switches are: TBL RESET corrected audio trouble when pressed momentarily, clears the STOP when set to the up position, deactivates all oscillators. CIRCUITS when set to the up position, activates all circuit modules. ALARM – when set to the up position, ensures sound order for the alarm to sound, however, all circuits switch or selected circuit switches only the alarm oscillator speakers. also be set to the up position.) is available 1 TONE when set to the up position, activates 1 tone oscillator unless overridden audio Module Descriptions). publication 2 TONE when set to the up position, activates 2 tone oscillator unless overridden audio Module Descriptions). publication a higher Audio a higher Audio – – CONTROL SWITCH MODULE 1 to 2001 Voice Communications Concepts Manual of this block diagram. a descrip- 1987SlmplexTimeRecordarCo.,Gardner, REFERENCE oscillator control module circuitry shown on the following drawing: WD No. 841-256 Control Switches) FUNCTION Fig. 2) output voltages of the oscillator control module are determined by the module switch settings. Figure 2 the module pin numbers and lists the output voltages present when its switches are activated. V OUT WHEN ALL CIRCUITS ACTIVATED 1 V OUT WHEN MANUAL ALARM ACTIVATED OUT WHEN AUX 1 TONE ACTIVATED OUT EXCEPT WHEN AUDIO RESET SWITCH ACTIVATED RESET L4 > 2 V OUT WHEN AUX 2 TONE ACTIVATED (AUDIO SYSTEM COMMON) CONTROL SWITCH MODULE 2 AUDIO CIRCUIT SELECTOR SWITCH MODULE DESCRIPTION to Fig. 3) 2001-6016 Audio Circuit Selector Switch Module provides manual control of two specific (usually speaker) in the 2001 Voice Communications System. There are four types of circuit selector modules: -6018 and -6019. The difference the number of circuit switches. The 2001-6016 has two circuit switches number of switches by two. Figure 3 shows the 2001-6019 2001-6016, each of these modules each consecutive module purposes. to 2001 Voice Communications a description this block C :oncepts AUDIO CIRCUIT. SWITCH MODULE 3 REFERENCE circuit selector module drawing: shown on WD No. 841-266 (2 Circuit Switches) Fig. 4) FUNCTION output voltages of circuit selector module are by the module switch settings. Figure 4 shows module pin numbers and output voltages when its switches are activated. IN WHEN ALL CIRCUITS ACTIVATED FIG. 2) ACTIVATED ACTIVATED

a ,Simplex Voice Communications Player and Tape Selector Modules Descriptions Fig. 1) 2001 Voice Communications Tape Player Module the building occupants. uses transmit HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing should be performed by quali- Simplex Representatives. repalrs. 2001-6058 Tape Cartridge 30 seconds of playing time. used with the tape player. Each track of the endless-loop, has tape player contains a speaker, one TBL LED and the following manual switches: when set to the up position, activates player TBL and SYST TBL indicators, sounds tone and activates tape player internal speaker circuit. 1 – when set to the up position (and the TEST switch is also set to the up position), activates 2 – when set to the up position (and the TEST switch is also set to the up position), activates and inhibits track 1. EJECTION when pressed, ejects tape the tape player. CONTROL signal of the speaker and the building speakers). playe?s 2 1 LED – when tape player or when the TEST switch is set to up position. removed ALARM to 2001 Voice Communications Manual a description this block Tape Player 1 1987 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass 01441-0001 U S.A tape player also contains (internally) a cartridge switch and a foil sensor. They function as follows: SWITCH when tape cartridge removed the tape player, activates player TBL and TBL indicators and sounds the tone device. SENSOR when the foil strip on the tape makes contact with the foil sensor, stops tape player motor homing). REFERENCE tape player circuitry No. 841-416 shown on the following drawing: to Fig. 2) FUNCTION Condition manual switches are set to the down position and the tape cartridge seated the tape player cartridge Loss (System Reset or Power Outage) operating voltage reset or from a power outage, causes the tape player motor to run until the tape homes. No message the tape player is fed to Pl-6 tape player circuitry – OV) and Pl-15 + 24V). If power is lost either from a reset as soon as power is restored. The reset broadcast during this period. 20 seconds after the tape player starts running, the system indicates trouble. (This trouble condition fed to the audio control module, because, whenever off and no message the tape broadcast no audio signals are present at the output of the primary pre-amp. Therefore, primary channel of the locks into trouble. primary oscillator. Since the primary oscillator tape player motor OV from Pl-10 POWER SUPPLY (-OV) TO ACTtVATE 1 (MESSAGE 1) ACTIVATE (MESSAGE 2) IN TO STOP TAPE WHEN MIKE V IN WHEN ALARM – ATEST MESSAGE 1 MESSAGE 2 r 2 I 1 V OUT WHEN TROUBLE TAPE PLAYER LEVEL AUDIO OUT WHEN PLAYER ACTtVATED LEVEL AUDIO SlGNAL(COMMON) WHEN TA

~BSirriplex 030 Verification Module Description Fig. 1) 2001-1030 Verification Control Module performs function as the 2001-1007 Control Module with one 1030 module can also verify a zone verifiable zones (zones by automatically wired zone activation. verification) checking The 1030 A Bus. switching capability 1 Amp for REFERENCE verification control module circuitry is shown on the following 030 No. 841-597 FUNCTION Fig. 2 for Specific All zones in the system need not be wired for the verification Zones without verification are called zones. Trouble supplier. 24VDC from power supply 24VDC out alert 1A (Ack) out in elem~ eyrtem Ack) pulse (D Bus) out during wrifiution MA) 24VDC max. -SEE Ground Remote Reset Switch =w 24VDC out system be silenced) 24VDC alarm Ack) 24VDC out on trouble silenced) JWI 24VDC max. operation power supply Reset 24VDC Bus of all verification to Output Pin 7 must only be used control control A Bus to zone 2 1996 Simplex Recorder Gardner. Mass 01441-0001 alarm conditions, an alarm pulse activation creates an alarm. a non-verifiable zone latches the control module (Pin 11) – Zones – alarm conditions, an initial alarm pulse activation After a 15-second in verification mode) and creates a verified system-wide alarm. repeated. any alarm pulse activated during the next 45 seconds a verifiable zone activates the verification mode has expired, verification mode (D the control module above 3 isolates verifiable and non-verifiable zones. 1 SOCKET 16 3 NON-VERIFIABLE ZONES WIRING REQUIRED i-c__-_————-_—–, 0 4 TBl-0 TAPE BACKI HANDLED BY EXISTING D BUS 3 11 86 l-008

QSimplex Battery Monitor the 2001-2069 battery monitor (FIGURE 1) into the 2001-8021 repack) as indicated below. Monitor 635601) 1 Unplug positive (red) battery wire from battery. Unplug battery harness motherboard. Battery monitor TBL LED lights. Plug battery harness other monitor plug. Connect battery monitor plug nearest the TBL LED (see FIGURE 1) to motherboard. Adjust R3 on motherboard FIGURE 2) for 27.6VDC between Fed battery wire battery te REFER,ENCE Component 2 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 Reconnect battery wire. Battery monitor TBL LED goes off within 20 seconds. Disconnect a battery Battery monitor TBL LED lights within 20 seconds. Reconnect battery lead. SYSTEM RESET clears the trouble. Remove AC power from panel and check for proper battery operation. If battery operation checks out, return system to normal. 8 86

[email protected] Fig. 1) Dual On-Off-Auto Module Description 2001-2091 Dual On-Off-Auto Switch Module provides manual or automatic control of remote devices elevators, use of switches. etc.) through switch module contains control circuits composed of the following manual switches and indicators: 1 position position manually activates circuit 1 (trouble condition circuit 1 (trouble condition indicated at the control module) indicated at the control module) position activates circuit 1 when the proper input is present – when circuit 1 switch is in the AUTO position when circuit 1 switch remote device is activated when circuit 1 switch is in the OFF position 2 functions of the switch and indicators of circuit 2 are the same as circuit 1. in the ON position or when switch in the AUTO position and Dual On-Off-Auto Switch Module 1 0 1984 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. REFERENCE dual on-off-auto switch module circuitry No. 841-541 FUNCTION Fig. 2) shown on the following drawing: output voltages of the dual on-off-auto switch module are determined by the module switch settings and voltages. Figure 2 shows the module output voltages when the switches are set to their various positions the proper input voltages are present. m . .-… m .,,LAR 2 V IN AS DETERMINED PARTICULAR OUT TO REMOTE WHEN SWITCH SET TO ON POSITION AUTO POSITION +V ON PIN V OUT TO TROUBLE BUS WHEN SWITCH 1 POSITION V OUT TO REMOTE WHEN SWITCH SET TO ON POSITION AUTO POSITION +V ON PIN Dual On-Off-Auto Switch Module 2

2001-3048 P.N.I.S. Code Transmitter Description Fig. 1) alarm conditions, the 2001-3048 P.N.I.S. Code Transmitter Module transmits four rounds of code within seconds. Each round can have up to 23 pulses (normal rate) or, if programmed, 46 pulses (fast rate). P.N.I.S. module contains 23 dip switches (Sl-1 thru Sl-8, S2-1 thru S2-8 and S3-1 thru S3-7) which are used programming the desired code. When a switch is set to the closed position, a pulse is activated and, when is set to the open position, the pulse is absent (pause). Switch S3-8 is used to set the code rate: open for normal rate (23 pulses maximum); closed for fast code rate (46 pulses maximum). P.N.I.S. module also contains the following indicator: CODING COMPLETED Off when normal condition On when coding operation completed following an alarm activation. REFERENCE P.N.I.S. module circuitry is shown on the following drawing: WD No. 841-551 P.N.I.S. Code Transmltter 1 0 1984 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. FbNCTION-(Refer 2) &a& conditions, the zone module applies a + V to pin Ml This voltage activates the P.N.I.S. module and pulses are sent out pins C ( – OV pulses) and E ( + V pulses). One of these outputs is tied to the system devices, causing them to respond in accordance with the programmed code. When -0V applied to 5 from the next highest priority coder, the output pulses at pins C and E are inhibited. the P.N.I.S. module is operating, -0V OV is sent out pin 12 to inhibit the 1 st (highest priority) coder. sent out pin J to inhibit the next lowest priority coder module, and V IN FROM ZONE MODULE M ALARM OV IN (WHEN ALARM) FROM THE HIGHEST PRIORITY CODER TO OUTPUT OF CODED PULSES PINS C AND E. OUT TO INHIBIT 1ST (HIGHEST r! 12 CODER WHEN CODING OV SYSTEM COMMON Oi PULSES (CODED) OUT SIGNALING DEVICES ALARM PULSES (CODED) OUT TO SIGNALING DEVICES ALARM OUT TO INHlBlT NEXT WHEN ALARM P.N.I.S. Code Transmitter 2 10 84

D!!Simplex 2001-3053 Temporal Code 3 Module Description alarm conditions, the 2001-3053 Temporal Code 3 Module transmits a series of pulses (with a temporal 3 pattern) out to the signaling devices. The signaling devices respond as follows: l/2 to 1 second l/2 l/2 to 1 second 112 second 112 to 1 second and 2 l/2 seconds REFERENCE temporal code 3 module circuitry is shown on the following drawing: l-3053 WD No. 841-542 FUNCTION alarm conditions, the zone module applies a +V to pin M. This activates the temporal code 3 and coded pulses are sent out pins C ( – OV pulses) and E ( f V pulses). One of these outputs is tied to system signaling devices causing them to respond in accordance with the code described in the introduction. module will not operate if a – OV is applied to pin 5. IN FROM ZONE MODULE ALARM TO INHIBIT CODE MODULE OV SYSTEM COMMON 15 PULSES (CODED) OUT DEVICES ALARM PULSES (CODED) OUT DEVICES ALARM Temporal Code 3 Module 0 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America.

[email protected] Systems and 2001-8022 possible exception of light (s) marked BYPASS are off. (See CONDITION CONDITION other with (s) marked NORM are on. CONDITION signals are sounding. light marked ALARM Any time above flashing on each zone module reporting alarm. may occur at the same time. occur, situation must be treated as an alarm condition, even feature 2001-3042), alarm signals will be automatically alarm signals at any time by activating ALARM to steady acknowledge (marked ACK). Operating alarm signals will sound again, and the red ALARM alarm signals and change switch again to silence To Do In Case Of An Alarm: the system contains a signal duration off after a preset duration. can silence also changes another alarm that zone will flash. Operate from flashing flashing reported steady a different zone, acknowledge Reset: the alarm situation has been investigated and cleared: Reset all activated alarm-initiating Momentarily push the switch marked RESET. CONDITION device or more yellow location of trouble). red alarm The above conditions are the only ones which can be considered as indications of a legitimate beeping. (except BYPASS) are on steady or flashing. yellow are on. combination of trouble and alarm indications must be treated as an alarm condition. indicate specific cause Silence Tone Device: off device, momentarily ACK) on Control To Do In Case Of Trouble: Silence tone device as explained previously. your can be corrected Simplex branch office soon as that 1987 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 Local Service Representative, master bypass switch on the Control Module must be in the the system be fully secure, CONDITION all zones position, and all bypass switches on Zone Modules must be in the NORM position. the BYPASS position, master bypass switch allows bypassing of all zones connected on Zone Modules allow bypassing of individual zones. yellow allows trouble; open or shorted on the Zone Module. A bypassed zone a bypass zone, switching a zone will be indicated by the ALARM will cause trouble a zone without alarm signaling. However, normal activity marked BYPASS on a Zone Module will flash to indicate that the zone is in the bypass mode. an alarm has occurred alarm signals trouble conditions and then return all bypass switches sound. To fully secure zone to the or mode will cause premises, be sure to first check for and correct any alarm the ARMED and/or NORM positions. activation of alarm-initiating also monitored the switch. Bypass a Timer Module, you can delay activation of alarms during time needed enter or switch marked START on the Timer Module (or activating a remote key switch) starts the timer, and set (10 sec. to 10 the length of time to which the module are bypassed timer held activated marked TIMER ACTIVATED than the preset delay time, alarm conditions will occur. during the time delay. OPERATIONS your system with a remote key switch. (See previous descriptions of system reset and bypass conditions). supervisory module 2001-5016,

[email protected] LIFE-ALARM FIREAND TELEPHONE SYSTEM CONDITION light on steady to indicate normal power on a remote phone is either removed from its cradle.or plugged into a remote jack, the associated lamp on the line module will the remote phone. (This signal verifies to the remote phone operator that the line is intact.) the audible tone device will beep, and a busy signal is applied cradle will silence master phone from call, place the TALK/NORM switch on the line module in the TALK position. (CALL ACKNOWLEDGE) audible tone device. To a call occurs, removing will the red CALL lamp to illuminate steadily and will silence the busy signal on the remote phone.) Should remote phone connected on the same line module be put into operation, be the existing conversation with no indications on the master panel. If a remote phone on an additional module CALL lamp will (TO acknowledge additional call, place the TALK/NORM switch of the affected LINE module to TALK position.) conversation between a maximum of three lines with two telephones on each line may take put into operation during an existing conversation, associated will RESTORE restore the system to normal: Replace all phones to their hung up or disconnected positions. Return all TALK/NORM switches on the LINE modules to the NORM position. The NORMISIL. switch on the phone control module should be in the NORM position after the procedure has been completed. TEST the push-button switch on the FLASHER module marked LED TEST. Activating all the on the LINE modules. switch will CONDITION following are indications of trouble: device sounding. NORM PWR. light off. or more LINE module amberTBL CONTROL module TBL lamp on. CONTROL module EARTH lamp on (optional). on. Silence Tone Device the associated NORMISIL. switch in the SIL. position. when trouble condition has been tone device will sound again as a reminder to put the switch back to the NORM. To Do In Case Of Trouble: Silence the tone device as explained previously. immediately call your local Simplex branch office that the trouble can be corrected as soon as Local Service Representative, NO. 10 80 1980 Z$nplex Recorder Gardner. Mass.. 01441 U.S.A.

!&Simplex Communication Fire Alarm System Alarm 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner. Mass HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. servicing should be performed by quali- Simplex Representatives. VSICE COMMUNICATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS: designed sound an alarm over only the speaker circuit(s) panel-enclosed audio system circuit(s) in alarm. The selected speaker circuit(s) continues sound- by the specific acknowledged, reset or otherwise silenced by some- this audible alarm until the alarm condition at the panel locatior.. response to the trans- of particular switches within the panel, and also provides for the voicing of instructions over some all of its speaker circuits at any time (including during the sounding of alarms). The acknowledgement addition, this system sounds alarms an alarm silences all speakers not initiated by a alarm The another source to sound feature c: the system allows subsequent alarm-initiation speakers (if selected) as well as sounding again previously selected speakers. A panel which lacks an ACK button on its FIREITBL CONTROL module does not have resound capa- Stopping speakers sounding by some means other than depressing ACK button (i.e. OSC STOP switch to its position) will disable the panel resound circuitry. A panel which contains a TIMER module will automatically silence the signals and disable the panel circuitry after a preset duration. 1: TIMER modules are required in some panels to prevent the amplifiers TIMER module has timed out by illuminating 2: The panel indicates overheating. PRE AMP and MONITOR trouble lamps. visible through the panel doors, indicate system conditions as follows: the Green NORM PWR lamps illuminated Standby Condition Power is applied to the system The system is armed and ready to respond to any alarm initiation anywhere within building. or more Amber TBL lamps either flashing or steadily Trouble Condition Defects exist within The system may not be capable of responding to any or some alarm initiations. One or more switches are not in the position. AC power failure. system internal or external circuitry. ALARM lamp flashing Unacknowledged Alarm Condition At least one alarm initiating device has tripped in the zone represented by the flashing The ACK button has not been pushed to silence the speakers. ALARM lamp steadily Acknowledged Alarm Condition At least one alarm initiating device has tripped in thezone The ACK button has been pushed to silence the speakers. by the illuminated A panel which an ACK button on its FlRElTBL CONTROL module will cause steady illumination of an ALARM lamp during all alarm conditions. ACK button on the front of the FIREITBL COIN- SILENCE THE SPEAKERS DURING A SELECTIVE ALARM alarm by momentarily depressing module The speakers will resound if a fire occurs in another zone. Microphone use requires manual operation. the OSC STOP switch The speakers will not resound if a fire occurs The microphone will remain fully operational. The panel will visually its position another zone. RESET THE SYSTEM FOLLOWING SELECTIVE ALARM Locate the device(s) which initiated Restore the alarm initiating device(s) to its (their) standby condition. Reset the panel as follows: alarm. trouble shortly after you transfer the OSC STOP switch. Depress the RESET button on the front of the FIRE/T

a ,Simplex 2080-9008 Code 3 Add-On 2080-9008 Temporal Code 3 Add-On provides a temporal code 3 pattern for 4207, 4208 and other existing alarm systems. The temporal code 3 add-on consists of a 2001-3053 Temporal Code 3 Module, relay, and terminal board. The assembly housed in a l/4 unit, 3 l/2-inch deep back box and is mounted the fire alarm control panel. alarm conditions, to the signaling devices via the signal panels. The signaling devices respond as follows: second temporal code 3 add-on transmits a series of pulses (with a temporal code 3 pattern) to 1 second to 1 second and 2 l/2 seconds to 1 second second temporal code 3 add-on circuitry are shown on the following drawings: I-1 RELAY 2 3 4207 1A REFERENCE n Ax pi-] RELAY PANELS CODER 041-544 PANELS G TEMPORAL CODER 641-544 Remove existing wire from 7 of control panel terminal shown on panel. Aux relay energized by control on alarm. N Remove existing wire from terminal on control panel and terminal on signal panel. Aux relay energized by control on alarm. Temporal Code 3 Add-On Fire Alarm Systems No. 841-545) 1 0 1985 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. Manuals Online! – NOTE FOR 24VAC OPERATION, REMOVE BETWEEN TERMINALS & TBl-5, TBl-4 & TB1-6. 24V IN TO START CODER MODULE WD. 841-542 CODED SIGNAL Temporal Code 3 Add-On Schematic No. 835-438 . . WD No. 841-544) 2 to WD Nos 841-544 and 841-545) system general alarm relay sends out 120VAC, 24VAC or 24VDC to the temporal alarm conditions, 2001-3053 Temporal Code 3 Module (via RECT 1). When activated, 3 add-on. This voltage activates energize Relay 2001-3053 module sends out (pin C) a series of pulses (with a temporal code 3 pattern) . At the time the alarm is initiated, control panel sends out – OV to relay terminal 12 (when Kl D is used) each time the relay is energized by pulses from the 2001-3053 module, relay terminal 8 sends out – OV (with coded pattern) to the system signaling devices via the signal panels. (if used) (if used) used used or + 24VDC or -0V IN (Motherboard OV out when alarm OUT (Motherboard Out) 24VDC out when alarm OV pulses (coded) in when alarm 24VDC out when alarm Kl (when Kl D contacts are used) out to signal pulses when alarm OV in when alarm 1 85 Manuals Online! –

CSFM Listed* Accessories Station Devices, Digital Alarm Transmitter (DACT) Model 2080-9024 channel DACT for connection to Simplex alarm control panels without internal DACT Dual telephone line interface with supervised status DACT supervises control panel connections Control panel can supervise the DACT by monitoring contacts Compatible with Simplex fire alarm control panels 24 VDC, and Alarm, Trouble, and contacts UL Listed to Standard 864 per NFPA 72 for Central Service: Operation is FCC Part 15 approved to report in the following formats: SK 3/1 Sescoa 3/1 SK 4/2 and SK FSK (4/2) Radionics BFSK Contact ID SIA features: Programmable power fail report delay Fuseless overload protection with automatic reset Auxiliary relay is programmable to indicate alarm or audible trouble alarm 2080-9024 digital alarm communicating (DACT) monitor the status of a fire alarm panel and reports alarms, troubles, and conditions to a central supervising station. (24 VDC) with battery backup is supplied by the alarm control panel. Local AC mains are monitored power loss with trouble reporting programmable with time delay or with a selectable delay of from 6 to 12 Communications. Communications to supervising station are via two monitored telephone If one line fails for more than 90 seconds, a trouble is transmitted on the other line and an internal alert audio signal will sound. If both lines should the internal audio trouble signal will sound. a programmable time of day test signal is to the supervising station once every 24 hours. Relay Output. A SPDT auxiliary relay is with operation programmable to indicated alarm trouble. 2080-9024 CHANNEL COMMUNICATOR VOLTAGE PRESENT INSIDE, POWER TO THIS BEFORE SERVICING DEVICE BJ-4297 IN USA 121764 DACT Voltage VDC, 24 VDC nominal from Fire Alarm Control Current @ 24 VDC 84 mA Standby mA Alarm Relay Contacts Form C (SPDT) rated 1 A 24 VDC/VAC, resistive 2 required Jack Type start Indicators, Internal Line Trouble Red, one per line W x 10-1/8 H x 3 D mm x 257 mm x 76 mm) lbs (2.72 kg) This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. This was not approved by ULC, FM, or MEA (NYC) as of document revision date. listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property Tyco Safety Products Westminster. 10/2007 Programming 2080-9024 can be programmed for: telephone changes, time changes, loop response time, user installer codes, account numbers, AC mains power reporting time delay, and system or zone status. is performed by using the optional Remote or by using a PC with software and compatible modem. Architect/Engineer Specification contractor shall furnish and install an approved communicator transmitter to transmit fire alarm to a central supervising location. The shall be UL 864 listed as conforming to the of NFPA 72 for Central Station connections shall be UL listed as compatible with the connected fire alarm control panel. 24 VDC operating and battery backup shall be provided by the fire control panel. Product Selection communicator transmitter shall have the capability of two telephone lines and of

ULC, CSFM Listed; (NYC) Acceptance* System Peripherals Fire Suppression System Abort Switches and Releasing Circuit (RAC) Maintenance Switches switches provide a manual Fire Suppression release abort request: Pushbutton momentary switch is mounted on a steel single-gang plate A protruding collar protects the switch from contact (collar is removable if required) Available flush or surface mount Flush mounting requires standard single-gang box Surface mounting includes a red mounting box Models are available with internal 1.2 k resistor for limited operation switches provide a secure and visible means for servicing Fire Suppression Releasing Appliance Circuits (RACs): Maintained position keyswitch is mounted on a steel double-gang plate Key is removable in either normal or disabled Disabled position opens connection to output circuit places a 16.2 k resistor across the input circuit initiate a supervisory condition at the host panel Disconnect indicator lamp is a bright incandescent with red lens, powered from separate 24 VDC Available for flush or surface mount Flush mounting requires a standard double-gang box Surface mount models includes a red mounting box listed to Standard 864 systems typically require maintenance disconnect and often require abort switches. These abort and switches are clearly labeled and combine easy with rugged construction for high integrity Refer to page 2 for specific product listings. NOTE: MEA is not applicable to Switches. FM is not applicable to Abort Switches. As indicated on page 2, these products have been approved by the California State Fire (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See Listing 7300-0026:313 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material in this document. Abort switches are accepted for use City of New York of Buildings MEA35-93E. Maintenance switches were not approved by FM as document revision date. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. SUPPRESSION ABORT AND HOLD Switch 1/2 size) SUPPRESSION / DISABLE Switch with Disconnect Indicator Lamp 1/2 size) 11/2006 Product Selection (see page 3 for specifications) Switches Flush mount Surface mount; includes mounting box Status ULC, & CSFM MEA (NYC) size; includes 3 position contact block housing one contact block installed Switches for 4004R Series Suppression Release Panel Current Limited Operation Flush mount Surface mount; includes mounting box Status ULC, & CSFM MEA (NYC) size; includes 1.2 k 1W resistor for current operation and 3 position contact block housing with contact block installed Switches with Disconnect Indicator Lamp Status ULC, & CSFM size; includes 3 position contact block housing 2 contact blocks installed; disabled position opens to output and places a 16.2 k resistor across the circuit; resistor is removable if required for retrofit Flush mount Surface mount; includes mounting box for Field Installation Additional Contact Block for Abort or Maintenance Switch; 1 Form C contact; UL recognized component for use these switches; listings and approvals are not applicable Abort Switch Installation Reference width (76 mm) box is supplied with surface mount Switch 2080-9057 or 2080-9068 (56 mm) into box SUPPRESSION ABORT mm) Switch 4-1/2″ mm) AND HOLD rec

firealarmresources.com

CSFM Listed* Battery Cabinet) Accessories Batteries and Battery Cabinets; 110 Ah Sealed Lead-Acid and Compatible Battery Cabinet (without charger) Batteries have UL 924 recognized pressure relief Batteries, 2 required for 24 VDC system appearance may vary) 12 V, 110 Ah rechargeable sealed battery features: Output terminals are high current posts; connecting is included with battery cabinet UL, ULC, and FM fire alarm system requirements are when these batteries are used with a charger and compatible battery cabinet Battery Cabinet (ordered separately): Use when fire alarm control panel internal charger is of charging 110 Ah batteries (not applicable ULC listed 4100ES/4100U systems) For compatible Simplex 4100ES/4100U systems, requires two wires to a 4100-5128 Battery Terminal Block located in the cabinet For compatible 4100 Legacy systems, wiring requires wires for charging and two wires for battery Refer to data sheet S4081-0002 for 4100ES/4100U battery cabinet with charger 110 Ah rechargeable sealed-lead acid batteries reliable and repeatable discharge and recharge for use in fire alarm and other systems For use with Simplex fire alarm control panels battery chargers capable of up to 110 Ah, mount these in external battery cabinet 2081-9280, located to the control panel. Details Connections. Connect two of these 12 V batteries series to produce 24 V system voltage. Battery sets must of identical voltage, model number, appearance, and the same date of manufacture for proper Battery chemicals and materials can be recycled. to information shipped with the battery or on its case. to the battery manufacturer or to a similarly qualified processing facility for proper disposal. Battery cabinet 2081-9280 has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM 7315-0026:144 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible 2081-9280 was not ULC listed or approved by FM or MEA (NYC) as of revision date. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. Battery Cabinet Details (Continued) Battery capacity testing is recommended to be by using a sealed lead-acid battery tester to withdraw a minimum of battery charge. Testing available through your local Simplex product supplier. Information. Refer to Installation Instructions for Battery Cabinet installation details. See 4100ES panel data sheet S4100-0031 for additional power charger information. Simplex Battery Chargers Reference System Power Supplies (SPS)* 4100-9xxx Series Additional SPS* Remote Power Supply (RPS)* TrueAlert Addressable Power (TPS)* Legacy power supplies 4100-5127 Specifications Battery Cabinet Battery Reference Information W x 12 H x 12 D mm x 305 mm x 305 mm) battery) W x 9 H x 10-1/2 D mm x 230 mm x 267 mm) and cables for compatibility with batteries 110 Ah @ 20 hour discharge rate mounted fuseholder with 80 A included V per battery, 2 required for 24 V system Terminals 14 AWG to 2 AWG (2 mm2 to 32 mm2) High current terminal posts Red 82 lbs (37 kg), per battery 4100ES/4100U Wiring and 2081-9280 Battery Cabinet Detail Reference Wiring Distance Chart Size

ULC, CSFM Listed* specifically for protection of fire alarm including: DC power (200 mA maximum) Monitor circuits Audio riser circuits Firefighter telephone riser circuits Refer to page 2 for application details Listed as an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector to 497B, Protectors for Data Communications and Alarm Circuits Listed as a Surge Suppressor to ULC-S527, Control for Fire Alarm Systems For higher current ILCP applications (up to 5A), refer Model 2081-9028 on data sheet S2081-0008 stages of protection include: Line-to-Line protection Line-to-Earth protection Rugged epoxy encapsulated package transients caused by lightning or by on high voltage power lines are conditions that low voltage wiring circuits to be adequately This protection is most effective when placed at location where such circuits leave or enter the building. Protection. The 2081-9027 Isolated Loop Protector (ILCP) is designed to protect Simplex Alarm circuits from those electrical transients induced wire runs that are routed external to the building. of its small package size, it can be easily mounted the location that achieves maximum protection. 1: Overvoltage Protector Applications. Model is for use as an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector is different from operation as an Overvoltage For Overvoltage Protector applications, refer to Protector model 2081-9044 which is listed to 864, rated for up to 200 mA, and documented on data S2081-0016. 2: Operation with other Circuit Types. of the 2081-9028 ILCP has been quantified use with other circuit types for specific applications its low resistance is desired. Contact your local product supplier for application guidance. Accessories Circuit Protection; Model 2081-9027 Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) TIME RECORDER CO. MA. 01441 U.S.A. INST. 574-803 Isolated Loop Circuit Protector Specifications Voltage Rating Voltage Voltage Capacitance Current Rating Resistance 38 VDC, VAC RMS 47 V typical 45 VDC, VAC RMS 56 V typical 48 VDC, VAC RMS 75 V typical typical mA maximum <1 Nanosecond (10-9) <25 Nanosecond (10-9) 2000 A (10 x 50 pulse) 2000 A (8 x 20 pulse) 5000 A (10 x 50 Specifications 7 W x 1 D x 1 1 H mm x 35 mm x 27 mm) epoxy encapsulated (102 mm) square box, (54 mm) minimum depth F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) RH, at 30 C coded, 18 AWG mm2), 10 long (245 mm) 14 AWG, 10 long mm) box requirement Rating Rating Leads Lead Instructions This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in document. This product was not FM or MEA (NYC) approved as of document date. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. 4/2013 Wiring Requirements alarm system wiring that is run external to the and is protected by the use of 2081-9027 ILCPs be installed in accordance with the individual system installation instructions including properly twisted and shielded pairs, and observance of following precautions. To ensure optimized protection, the ILCPs shal

asiinplex 2081-9027 Loop Circuit Protector Simplex Model 2081-9027 protects Simplex building system equipment runs that are external the building. electrical on voltage circuits, but are not compatible with: 2081-9027 will protect most Simplex AC input power. DC power to BT/FABT Transponders. RS232 Communication. Video signals. 27VAC RMS line to line 35VAC RMS line to ground operating current: MA resistance: All signal which would be degraded by 6 ohms per line of added resistance. Any signals which exceed operating specifications below. operating voltage (for voltage breakdown see chart below): Ohms per line (6 Ohms per protector) BREAKDOWN RANGE UL 4978): OOVS) OOV/uS) – 350v – 360V – 450v illustratioir next page) PER UL 4978 LISTING REQUIREMENTS: external wiring must be confined with electric such a manner a one block area containing no possibility of accidental building of origin. The wiring must also failure of supports or or power conductors operating at over 300V peak to ground. For optimum protection, the 2081-9027 apart from the protected equipment and as close as practical point where the circuit leaves or enters the building. Protected and unprotected wiring must not share the same conduit. Mount the protector a 4 in. (10.16 cm) or larger square box. 1996 Simplex specifications Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. 4 96 At least 2 in. (5.08 cm) distance must separate the from the conduit. Cut the protector green as short as possible and tie it to the mounting box with a standarcl grounding Bond the box containing protector the Building Ground Electrode System (unified earth ground). Use 12 AWG (3.309 mm2) or larger solid copper wire. The ground wire length must not exceed 28 ft. (8.6 m). Bends in the ground wire of less than 2 in. (5.08 cm) radius are not permitted. enclosed metal conduit, the ground wire must be bonded to the conduit at both ends. The earth ground describes a common ground the protected equipment system, or telephone system. A. Connect protector brown and violet leads to the lines coming from the protected equipment. Connect protector orange and yellow leads to the lines going out of the building. Connect one of the protector gray leads to one of the cable shields. Then connect remaining gray to the other shield. At the protector, dress must separate two cables). and output cables as far apart as possible less than 2 in. [5.08 cm] At the signal source, connect the cable shield to the cabinet ground screw. The following signal sources: BMUX communication or fire alarm panel for alarm initiating or signal circuits. CONNECTIONS in. Square Box (min.)

ULC, CSFM Listed* Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) for up to A of DC or audio current: Low impedance design minimizes voltage drop For internal or external applications (refer to page 2 for wiring requirements) Refer to specific panel field wiring diagrams for application information Listed as an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector to UL 497B, for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Listed as a Surge Suppressor to ULC-S527, Control for Fire Alarm Systems See Note 1 below for additional application reference For lower current ILCP applications (up to 200 mA), to Model 2081-9027 on data sheet S2081-0007 SLCs, IDNAC SLCs, and TrueAlert SLCs is compatible with: DC notification appliance circuits (NACs) Speaker circuit NACs (25 VRMS) Other circuit types (see Note 2 below) stages of protection for DC and audio Line-to-Line Protection Line-to-Earth protection epoxy encapsulated package transients caused by lightning or by on high voltage power lines are conditions that low voltage wiring circuits to be adequately This protection is most effective when placed at location where such circuits leave or enter the building. Protection. The 2081-9028 Isolated Loop Protector (ILCP) is designed to protect Simplex Alarm circuits from those electrical transients induced wire runs that are routed external to the building. of its small package size, it can be easily mounted the location that achieves maximum protection. 1: Overvoltage Protector Applications. Model is for use as an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector is different from operation as an Overvoltage For Overvoltage Protector applications, refer to Protector model 2081-9044 which is listed to 864, rated for up to 200 mA, and documented on data S2081-0016. 2: Operation with other Circuit Types. of the 2081-9028 ILCP has been quantified use with other circuit types for specific applications its low resistance is desired. Contact your local product supplier for application guidance. Accessories Circuit Protection; Model 2081-9028 Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) TIME RECORDER CO. MA. 01441 U.S.A. INST. : 574-805 Isolated Loop Circuit Protector Specifications Rating Rating Rating Current Rating Resistance Inductance Capacitance Time Current and Current Reference SLCs and SLCs VDC, 28 VAC RMS VDC, 33 VAC RMS A Nanosecond (10-9) and line-to-earth A (8 x 20 pulse) A (10 x 50 is limited to 1000 ft (305 m) a maximum of two (2) ILCPs per branch Specifications box requirement Leads Instructions W x 2 D x 1 H mm x 50 mm x 25 mm) encapsulated, beige (102 mm) square box, (54 mm) minimum depth coded, 18 AWG (0.82 mm2), long (203 mm) This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in document. This product was not FM or MEA (NYC) approved as of document date. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. 5/2013 Wiring Requirements alarm system wiring that is run external to the and is protected by the use of 2081-9028 ILCPs be installed in accordance with the individual system installation instructions including properly

ULC, CSFM Listed* specifically for protection of fire alarm including: DC power (200 mA maximum) Data communications Local energy city circuit connections Rugged epoxy encapsulated package Refer to page 2 for application details stages of protection include: Line-to-Line protection and Line-to-Earth protection Reference: Listed as an Overvoltage Protector to UL 864, Control and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems Listed as an Overvoltage Protector to ULC-S527, Units for Fire Alarm Systems Listed as an Isolated Loop Circuit Protector to 497B, Protectors for Data Communications and Alarm Circuits Compatible with the requirements of the National Code (NFPA 70) Circuit Protection. Electrical transients caused by or by disturbances on high voltage power lines cause damage to low voltage fire alarm circuits. Proper of 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors can the energy from those electrical transients to a that can be safely handled by the circuits requiring This protection is most effective when placed at locations where the circuits leave and enter buildings. 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector provides multiple of protection against electrical transients. The small size allows it to be easily mounted at the location achieves maximum protection. Wiring Requirements alarm system wiring that is run external to the building is protected by 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors shall installed in accordance with the individual system installation instructions including properly twisted and shielded wire pairs, and observance the following precautions. To ensure optimized protection, the 2081-9044 Protector shall be located as close as possible the point at which the circuits leave or enter the buildings installed in dedicated metallic electrical boxes. distance is limited to one contiguous property. total maximum wire length is determined by the application allowable limit as specified with protectors, but must not exceed 3270 ft (1 km). grounding conductor shall be 12 AWG with a length of 28 ft (8.5 m), run in as straight a line as and connected to the building grounding electrode per NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code. Accessories Protection; Model 2081-9044 Protector PROTECTOR NO. 2081-9044 DRY APPLICATION/SIGNALING DEVICE INST. : 574-832 TIME RECORDER CO. MA. 01441 U. S. A. 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Specifications 38 VDC, VAC RMS 47 V typical 45 VDC, VAC RMS 56 V typical 48 VDC, VAC RMS 75 V typical typical mA maximum <1 Nanosecond (10-9) <25 Nanosecond (10-9) 2000 A (10 x 50 pulse) 2000 A (8 x 20 pulse) 5000 A (10 x 50 Voltage Rating Voltage Voltage Capacitance Current Rating Resistance Specifications box requirement Rating Rating Leads Lead Instructions 7 W x 1 D x 1 1 H mm x 35 mm x 27 mm) epoxy encapsulated (102 mm) square box, (54 mm) minimum depth F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) RH, at 30 C coded, 18 AWG mm2), 10 long (245 mm) 14 AWG, 10 long mm) This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in document. This product was not FM or MEA (NYC) approved as of document date. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product for the latest sta

Model 2081-9044 Protector Instructions Simplex Model 2081-9044 protects Simplex building system equipment from overvoltage conditions induced on runs that are external to the building. 2081-9044 is listed as compatible with the following circuits: 4120 Network Communications (RS-485 only) DC power to ZAMs and Annunciators MAPNET II Communications RUI Communications 2120 Communications City Circuit Wiring (Local energy only) operating voltage: 27VAC RMS line to line 35VAC RMS line to ground operating current: MA resistance: Ohms per line (6 Ohms per protector) PROCEDURE (See illustration on next page.) For optimum protection, install the 2081-9044 apart from the protected equipment and as close as practical to the where the circuit leaves or enters the building. Protected and unprotected wiring must not share the same conduit. Mount the protector in a 4 in. (10.16 cm) or larger square box. At least 2 in. (5.08 cm) distance must separate the from the conduit. Cut the protector green lead as short as possible and tie it to the mounting box with a standard grounding II Communication Net is protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,796,025. 1995, 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. (574-832) 5 95 Bond the box containing the protector to the grounding electrode system of the building containing the protected Use 12 AWG (3.309 mm2) or larger solid copper wire. The ground wire length must not exceed 28 ft. (8.6 m). Bends in the ground wire of less than 2 in. (5.08 cm) radius are not permitted. If enclosed in metal conduit, the ground wire must be bonded to the conduit at both ends. A. Connect the protector brown and violet leads to the lines coming from the protected equipment. Connect the protector orange and yellow leads to the lines going out of the building. Connect one of the protector gray leads to one of the cable shields. Then connect the remaining gray lead the other shield. separate the two cables). At the protector, dress the input and output cables as far apart as possible (no less than 2 in. [5.08 cm] distance At the signal source, connect the cable shield to the cabinet ground screw. The following represent signal sources: BMUX for 2120 Communications. or fire alarm panel for all other circuits. CONNECTIONS STEP ABOVE IN. SQUARE BOX (MIN.) A B SHIELD SCREW AWG (MIN.) AWG (MIN.) FT. (MAX.) A B THE ORANGE YELLOW LEADS ANOTHER 2081-9044 (574-832) 5 95 2081-9044 Protector Instructions Simplex Model 2081-9044 protects Simplex building system equipment from overvoltage conditions induced on runs that are external to the building. 2081-9044 is listed as compatible with the following circuits: 4120 Network Communications (RS-485 only) DC power to ZAMs and Annunciators MAPNET II Communications RUI Communications 2120 Communications City Circuit Wiring (Local energy only) operating voltage: 27VAC RMS line to line 35VAC RMS line to ground operating current: MA resistance: Ohms per line (6 Ohms per protector) PROCEDURE (See illustration on next page.) For optimum protection, install the 2081-9044 apart from the protected equipment and as close as practical to the where the circuit leaves or enters the building. Protected and unprotected wiring must not share the same conduit. Mount the protector in a 4 in. (10.16 cm) or larger square box. At least 2 in. (5.08 cm) distance must separate the from the conduit. Cut the protector green lead a

Cautions and Warnings of 2081-9046 Coil Module Coil Module Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. publication shows how to connect the 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Refer to the 4010 Fire Alarm Front Installing, Operating, and Programming Instructions (574-052) for information. Refer to the 842-058 Field Wiring Diagram for 4010 wiring information. For other FACPs see Field Wiring 841-669 for the 4002, 841-984 for the 4002 non-power limited, for the 4020, and 841-941 for the 4100. 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module (shown in Figure 1) supervises and power for an electrically compatible suppression release solenoid coil, connected to a 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The input from the NAC must be connected between the Red and Black wires of module. The output control voltage to the solenoid is taken from the Yellow Black wires of the module. The output control voltage to the suppression is activated when the NAC is activated, alarm state (i.e., +24 VDC to Red wire and 0 VDC to the Black wire). The output control voltage to the solenoid is non-active when the NAC is non-active in a supervisory (i.e. negative to the Red wire and positive to the Black wire). The module for supervision of the connection to the solenoid coil. Diode suppression also provided for overvoltage inductive spikes. 1. Coil Supervision Module 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA Specifications and information shown were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice. B Coil Supervision Module Specifications lists below show the input power requirements and the output specifications the 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module. Power Requirements Nominal Voltage Specifications Nominal Voltage Maximum Current Stand By Current VDC VDC A @ 24 VDC mA (Maximum) REVERSE NAC, +ALARM/-SUPERVISION NAC+ -ALARM/+SUPERVISION NAC- Yellow and Black wires connected to the solenoid are limited (indicated by shaded area in Figure 2). must maintain 1/4 separation between the Yellow Black wires and the two input Black and Red power wires. SUPERVISED FOR AND GROUND FAULTS 1 1 SUPERVISION MODULE LOCATED IN CONNECTION BOX PER CIRCUIT) 1: Separate conduit entrances are required for power limited (Red and Black) non-power limited (Yellow and Black) wire pairs. 2: Power limited cabling must be either FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalent type cable the NEC. 2. Wiring Connections for Coil Supervision Module B

FM Approved* or dual channel intrinsically safe, isolated barrier modules: 2081-9062, Single channel 2081-9063, Dual channel requirements of National Electrical Code 500-517 for Hazardous Locations: Classes I, II, & III Divisions 1 & 2 Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, & G with Simplex intrinsically safe stations and simple apparatus: Refer to page 2 for compatible product details compatible smoke detector model Product selection summary is detailed on page 7 accessories (ordered separately): 2975-9218, Red cabinet with solid door and lock 2081-9061, Module installation kit Intrinsically Safe Modules are for use with FM Simplex control panels to make initiating circuit wiring safe for use in locations where concentrations of flammable gases or other may exist. The intrinsically safe module is an power-limited barrier that limits the output to a level below ignition for atmospheres defined NEC Articles 500-517 for Classes I, II, & III, 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, & G. Considerations. The installation of safe modules requires strict adherence to compatibility lists and must be in accordance with product installation instructions and applicable codes wiring practices. all applicable references thoroughly before the intrinsically safe design. Alarm System Accessories Intrinsically Safe Devices and Dual Channel Isolated Barrier Modules by Safe Barrier Module Mounted in Cabinet with cover removed, wiring and conduit shown for reference only) Modules 2081-9062 and 2081-9063** Voltage (Vin) to 35 VDC Current (Iin) mA maximum, limited by module < 23.7 V VOUT = VIN - (400 x IIN) - 0.7 V > 23.7 V VOUT = VIN – (400 x IIN) Current Temperature Humidity current (cid:100) 40 mA circuit current (cid:100) 65 mA F to 120(cid:113) F (0(cid:113) C to 49(cid:113) C) to 85% RH maximum 86 F (30 C) Cabinet; Required, Ordered Separately H x 4-1/4 W (including terminal x 13/16 D (114 mm x 108 mm x mm) W x 8-3/8 H x 3-1/2 D mm x 213 mm x 89 mm) for barrier module mounting mm DIN rail type), mounting control drawing, and end-of-line resistors Installation Kit; Required, Ordered Separately 10/2003 Refer to page 2 for listing exceptions. This application is FM approved only. Contact your Simplex product supplier for additional information. Listings and approvals under Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. Refer to page 7 for listing of approved entity parameters and allowable wiring distances. NOTE: Intrinsically Safe applications are NOT with Alarm Verification Intrinsically Safe Barrier Module Compatibility 2081-9062 and 2081-9063 Intrinsically Safe report alarms as a current limited condition. FM is for use with the Simplex fire alarm control and peripheral devices described in the following chart. Compatibility Reference Simplex Fire Alarm Control Panels and Modules Series and 4005 Class B IDCs, both standard and current B IDCs B IDC module 4100-5004 B IDC module 4100-5005 Adapter Modules (ZAMs) B (surface cover); MAPNET II communications only B (flush cover); MAPNET II communications only Initiating Devices* Stations Series Action Station Action (Breakglass) Station Apparatus B, for use with compatible Simplex fire alarm control panels; MAPNET II or IDNet device which does not store or generate more than 1.2 V, 100 mA, or 20 (cid:80)J (typically a dry contact heat detector or switch) Smoke De

2081-9280 Remote Battery Cabinet HAZARD be performed maklng qualtfled Simplex REQUIREMENT system, FIRST and AC power this system. When connecting AC power FIRST and 2081-9280 provides housing and terminals 27.6 volts. Should battery readings drop to 26 V or lower, the charger automatically high-rate charging current (10 A max.). VAC) Power Charger Assy, mounted sealed, 110 Ah lead-acid batteries. A 4100-0104 a 4100 Control Panel, normally VAC) or batteries batteries with for connecting the right end of the cabinet (Figure 1). batteries the power charger and the fire alarm panel(s) are located behind the panel 1 1991 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U S.A. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -403 (574-670) the 4100-0104 (120 VAC) or 4100-0114 (240 VAC) Power Charger Assy. to the Battery Cabinet Input Wiring or 4100-0114 Power Assy. 0 0 0 0 AWG, 20 ft. Max. Cabinet Input Terminals USED a Fire Alarm Panel to the Battery Cabinet Output Terminals I I Power Input Terminals Alarm Panel 000 000 0 0 Cabinet Output Terminals note below 7 Chart below for wire size Battery Cabinet to Fire Alarm Panel Current Draw in Amps is Between ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft Size AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG 5 ft ft ft. ft ft ft IMPORTANT *** IMPORTANT *** IMPORTANT *** BATTERY CABINET OUTPUT FUSE IS RATED AT 80 AMPS. TO PREVENT WIRE OVERLOAD A FUSE (RATED FOR THE LOAD CURRENT) EACH OUTPUT LEG. EVENT OF A SHORT CIRCUIT CONDITION, THE BATTERY + SIDE -403 (574-670)

[email protected] -9282 Battery Cabinets the procedure given this document install the following battery cabinets: 2081-9281 50 Ah Battery Cabinet 50 Ah Battery Cabinet Beige Red. Secure back box to wall with required bolts (not supplied) support battery weight (86 pounds). Place batteries on shelf (Figure 1). Ensure the negative and positive poles of the batteries are arranged as Figure 2. Connect wires to batteries as shown Figures 1 and 2. Make certain the wires to the battery terminals of the Battery Distribution Block are connected properly, polarity of the diode. (See Figure 1.) For wiring, use wires and hardwire provided. Do not install battery cabinet more than 12 feet away from system cabinet. NO. l/4 (8) SHE BOX) (2975-9190 OR 2975-9191) 1 BAT BAT 2 BATTERY OF BATTERY BLOCK BAT 1992 Simplex specifications Co., Gardner, MA 0144-0001 were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -405 (574-681)

Accessories Brackets for Seismic Activity Applications secured battery mounting for areas where seismic activity is Available for use with compatible Simplex fire alarm panel Model Series: 4100ES, 4010ES, 4100U, 4009 IDNet NAC Extender (4009A), TrueAlert Controller (4009T), and 4009TPS Available for use with EZCare 2-bay cabinet with Ethernet Switches and related Design was laboratory shake table tested and certified resist the maximum considered earthquake in the States on-site to either surface mount or flush mount (see installation reference below) One bracket holds two (2) compatible batteries Galvanized steel construction with insulation near terminals Refer to page 2 for selection information the following requirements: 2009, International Building Code CBC 2010, California Building Code ASCE 7-05, categories A-F and all building heights Battery Mounting. For geographic regions earthquake activity is a building design criteria, battery brackets will hold the system batteries in place. Tested. Independent laboratory testing was to ensure these battery brackets meet the of ASCE 7-05 (categories A through F) per following: Ss = 3.73 G Sds = 2.5 G 2009 and CBC 2010 Certified AC156 Testing Standard Factor = 1.5 (the highest category) Bracket Shown in a 2 Bay 4100ES Cabinet Reference Install bracket hardware into flush boxes before box installation for easier Always mount boxes solidly. Align mounting with wall studs. Refer to the product box instructions for additional information. For additional battery bracket installation refer to Installation Instructions This product was not agency listed as of document revision date. 10/2012 4010ES, 4100U, 4009 IDNet NAC (4009A), TrueAlert Controller (4009T) 4010ES, 4100U, 4005; 4005 systems with require 4005-9860 per below 4010ES, 4100U EZCare 2-Bay with Ethernet Switches related equipment; Requires 5009-9906 Kit per below and 4100U, 2, or 3 Bay Cabinet 1 or 2 bay and 4100U, Bay Cabinet Only Requires use of Battery Shelf separately per below Battery Bracket Selection Reference No. Batteries* V, sealed lead-acid Compatible Products 12.7 Ah Dimension Reference* Dimensions (1.5 mm) Thick W x 4 D x 4 H mm x 102 mm x 102 mm) mm) mm) Ah W x 3-3/8 D x 6-5/8 H mm x 86 mm x 168 mm) mm) mm) Ah W x 5 D x 7 H mm x 127 mm x 178 mm) mm) mm) Ah W x 5-1/4 D x 6-3/4 H mm x 133 mm x 171 mm) mm) (167 mm) Ah W x 5-1/2 D x 8-7/8 H mm x 140 mm x 225 mm) mm) mm) Note: These brackets mount two of these 12 VDC batteries wired in series for 24 VDC systems. Refer to data sheet S2081-0006 additional battery information. Alternate batteries must be of identical dimensions. Battery Equipment Battery Shelf; required when using 50 Ah batteries in 4100ES and 4100U cabinets Retrofit DACT Bracket, required when adding the 2081-9401 battery bracket to a 4005 Series Fire Alarm Control mount supplied DACT on this bracket for seismic rated mou

Alarm Control Panel Accessories Batteries, Sealed Lead-Acid; with Applications for Battery Cabinets, and Battery Cabinets with Charger sealed lead-acid batteries: Lead-calcium grid structure with immobilized in absorbent separator Low maintenance with no need to add water Low self-discharge characteristics One-piece, high impact polystyrene cell cover with high dual seal construction UL 924 recognized pressure relief valves in a variety of capacities: Batteries for internal mounting range from 6.2 Ah up to Ah, depending on control panel cabinet size Larger batteries, up to 110 Ah, mount in external battery with models available with internal chargers cabinets with chargers: Battery cabinets with charger communicate with their fire alarm control panel and are available for Series and 4010 Series panels rechargeable sealed-lead acid batteries provide and repeatable discharge and recharge for use in fire alarm and other systems They are designed with immobilized in an absorbent separator, allowing them to rated capacity on the first cycle. of their sealed construction, packaging is allowed the system electronics enclosure (see illustration page 2). When this is applicable, the quantity of cabinets and the battery wiring distances are both Where required, external battery cabinets can close-nippled to the control panel to house larger with battery chargers available in some battery sizes. Details Charging. These batteries are intended to be used with Simplex battery chargers. Connections. These batteries are required to be in series to produce 24 V system voltage. sets must be of identical voltage, model number, and approximately the same date of for proper operation. Battery capacity testing is recommended to be by using a sealed lead-acid battery tester to withdraw a minimum of battery charge. The tester applies a variety of amplitude and controlled test pulses that compares terminal against those predicted for the specific battery (Testing is available through your local Simplex supplier.) Sealed Lead-Acid Batteries can be Inside Fire Alarm Control Panel Cabinets Battery Cabinets are Available for Battery Requirements Details (Continued) Shipping. Sealed lead-acid batteries are shipped via or sea transportation only. They are not shipped air. Battery chemicals and materials can be Refer to information shipped with the battery or its case. Return to the battery manufacturer or to a qualified battery processing facility for proper Refer to details on page 4 and to the referenced individual product data for agency listing status of battery cabinets and chargers. The batteries in this document meet the requirements of UL, ULC, and Factory for use with respective equipment battery chargers as listed on page 3. your local Simplex product supplier for proper battery selection per requirements. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. 1/2012 Battery Construction Reference appearance will vary with battery size. connect or post type terminal varies with battery size) cover separator used immobilize electrolyte grids group outer cover hole material, black for red for positive is also clearly with + and -) relief valve separator case (high impact Battery Size Specifications Model @ 20 Hour Rate case, for service) case, for new) Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah Ah (156 mm) (153 mm) (153 mm) (184 mm

Listed AlarmTM Alarm Systems Fighter Telephones Series (Type 4590) Emergency Telephone Equipment Fire fighter telephones provide direct with master phone: Phone circuits are supervised Tones are provided to indicate master is called (exact performance may vary on master phone equipment) Phones are available for: Surface or flush cabinet mounting must be ordered separately) Or separate for plugging into dedicated phone jack stations Available options: Armoured cable models to minimize (voice and ear caps are sealed adhesive) DESCRIPTIONS Phone in Locked Cabinet. The red is silk-screened with Fire Fighter on the door breakglass. Phone is with either an armoured cable, or a cable. Remote Phone Jack Stations. are mounted on a single gang plate for with pluggable phones. The front is marked Emergency Phone An optional call LED is available. No additional circuits are to operate the call-in LED when the phone is connected to a Simplex fire phone system. Red Pluggable Phone. The emergency telephone is ruggedly of Cycolac Type T, a thermal ABS A coiled line cord and jack is attached. length is 5 ft. (1524 mm). OPEN KEY OR GLASS OUVRIR LA OU LA Door Assembly Phone Jack Station 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 9/00 Phone View of Typical Remote Phone Cabinet Fighter Emergency Phones with Breakglass (Select one from this category) Surface Door 1/2 x 10 1/4 (343 mm x 260 mm) Flush Door x 12 (381 mm x 305 mm) Steel Flush Door x 12 (381 mm x 305 mm) Assembly (Select one from this category) Phone Assembly – Armoured cable Phone Assembly – Retractable cable Phone Jack, single gang mount, requires minimum of 2 box depth. Red Phone with 5 foot cable Glass Insert for use with 2084-9103-C through -9105C Back Box for pre-installation) Back Box w/o knockouts Back box must be ordered separately. H x 9 9/16 W x 3 1/2 D mm x 243 mm x 89 mm) H x 9 9/16 W x 3 1/2 D mm x 243 mm x 89 mm) 9/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Alarm Fire Alarm Systems Remote Emergency Telephone Equipment Series Firefighter Telephones telephones provide direct with the Firefighter Telephone master phone: When remote phones call the master, a call tone is to verify that the request is in process (exact may vary depending on master phone Two-wire telephone circuits are supervised and Compatible with 4100U Series and legacy 4100/4120 Simplex Firefighter Telephone Controls assemblies are available for: Surface or flush mounting, (NOTE: backbox is ordered Or as separate phone sets for plugging into dedicated phone jack stations options: Break-rod door latch allows access during emergencies Armored cable models to minimize vandalism (voice ear caps are sealed with adhesive) Push-to-talk (PTT) phones provide input control at the phone Magnetic latch models with Warden Station and LED call indicator Additional options are listed on page 3 Accessories: Replacement break-rod Listed to Standard 864 telephone systems provide two-way for facilities where radio communications not be available or are unreliable. They are typically during active firefighting conditions, during a fire alarm or during fire alarm system inspection and test. requires a dedicated two-wire circuit, typically twisted, shielded pair wiring (TSP) to minimize noise pickup from adjacent wiring. Depending on master control, up to 6 remote phones and the master can in simultaneous use. Additional information can be found Installation Instructions 579-226 and on data sheet which describes 4100U Master phone control ULC listing is applicable to standard remote pluggable phone and phone jack station, refer page 3 for agency status per model. This product has been approved by the California Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety See CSFM Listing 6912-0026:054 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Safety Products Westminster. Phone Jack Stations EMERGENCY and Trim, Surface Mount EMERGENCY FOR and Trim, Flush Mount Pull Handle and Break-Rod 5/2006 2084-9001 is standard. Model 2084-9023 is similar 2084-9001 but also provides an LED indicator powered the remote phone wiring. The LED is activated is selected at the Master phone, a for the responding personnel to plug in their and communicate with the master. Phone Jacks and Mounting. Phone jacks are mounted on a steel single-gang plate for use with pluggable The front is marked with red PHONE lettering. Mounting requires a electrical box, 2 (51 mm) minimum depth. wiring is by color-coded 18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) leads. Phones, Cabinet Mounted Information. Doors and trim are painted red available for surface or flush mounting. The doors are in white with FIRE PHONE or other options as shown on 3. Door Option. This mounting type provides glass break-rod, similar to those used in manual fire stations. The break-rod is positioned inside the door that pulling the door handle breaks the rod and the door to open. A standard lock is also provided allow authorized entry without breaking the rod. Options. Armored cable phones include voice ear caps sealed with adhesive to minimize vandalism. are also available wit

,Simplex Phone Callout Module Connect minus incoming wire to one of the black flying leads. Then connect plus incoming wire to of the red flying leads. Either… . (If there are outgoing wires) Connect each outgoing wire to one of the remaining leads. (If this is the last device the circuit) Using appropriate methods, connect a 1 OK (brown, black, end-of-line across the remaining leads. FLYING LEADS GANG BACK BOX BY CONTRACTOR FLYING LEADS 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 specifications were current as of publication, other are subject change WIthoUt notice.

CSFM Listed; (NYC) Acceptance* existing AUTOCALL CommFone remote mounted phones to be compatible with 4100U firefighter phone systems: Phone kits upgrade to 4100U firefighter phone features costly removal of the installed backbox Existing AUTOCALL CommFone wiring is used, no wiring is required UL Listed to Standard 864 Please note that these phones are not compatible with CommFone 500 systems upgrade phone kits include: Red phone with armored cable and sealed receiver and caps Red phone with armored cable, sealed transmitter and caps, and push-to-talk (PTT) switch Phone upgrade requires use of Simplex firefighter phones: Simplex pluggable phones are directly compatible with Jack Station 976200 Phones are available in red with standard operation or PTT switch (see page 2 for details) Firefighter telephone systems feature Master telephone can simultaneously talk with up to 6 telephones and can be connected as an audio for broadcast messages Ring signal on remote firefighter telephone indicates that call request is initiated and a hold signal indicates that connected line has been deselected Telephone circuits are supervised for open and short too many telephones connected, and the master is supervised for cord integrity Degraded mode allows remote telephones to remain to each other in the event of a loss Refer to data sheet S4100-0034 for details upgrade to 4100U. Existing AUTOCALL fire control panels with CommFone firefighter telephone equipment can be upgraded to the of the Simplex 4100U fire alarm control panel by these phone upgrade kits. The existing handsets replaced with new handsets and wired according to included detailed Installation Instructions (579-806). enclosures are maintained to allow a quick and upgrade. Note: These handsets hang the same as the AUTOCALL handsets with the cable end at the of the enclosure when the handset is on its cradle. System Accessories Remote Emergency Firefighter Telephones; CommFone Upgrade CommFone Upgrade Kit Handsets are standard or with push-to-talk switch on right) Pluggable Phone Details complete conversion of the existing AUTOCALL system to 4100U operation, Simplex pluggable phones are required (if used by the Pluggable phone model 2084-9014 (standard) 2084-9024 (PTT) are directly compatible with the CommFone model 976200 jack stations. Simplex firefighter remote phone information covered on data sheet S2084-0001. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 6912-0026:054 allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. This product was not ULC listed or approved by as of document revision date. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. 8/2007 AUTOCALL CommFone Remote Phone Upgrade Kits and Related Products CommFone Upgrade Kits for mounted phones Red phone with 24 long (610 mm) armored cable, and sealed and transmitter caps Red phone with 24 long (610 mm) armored cable, sealed and transmitter caps, and push-to-talk (PTT) switch Pluggable Phones and End-of-Line Resistor Red pluggable phone (Type 4590-E) Red pluggable phone with push-to-talk switch Refer to Installation Instructions 579-806 for additional information. Kits include phone assembly with wire leads terminated with spade lugs. Simplex Pluggable Phone Reference End-of-line Resistor Harness, 10 k 1/2 W; (ref. 733-894); one required for each C

CSFM Listed; (NYC) Acceptance* listed under Standard 864 as Control Unit (UOXX) mount package availability: Single relay module or four relay module, with or cover, with SPDT or DPDT contacts LED indicates relay module status Cover provide status LED viewing ports Multiple coil voltage inputs, diode polarized for DC Modules are track mounted with snap-apart feature allowing the four relay module to be separated encapsulated SPDT relay package with coded 18 AWG wire leads, available in two 2088-9021 (PAM-1) Provides diode polarized multiple voltage ability and LED indication 4098-9843 (PAM-SD) Provides a diode polarized VDC coil with in/out wiring multi-purpose control relays offer SPDT or DPDT, A (or 7 A) contacts in a variety of mechanical Models are available for coil operation by one four input voltages allowing a single relay to be from a voltage source of 18-35 VDC or VAC, VAC, or 230 VAC (not available with 4098-9843). selection is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals or wire leads. relay model (except model 4098-9843) contains a LED which indicates that the relay is energized. options are varied for application flexibility. mounted relays may be apart from a four-module assembly and used independently if Mount Relays, see page 2 for dimensions Voltage Current Blocks Ratings VAC/VDC, 120, or 230 VAC models = 18 mA models = 40 mA to 14 AWG (2.08 mm2 ) A @ 120 VAC rated 1/6 HP, N.C. rated 1/8 HP @ 28 VDC and @ 230 VAC Ratings Listed Range Range F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) F to 185 F (-50 C to 85 C) RH Non-condensing Accessories Fire Alarm Control Relays, Track Mount and Model 4098-9843 and 2088 Series C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO C NO NC C NO 0 18/24 115 230 0 18/24 115 230 0 18/24 115 230 0 18/24 115 230 MR204/C, Four DPDT Relay Package Enclosure (shown with cover removed) SD BLU YEL ORG Relay Package of 2088-9021, PAM-1 and 4098-9843, PAM-SD) Continued Relays, see page 2 for dimensions AWG (0.82 mm2 ) color-coded leads 2088-9021 Ratings 4098-9843 Ratings Ratings A @ 120 VAC, resistive 18-35 VAC/VDC, 120, or 240 VAC 15 mA @ 24 VAC/VDC, @ 120 or 230 VAC VDC input, polarized, 15 mA 24 VDC A at 0.35 p.f @ 28 VDC & VAC @ 5 VDC Ratings Listed Range Range F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) F to 185 F (-50 C to 85 C) RH Non-condensing Product listings are by Air Products & Controls Inc. (www.ap-c.com) per model numbers on page 2. These products are also available through Space Age Electronics Inc. with an SSU- prefix. 3/2006 Relay Selection Chart Products MR-101/T MR-201/T MR-101/C MR-201/C MR-104/T MR-204/T MR-104/C MR-204/C Track Mount Relay Wiring Reference mount, without cover mount with cover mount, without cover mount with cover multi-voltage coil, coded 18 AWG (0.82 mm2 ) wire with coil status LED 24 VDC coil, color coded AWG (0.82 mm2 ) wire lead

Accessories 2096 Series Code Card Holders Coded Manual Stations holders for coded manual station Red frame card holders are available in multiple sizes selection below) Available in satin finish stainless steel for 9 x 12 size (229 mm x 305 mm) Frames include a clear acrylic cover and one code printed on white card stock ALARM CODE DIRECTORY Holder Frame to chart below for models and dimensions) Code Card furnished with each card holder) Card Holder Selection (includes one card) Finish Size Size of Lines Reference Number steel, finish X 8 mm x 203 mm) x 10 mm x 254 mm) x 9-1/16 mm x 230 mm) x 11-1/16 mm x 281 mm) x 12 mm x 305 mm) x 13-1/16 mm x 332 mm) X 16 mm x 406 mm) x 22 mm x 559 mm) x 17-1/16 mm x 433 mm) x 23-1/16 mm x 586 mm) 5/2009 is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GmbH and is used under license. Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its and are used under license. 2009 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. Safety Products Westminster Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA 5/2009

Simplex Peripherals Accessories Listed Smoke Detectors Series ULC Listed to Standard S529 Dual-Chamber Design Two-Wire Operation LED Alarm Indicator Functional Test Feature Optional Remote Alarm LED 360 Smoke Entry for Optimum Smoke Range…………………………………….15 to 32 VDC VDC nominal) Current …………………………………..100 max. Current ……………………………….47 mA @ 24 VDC Range…………………………..32 F to 100 F C to 38 C) Range……………………………….10% to 93% RH Velocity Limits ……………………………300 ft./min. max. than 1.0 Microcurie AM-241 …………………………………………………….Off-White 2098-9110 Smoke Detector has two chambers, an sampling chamber and an inner reference cham- Smoke or invisible combustion gasses can freely the outer chamber, but the inner chamber is closed to smoke entry. With both chambers ion- by a single radioactive source (Am-241), a very current flows in the circuit. The combustion parti- present act as recombination centres, which resistance across the chamber resulting in a re- current flow. The reduced current flow is by the detector and when it falls below a pre- level an alarm is transmitted to the fire alarm panel. Detector Alarm Indicator 2000 Simplex Int Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 6/00 detector is supplied with a mounting trim ring that the detector to be used with several mounting Units may be mounted directly to a 3 1/2 or 4 1 1/2 deep (No. 125 or equivalent) box. Units may be mounted to a 4 square electrical box using a plaster ring (not included) with the trim ring. Units may be mounted directly to the ceiling or wall the plastic screw anchors packed with the ring. For direct mounting, the trim ring is used a template and 3/16 holes are drilled for the anchors. For this application reference local smoke detectors are to be connected only to compatible Simplex control equipment. detectors should not be installed near outlets supply air ducts. Avoid the use of smoke detectors there is an inherent high-risk factor of instanta- combustion, such as in kitchens, boiler rooms, rooms, or areas where welding or soldering done. locations should be determined only after consideration is made of the physical layout and of the protected area. Refer to ULC Standard for guidelines. On smooth ceilings spacing of 30 (9.1m) may be used as a guide. SWITCH SLOT MODULE Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system for proper panel connections (841-687). Refer to wiring diagrams provided with system for proper end-of-line resistor value. Typically, control unit two-wire detection circuits will load down appreciably upon activation of one or more alarm-indicating devices. can prevent operation of other devices connected to the same alarm-initiating circuit. Maximum quantity of detectors per initiating circuit is 18. 6/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the World Wide Web @www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

,Simplex -9203 Photoelectric and Photo w/Heat Detectors Instructions Cleaning Use the 553-640 Vacuum Cleaner needed, use Solution 2000 All-Purpose Cleaner detector cover. vacuum exterior perimeter of the detector. No. 553-636) and the 553-638 Lint-Free Cloth to clean Steps 1 and 2 are sufficient an intitial cleaning of the detector. Cleaning Figurel) Using a screwdriver or similar tool to press down on each tab as shown, unlatch the three outer tabs and then pull off the cover. Figure 2) Free the LED side of the smoke chamber cover by pushing it unlatches. cover in the direction of the arrow Pressurized Air and 553-431 Detector Cleaning Kit), clean the inside of the cover photo-diode side. Turn the detector 180 Then repeat Step 4 to unlatch Using appropriate materials chamber and its cover. Use the foam swabs and isopropyl alcohol the 553-641 Pressurized Air. Snap the cover /LED side Fit the outer cover back onto the detector. back onto the smoke chamber. Be sure to fully seat all three prongs. the 553-431 Kit to remove remaining dust particles after cleaning Using a Model 553-533 Smoke Detector Tester, check to see that the detector sensitivity meets specifications. Replace detectors fail to meet sensitivity specifications. 1 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – 2 -007 Manuals Online! –

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat VDC VDC

,Simplex -9203 Photoelectric and Photo w/Heat Detectors Instructions Cleaning Use the 553-640 Vacuum Cleaner needed, use Solution 2000 All-Purpose Cleaner detector cover. vacuum exterior perimeter of the detector. No. 553-636) and the 553-638 Lint-Free Cloth to clean Steps 1 and 2 are sufficient an intitial cleaning of the detector. Cleaning Figurel) Using a screwdriver or similar tool to press down on each tab as shown, unlatch the three outer tabs and then pull off the cover. Figure 2) Free the LED side of the smoke chamber cover by pushing it unlatches. cover in the direction of the arrow Pressurized Air and 553-431 Detector Cleaning Kit), clean the inside of the cover photo-diode side. Turn the detector 180 Then repeat Step 4 to unlatch Using appropriate materials chamber and its cover. Use the foam swabs and isopropyl alcohol the 553-641 Pressurized Air. Snap the cover /LED side Fit the outer cover back onto the detector. back onto the smoke chamber. Be sure to fully seat all three prongs. the 553-431 Kit to remove remaining dust particles after cleaning Using a Model 553-533 Smoke Detector Tester, check to see that the detector sensitivity meets specifications. Replace detectors fail to meet sensitivity specifications. 1 2 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007

,Simplex -9203 Photoelectric and Photo w/Heat Detectors Instructions Cleaning Use the 553-640 Vacuum Cleaner needed, use Solution 2000 All-Purpose Cleaner detector cover. vacuum exterior perimeter of the detector. No. 553-636) and the 553-638 Lint-Free Cloth to clean Steps 1 and 2 are sufficient an intitial cleaning of the detector. Cleaning Figurel) Using a screwdriver or similar tool to press down on each tab as shown, unlatch the three outer tabs and then pull off the cover. Figure 2) Free the LED side of the smoke chamber cover by pushing it unlatches. cover in the direction of the arrow Pressurized Air and 553-431 Detector Cleaning Kit), clean the inside of the cover photo-diode side. Turn the detector 180 Then repeat Step 4 to unlatch Using appropriate materials chamber and its cover. Use the foam swabs and isopropyl alcohol the 553-641 Pressurized Air. Snap the cover /LED side Fit the outer cover back onto the detector. back onto the smoke chamber. Be sure to fully seat all three prongs. the 553-431 Kit to remove remaining dust particles after cleaning Using a Model 553-533 Smoke Detector Tester, check to see that the detector sensitivity meets specifications. Replace detectors fail to meet sensitivity specifications. 1 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – 2 -007 Manuals Online! –

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

B!Simplex Long-Range Smoke Detector 1990SimplexTimeRecorderCo.. s!xcifications other information shown were current as of publication. and are wbpct change without n&e. -016 (574666) Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS ……………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………. Considerations. 2098-9207 Unit.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2098-9207 Units.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. . ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. of Transmitter Terminals.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. of Receiver Terminals.. Plate.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Remote UP …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ALIGNMENT.. ADJUSTMENT.. ALIGNMENT.. …………………………………. CONDITIONS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. . . ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Voltage Calibration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Sensitivity Measurements MOUNTING DENSlTY/OBSCURATlON of Illustrations 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 – 11 – 12 – 13 – 14 – 15 – Transmitter and Receiver Multipl

B!Simplex Long-Range Smoke Detector 1990SimplexTimeRecorderCo.. s!xcifications other information shown were current as of publication. and are wbpct change without n&e. -016 (574666) OF CONTENTS ……………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………. Considerations. 2098-9207 Unit.. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2098-9207 Units.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. . ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. of Transmitter Terminals.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. of Receiver Terminals.. Plate.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Remote UP …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ALIGNMENT.. ADJUSTMENT.. ALIGNMENT.. …………………………………. CONDITIONS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. . . ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Voltage Calibration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Sensitivity Measurements MOUNTING DENSlTY/OBSCURATlON of Illustrations 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 – 11 – 12 – 13 – 14 – 15 – Transmitter and Receiver Multiple Unit Installations..

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

Overview Photoelectric Detector Instructions 2098-9209 Photoelectric Detectors are used with Simplex, UL-listed alarm control panels to provide open area fire protection. 1 lists the electrical, operating, and mechanical specifications for the 1. 2098-9209 Photoelectric Detector Specifications Voltage Waveform Alarm Current Current Current Temperature Listed Temperature Range Humidity Range Boxes ON Indicator VDC DC mA @ 24 VDC microamps @ 24 VDC microamps @ 24 VDC F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C) F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) to 95% Relative Humidity detector meets UL 268, Requirements, UL-Listed square or 3 or 4 octagonal light-emitting diode uses the patterns to indicate Pulse = Standby Steady = Alarm Page # Guidelines this Publication publication discusses the following topics: 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A Guidelines installing these devices, survey the area to be covered in accordance with provided in NFPA 72E (an overview of which is provided below). additional information, refer to NFPA 72E and the NEMA Guide for Proper of System Smoke Detectors. Considerations to installation, you should review the characteristics of the facility, taking note of the following: there human occupancy? to be protected of construction and use characteristics of contents Air movement-stratification Deflections and obstructions Height of ceilings Vent locations, velocities, and condition of ceilings of ceiling construction area detector can provide up to 900 square feet (84 square meters) of coverage, on the following requirements. Table 1 shows examples of typical and the impact they have on detector placement. Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. 1. Example Applications Characteristics flat ceiling divided by beams greater 18 inches (46 cm) in depth divided by beams greater 8 inches (20 cm) but less than in (46 cm) in depth may be spaced 30 feet meters) apart. least one detector required in space between beams. the coverage area for detector, and mount detector the bottom of the beams. must freely enter the chamber of the detector. Consequently, the and efficiency of the detector is directly affected by air flow, air air velocity, air stagnation, and air migration. Keep the following in mind when installing detectors: Do not install detectors in locations where temperatures are likely to exceed F (38 C) or fall below 32 F (0 C). Do not install detectors on a ceiling within four inches (10cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke it reaches the detector. on next page Application Manuals Online! – Guidelines, Continued Application (continued) Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchen, rooms, laundry rooms, loading docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms candles, soldering rooms, etc.). Use other means of monitoring these Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (hospital rooms with vaporizers, near shower rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays. Wall mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (10-30.5 cm) from Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of to detector head. debris.

Overview Photoelectric Detector Instructions 2098-9209 Photoelectric Detectors are used with Simplex, UL-listed alarm control panels to provide open area fire protection. 1 lists the electrical, operating, and mechanical specifications for the 1. 2098-9209 Photoelectric Detector Specifications Voltage Waveform Alarm Current Current Current Temperature Listed Temperature Range Humidity Range Boxes ON Indicator VDC DC mA @ 24 VDC microamps @ 24 VDC microamps @ 24 VDC F to 122 F (0 C to 50 C) F to 100 F (0 C to 38 C) to 95% Relative Humidity detector meets UL 268, Requirements, UL-Listed square or 3 or 4 octagonal light-emitting diode uses the patterns to indicate Pulse = Standby Steady = Alarm Page # Guidelines this Publication publication discusses the following topics: 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A Guidelines installing these devices, survey the area to be covered in accordance with provided in NFPA 72E (an overview of which is provided below). additional information, refer to NFPA 72E and the NEMA Guide for Proper of System Smoke Detectors. Considerations to installation, you should review the characteristics of the facility, taking note of the following: there human occupancy? to be protected of construction and use characteristics of contents Air movement-stratification Deflections and obstructions Height of ceilings Vent locations, velocities, and condition of ceilings of ceiling construction area detector can provide up to 900 square feet (84 square meters) of coverage, on the following requirements. Table 1 shows examples of typical and the impact they have on detector placement. Application Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. 1. Example Applications Characteristics flat ceiling divided by beams greater 18 inches (46 cm) in depth divided by beams greater 8 inches (20 cm) but less than in (46 cm) in depth may be spaced 30 feet meters) apart. least one detector required in space between beams. the coverage area for detector, and mount detector the bottom of the beams. must freely enter the chamber of the detector. Consequently, the and efficiency of the detector is directly affected by air flow, air air velocity, air stagnation, and air migration. Keep the following in mind when installing detectors: Do not install detectors in locations where temperatures are likely to exceed F (38 C) or fall below 32 F (0 C). Do not install detectors on a ceiling within four inches (10cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke it reaches the detector. on next page Guidelines, Continued Application (continued) Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchen, rooms, laundry rooms, loading docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms candles, soldering rooms, etc.). Use other means of monitoring these Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (hospital rooms with vaporizers, near shower rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays. Wall mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (10-30.5 cm) from Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of to detector head. debris. Two wire detection circuits load down upon activat

,Simplex Housing 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications Manuals Online! – were current as of publication, are subject other change without notice. -028 (574-678) DEVICE THE A DUCT SMOKE HOUSING. WHEN PROVIDED WITH IS DESIGNED TO SAMPLE THE AIR FLOW PASSING BY IT CONTAINS OF SMOKE. EFFECTIVENESS UPON: A DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HIGHLY WHICH IS INSTALLED; AS SMOKE DILUTION AND STRATIFICATION DESIGN AND OPERATING CONDITIONS OF THE AIR HANDLING WHICH EVEN THE BEST DESIGNED SYSTEMS HAVE NO AND, PLACEMENT WHICH POSITIONING OF THE DUCT SMOKE PRACTICAL OFTEN COMPROMISED THE REASONS STATED ABOVE, THE EFFECTIVENESS SMOKE DETECTOR CANNOT BE WARRANTED OR GUARANTEED. NO CIRCUMSTANCES THIS DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR USED AS OR REGARDED TO BE A SUBSTITUTE FOR THE BUILDING TO WHICH THIS ATTACHED AS A SECONDARY DETECTION DEVICE. ALARM AND DETECTION THIS Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS NOTES.. PROCEDURES to Follow ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Tube Selection.. Tube Tube Procedures and Duct Housing Testing ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duct Housing Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duct Housing Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duct Housing Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inlet Tube Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inlet Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baffle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Location of Bends or Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Location of Return Air Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Location

SSimplex -9203, & -9208 Detectors, Photo w/Heat Detector, 2098-9576 Ionization Detector installing there detectors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with information provided NFPA 72 E, Sections 4-l through 4-6 (an overview of which is provided below). For specific applications, refer to publication Code Requirements For Fire Alarm Systems – Publication No. FA2-91-010. For information, refer to NFPA 72 E and the NEMA Guide For Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors. CONSIDERATIONS there human occupancy? Contents to be protected. Type of construction and use. Burning characteristics of contents. Air movement – stratification. Deflections and obstructions. Height of ceilings. Surface conditions of ceilings. Type of ceiling construction. Total area. Vent locations – velocities – dilution. detector is capable of providing from 450 to 900 square feet (42 to 84 square meters) of coverage, depending Requirements of local codes. Results of engineering evaluation. Physical characteristics of protected area. Smooth, flat ceiling Detectors may be~spaced 30 feet (9 meters) apart. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 18 in. (46 cm) depth At least one detector will be required in the space between every two beam. Ceiling divided by beams of more than 8 in. (20 cm) but less than 18 in. (46 cm) depth Reduce the coverage area for each detector, and mount the detector to the bottom of the beams. must enter the chamber of the detector. Thus, air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air will affect detector efficiency. Therefore: Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100 (38 or fall below 32 (0 Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches (10 cm) of a wall. Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation may dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector. Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present (kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, docks, rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, etc.). an 8-digit Product ID number denotes ULC-listed product. 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. 1993 Simplex Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1H3 Canada specifications Manuals Online! – other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -007 (575285) 2 93 Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam (in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near rooms, above large sinks, etc.). Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies. Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches (1 O-30.5 cm) from the ceiling to detector head. Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris! minimal requirement for detector maintenance should consist of cleaning surface dust by using a vacuum Cleaning programs should comply with NFPA and local environments. Cleaning of the internal chamber be done by Simplex technical representative only. EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE (553-394) Extendable Smoke Generator (553-533) Sensitivity Tester (553-536) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9201, -9202, -9203, & -9576) (553-553) Test and Removal Tool Holder (for use with 553-536 & 553574) Test and Removal Tool (for use with 2098-9208) testing, disconnect city, release devices, and extinguish systems. Notify all appropriate personnel of test. The test is with smoke using a 553-394 Extendable Smoke Generator. If this method is not acceptable or a functional test can be performed by using a Test and Removal Tool. To test the detector, place the test around the detector body. This will alarm the detector. To clear the detector, remove the test tool and reset the alarm panel. 1 DETECTOR DATA Heat

aBSimplex Detector 209819603 Photoelectric detectors are easily contaminated by airborne dust and other particles. Even in environments, amounts of dust can enter and settle inside detector. Large amounts of dust almost always cause severe smoke detectors must be inspected and cleaned at installation, and once every six to twelve months on the local environment). Local, state, or national codes may dictate otherwise. amounts of dust inside a detector can affect detector sensitivity and cause alarm problems. For these dusty environments, during detector Jlation, procedures clean the Type 2098-9603 photoelectric smoke detector. detector should be tested with smoke per local practice. publication describes cleaned, NEEDED thoroughly clew detector, Cleaning kit, P/N 553431. following required: A source of oil-free, compressed air (such as Dust-Off, Tech Duster, etc.). cleaning kit consists of the following One ounce of 91% isopropyl alcohol and 9% deionized water. Urethane Soft alcohol-soaked swabs. REMOVAL Notify appropriate building personnel prior to removing any detectors from service. The detector head should be removed from its base before proceeding. cover of the 2098-9603 detector before cleaning. See Figure 1 for a visual description must first remove the detector. smoke detector cover as follows: Firmly press deflector at a latch tab and gently the cover at this tab. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO THE COVER FULLY NOW. Press deflector at next latch tab position and lift the cover at this tab. Make sure you prevent the cover relatching at previously opened latch tab(s). Repeat Step.2 as required until cover is released. you have removed are: The interior of the smoke detector chamber. The inside of the detector cover. The exterior of the detector. cover, smoke detector chamber will be exposed. The surfaces you will be TABS OTHER TAB A LATCH TAB) RING TAB OVERLAPS RING 20984603 Smoke Detector 1 the exposed smoke detector surfaces as follows: Blow the foreign matter (dust, etc.) off the exposed surfaces. there is an oily residue, use an alcohol- pad to wipe these surfaces clean. Using a foam swab dipped alcohol, clean all surface recesses and corners. Using a dry swab, wipe all clean. Using a foam swab dipped in alcohol, clean both detector Clean the lenses thoroughly…they heart of the detector photoelectric system. Wipe any film off with a dry swab. Make sure you have removed all foreign matter from the chamber. Ensure that the light path from the LED Examine all metallic surfaces corrosion. corrosion exists, return detector Headquarters the photodiode clear. Clean the cover with an alcohol-soaked pad. Clean the exterior with alcohol-soaked pads. REASSEMBLY detector as follows: Ensure that the insect screen is in place. It should run around the inside rim of the detector chamber. Position the cover so that the cover catches line up with the detector latch tabs. Press the cover onto the detector until it snaps into place. the operation of the smoke detector as follows: With the detector and with system power on, blow smoke into the detector chamber initiate an Allow 10 seconds the detector activate (it works on a system). any of these tests reveal a malfunctioning detector, return the detector to

33,Simplex and -9636 Photoelectric Detectors Instructions publication provides cleaning photoelectric smoke detector with LED. detector the REQUIRED Cleaning kit, Simplex P/N 553-431. alcohol. Canned air or compressed, oil-free air. A thin-point, screwdriver. PROCEDURE Disassembly of White Guides 1 Since both detectors are cleaned same way, only the 2098-9635 shown in photographs. On the detector, the elliptical hole that contains white guides. See Figure 1. If you look straight down guides you will see a square hole containing a metal tab. Refer to Figures 2A and 28. Remove the detector outer cover as follows: the thin-point screwdriver the guides. the elliptical hole found in Step 1. Make sure the screwdriver With the screwdriver press down firmly on the metal tab beneath the guides to bend the tab down. CROSS-SECTION HOLE TAB/ Cover Removal 2A Cover Removal 28 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 Remove screwdriver outer See Figure 3. If the does not come off, repeat Step 28 to that the locking tab is bent down fully. cover Detector Smoke Chamber 4 Detector Cover 3 Refer Figure 5. Carefully pull off the wrapped around the smoke chamber. After up so that the cover will lock into place when replace cover, bend the locking three locking tabs up. breaks off, bend one of the Orient the detector cover so that its interior faces Locate the three small plastic tabs that secure the tabs by pushing out on the outer at the tab locations. The smoke chamber now be loose. outer Refer to Figure 4. Pull the smoke chamber out of outer cover. DO NOT LOSE THE SMALL THE COVER (if used). Screen Removal 5 the following screen. be careful not to bend the Figure 6. screen easier Detector Optics 7 Insect Screen 6 Refer Figure 8. Using a lint-free cloth, wipe from the area around the detector optics. With of the detector. remove the screws in the lower Detector USE ONLY ALCOHOL FOR Refer the can level while spraying. Figure 7. Using canned air, clean half of the detector. the use alcohol- the optics are exceptionally swabs clean them. Use a dry swab to the optics clean. The swabs are part of the cleaning kit. Area Around Detector Optics 6 Refer to Figure 9. Use a presoaked TX806 pad and a few minutes and of the cleaning the screen place it in alcohol clean with a lint-free cloth. and clean exceptionally Detector Refer to Figure 11. Reform PROPER AS SHOWN insect screen FIGURE 11. Insect Screen 11 Place the insect screen onto the smoke chamber its original position. Place

Wimplex -9649 Housings Instructions 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. 1995 Simplex specifications Time Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1 H3 Canada other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – -010 (574-652) 7 95 DEVICE THE AIR DUCT LEVELS OF SMOKE. A DUCT SMOKE HOUSING. WHEN PROVIDED WITH IS DESIGNED TO SAMPLE THE AIR FLOW PASSING BY IT CONTAINS DETERMINE WHETHER EFFECTIVENESS UPON: A DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HIGHLY THE DESIGN AND OPERATING OF THE AIR SYSTEM WHICH IT IS INSTALLED; VARIABLES SUCH AS SMOKE DILUTION AND STRATIFICATION WHICH EVEN THE BEST DESIGNED SYSTEMS HAVE NO AND, PROPER PLACEMENT AND POSITIONING OF THE DUCT SMOKE PRACTICAL OFTEN COMPROMISED WHICH THE REASONS STATED ABOVE, THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THIS SMOKE DETECTOR CANNOT BE WARRANTED OR GUARANTEED. NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THIS DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR USED AS OR REGARDED THE REGULAR FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM, TO THIS DEVICE ATTACHED AS A SECONDARY DETECTION BE A SUBSTITUTE Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION.. DUCT HOUSING 2098-9645 THE DUCT DETECTOR ADDRESS Setting for the 2120 CDT System.. Setting for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 System ……………………………………………………………………………… SPECIFICATIONS Operation Operation Duct Housing – 2098-9645 MAPNET MAPNET MAPNET Duct Housing – 2098-9649 DC Operation.. DC Operation.. AC Operation Operation Supplementary Signaling Only …………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Supplementary Signaling Only.. …………………………………………………………………….. ROUTINES to Follow ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. NOTES.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… PROCEDURES Tube Selection.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Tube Installation. Tube Installation..

Wimplex -9649 Housings Instructions 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. 1995 Simplex specifications Time Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1 H3 Canada other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. -010 (574-652) 7 95 DEVICE THE AIR DUCT LEVELS OF SMOKE. A DUCT SMOKE HOUSING. WHEN PROVIDED WITH IS DESIGNED TO SAMPLE THE AIR FLOW PASSING BY IT CONTAINS DETERMINE WHETHER EFFECTIVENESS UPON: A DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HIGHLY THE DESIGN AND OPERATING OF THE AIR SYSTEM WHICH IT IS INSTALLED; VARIABLES SUCH AS SMOKE DILUTION AND STRATIFICATION WHICH EVEN THE BEST DESIGNED SYSTEMS HAVE NO AND, PROPER PLACEMENT AND POSITIONING OF THE DUCT SMOKE PRACTICAL OFTEN COMPROMISED WHICH THE REASONS STATED ABOVE, THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THIS SMOKE DETECTOR CANNOT BE WARRANTED OR GUARANTEED. NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THIS DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR USED AS OR REGARDED THE REGULAR FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM, TO THIS DEVICE ATTACHED AS A SECONDARY DETECTION BE A SUBSTITUTE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION.. DUCT HOUSING 2098-9645 THE DUCT DETECTOR ADDRESS Setting for the 2120 CDT System.. Setting for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 System ……………………………………………………………………………… SPECIFICATIONS Operation Operation Duct Housing – 2098-9645 MAPNET MAPNET MAPNET Duct Housing – 2098-9649 DC Operation.. DC Operation.. AC Operation Operation Supplementary Signaling Only …………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Supplementary Signaling Only.. …………………………………………………………………….. ROUTINES to Follow ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. NOTES.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… PROCEDURES Tube Selection.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Tube Installation. Tube Installation.. Procedures.. and Duct Housing Test

firealarmresources.com

BlSimplex Housing c 19137 Simpler RecorderCo.,Gardner. 01441-0001 S A. Manuals Online! – -009 (574-651) 12 87 OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS DC Operation DC Operation Operation NOTES NOTES PROCEDURES to Follow ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Tube Selection Tube Tube Procedures and Duct Housing Testing CIRCUITS ………….. Two-Wire DC Operation ………….. Four-Wire DC Operation ………….. Four-Wire AC Operation ………….. Wire Connections …….. Duct Housing Placement ………….. Template ………….. Template Positioning ………… Inlet Tube Orientation ………… Inlet Tube ………… Accessory

Wimplex -9649 Housings Instructions 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. 1995 Simplex specifications Time Equipment Co., Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1 H3 Canada other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – -010 (574-652) 7 95 DEVICE THE AIR DUCT LEVELS OF SMOKE. A DUCT SMOKE HOUSING. WHEN PROVIDED WITH IS DESIGNED TO SAMPLE THE AIR FLOW PASSING BY IT CONTAINS DETERMINE WHETHER EFFECTIVENESS UPON: A DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HIGHLY THE DESIGN AND OPERATING OF THE AIR SYSTEM WHICH IT IS INSTALLED; VARIABLES SUCH AS SMOKE DILUTION AND STRATIFICATION WHICH EVEN THE BEST DESIGNED SYSTEMS HAVE NO AND, PROPER PLACEMENT AND POSITIONING OF THE DUCT SMOKE PRACTICAL OFTEN COMPROMISED WHICH THE REASONS STATED ABOVE, THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THIS SMOKE DETECTOR CANNOT BE WARRANTED OR GUARANTEED. NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THIS DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR USED AS OR REGARDED THE REGULAR FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM, TO THIS DEVICE ATTACHED AS A SECONDARY DETECTION BE A SUBSTITUTE Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION.. DUCT HOUSING 2098-9645 THE DUCT DETECTOR ADDRESS Setting for the 2120 CDT System.. Setting for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 System ……………………………………………………………………………… SPECIFICATIONS Operation Operation Duct Housing – 2098-9645 MAPNET MAPNET MAPNET Duct Housing – 2098-9649 DC Operation.. DC Operation.. AC Operation Operation Supplementary Signaling Only …………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Supplementary Signaling Only.. …………………………………………………………………….. ROUTINES to Follow ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. NOTES.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… PROCEDURES Tube Selection.. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Tube Installation. Tube Installation..

. Beam Detector 2098-9650 9 1990 Simplex Ttme Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 specifications were current as of publication. other are subject change without notice. -011 (574-653) OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ………………………. Functions and Example of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …………….. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Procedure Transmitter or Receiver Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using a 2098-9802 Ceiling Mount Assembly Using a 2098-9801 Wall Mount Assembly Using a 2098-9748 4 Square Box Adapter Assembly Transmitter or Receiver Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……………………….. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……………………. 8 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ………………. 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ………………. 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……………………………. ………………………… Sensitivity Selection with or servicing Simplex Model 2098-9650 Projected Beam Smoke this manual before MATERIAL THIS MANUAL COVERS ALL ASPECTS OF 2098- INSTALLATION, SERVICE AND OPERATION. KEEP THIS MANUAL UNAVAILABLE ELSEWHERE. CONTAINS

File data Filename: File size: File type: Download count: Text Preview

Multi-Application Peripherals Accessories Devices Series Listed : Attractive stainless steel plate of mounting : Simplex 2098-9733 End-of-Line relays monitor voltage and report a voltage loss by using a open relay contact to allow for external supervision. : voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 VDC (Nominal) operating voltage. . . . . . . . . . . 31 VDC consumption . . . . . . 22 mA max. @ 31 VDC rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 amps resistive 24 VDC/120 VAC ALARM (24 VDC) 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 9/00 WIRING DIAGRAMS : 4-WIRE 4-WIRE ZONE 24 VDC DEVICES RELAY 1 SHOWN OF LINE DEVICE PER ZONE : to single gang electrical box. (Supplied by Others.) 9/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the World Wide Web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subejct to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

2098-9734 Power Pack Instructions procedure is used to install the 2098-9734 Power Pack. The 2098-9734 is used as a power source for the 2098- Detector Base, or as a power source for the 2098-9538 Base when used in conjunction with a 2098-9735 or Relay. using the 2098-9734 to provide power for the 2098-9529 or 2098-9636 base, use the base for signaling only. Connect wires to power pack and base as shown below in Figure 1 for 2098-9529 Base or Figure 1 A for 2098 Base. I– I , I I I contacts, C, Tmnsta Upon Rated 1A C 99VDC (Reaistlve) 1 1A 1992 SimplexXme Ca, Gardner. MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. -400 (576-951) Required with 20989536 Base Only, OR 2999-9739 Single Box Required. tmnaformr eecondary and contractor wires Shown) Route wires through side cutouts on power pack (Fig. 2). Mount power pack to back box with relays, if used (Fig. 2). 2 Push long wire leads into back box via the cutouts, and mount detector base to power pack (Fig. 2). Align detector head with detector base, and turn head clockwise securing head to base.

ULC, CSFM Listed* Voltage Monitor Relay provides monitoring of operating voltage: For use with 4-wire detectors and similar fire system products Model 2098-9735 operates at 24 VDC Model 2098-9736 operates at 120 VAC ULC listed) Relay contact provides continuity to end-of-line while energized, loss of power opens path causing a trouble condition at the panel UL listed to Standard 864 steel cover plate allows convenient for easy location: Mounts in single gang box, 2 (51 mm) deep Easy to locate for convenient access end-of-line relays provide zone voltage mounted on a single gang plate for easy Upon loss of voltage, the relay contact opens, continuity to the end-of-line zone wiring resistor. to data sheet S4081-0003 for 4081 Series Resistor Harnesses. to data sheet S4098-0015 for reference to model encapsulated 24 VDC end-of-line relay. NOTE: ULC listing is applicable to model 2098-9735, 24 VDC only. This product has approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7300-0026:013 for values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. This product was not FM MEA (NYC) approved as of document revision date. Additional listings may be contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Accessories 2098 Series End-of-Line Voltage Monitor Relays, Mounted, 24 VDC or 120 VAC ALARM Relay Cover Plate Specifications Rating Box A resistive @ 24 VDC/120VAC Gang, 2 (51 mm) minimum coded wire leads, 18 AWG mm2 ) 24 VDC Nominal Operation Voltage Voltage to 31 VDC = 5 VDC, must dropout at VDC mA maximum @ 31 VDC Current 120 VAC Nominal Operation Voltage to 132 VAC = 30 VAC, must dropout at VAC mA maximum @ 132 VAC Voltage Current 1/2008 Wiring Reference Fire Alarm Panel 4-Wire VDC 4-Wire Zone, 24 VDC Devices to specific devices for exact wiring) contact is energized) + – 4-Wire Zone, 120 VAC Devices to specific devices for exact wiring) 4-Wire contact is energized) Fire Alarm Panel VAC per Circuit per Circuit is a registered trademark of Tyco International Services GMBH and is used under license. Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Ltd. and its and are used under license. 2008 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. Safety Products Westminster Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA 1/2008

Listed* Peripherals Accessories Detector Guard Heavy-duty Construction 14 Gauge Steel Continuous Welded Seams Tamper Resistant Design 19mm (3/4″) Conduit Port Soft White Hybrid Powder Paint Finish DETECTOR GUARD Simplex 2098-9829C smoke detector guard is using 14 gauge cold rolled steel and welded seams making it a very rugged Typical applications are: Correctional/Detention Hospitals, Industrial areas, Educational facili- and any other location where the smoke detector be intentionally or accidentally subjected to mounting plate is fastened to the ceiling and the is fastened to the mounting plate using tamper screws. The guard has a durable soft white hy- powder paint finish. ………………………………………….14 Gauge Steel ………………………………………………. Powder Paint …………………………………………Soft White Hybrid Screws………………………….8/32-12.7mm (1/2″) 8 provided) Plate …………….200mm square x 24mm high square x .937″ high Guard ………………206mm square x 127mm high square x 5.0″ high ULC Listed for use with 4098-9601C Smoke Detector (with a 2 1/8 surface mount electrical box), 4098-9701C, and 2098-9201C Smoke Detectors ONLY. Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 3/00 INSTRUCTIONS: TAB GUARD PLATE GUARD SCREWS BY OTHERS LARGER THAN #10 PROOF SCREWS (1/2″) PORT FOR TO 19MM (3/4″) CONDUIT TO BE MOUNTED MOUNTING PLATE SEAMS Detector sensitivity is when this is installed. Detector/Sensor Mounting Flow Required m per minute ONLY m per minute ONLY m per minute 1/8 Octagon Box ONLY m per minute or 1 1/2 Octagon Box ONLY conduit is concealed rather than surface, rotate guard so that the conduit port is blocked by the perforated on the mounting plate. 3/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the World Wide Web @www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

amSimplex Fire Alarm Stations List No. Retainer Rod Pin 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. MA 01441-0001 speclficalions other were current as of publicatlon, S.A. are subject change without not!ce. 1 93

Multi-Application Peripherals and Accessories Manual Stations Series Single and Double Action Operation Plastic rod drops harmlessly inside when handle is Listed* Single action models Breakglass type double action models option: Key operated only Recessed pull lever Pull lever protrudes when alarmed Tamper resistant reset key lock: Keyed same as fire alarm cabinet Surface or semi-flush mounting Terminal connections for field wiring 2 Stage Operation Flush mounting option English, French, or Bilingual 2099 series addressable pull station employs an addressable module (IAM) to provide monitoring of the station status. Changes in are communicated to the control panel across the communication lines. manual station IAM receives its power from the communication lines. The addressable manual is available in single or double action models, and one or two stage operation. Both single and models are available (for details of model refer to the following page). single action station requires a firm downward pull to break plastic rod visible below the pull lever and actuate the switch sound the alarm. The front of the station is hinged and must be to reset the station and to replace the plastic rod. glass double action station requires that the hammer, hung on front of the station, be lifted and thrown downward against glass window, thus breaking it to expose the recessed pull As with the single action station, a firm downward pull of pull lever actuates and locks in the alarm switch. operation is achieved by inserting the GA key into keyswitch (after the lever is activated) and turning it to right. Action Station Action (Breakglass) reset the single action station, a key unlocks and opens the which then permits the handle to return to its normal when the station is relocked. If a plastic rod is used, it be replaced in order to complete the reset process. double action station is reset in the same manner. The rod is normally omitted but the glass window must replaced in order to complete the reset process. of the breakglass station should be accomplished physical activation of the pull lever. station is constructed of a tough, high impact, red The finish is high gloss and smooth to resist and dirt residues. 2001 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 6/01 Manual Station Specification Chart Station Models Key B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C B, C SHOWN ARE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ADD FOR FRENCH FOR BILINGUAL = Normally Open Contact N/C = Normally Closed Contact 2099-9795C, 2099-9795CF, 2099-9795CB Trim Plate Trim Plate surface mount box, sheet metal, 5 3/16 H x 4 W x 2 11/16 D (127 mm x 102 mm x 68 mm) address pull station spacer S01575-033 Installation Instructions for further information Options Surface Trim Wiremold box 1/8 H x 5 W mm x 127 mm) Semi-flush trim 2-gang box H x 4 1/2 W mm x 114 mm) receptacle (by others) 2975-0001, 3/16 H x 4 W x 2 11/16 D mm x 102 mm x 68 mm) 2975-9312C knockouts) 3/16 H x 4 W x 2 11/16 D mm x 102 mm x 68 mm) also be used A C box others) Spacer by Simplex) others) conduit entry B D

Multi-Application Peripherals and Accessories Manual Stations Series Single and Double Action Operation and annunciator contact options Action Station Listed* Single action models Breakglass type double action models option: Key operated only lever protrudes when alarmed resistant reset key lock: keyed same as fire alarm cabinet or semi-flush mounting mounting option stage alarm French, or Bilingual Action Stations require a firm downward pull to the alarm switch. Completing the action breaks an plastic break-rod (visible below the pull lever). pull lever latches into the alarm position and remains out of the cover to provide a visible indication of station was alarmed. Action Stations (Breakglass) require the operator strike the front mounted hammer to break the glass and the recessed pull lever. The pull lever then operates a single action station. action stations can be fitted with an institutional kit. Institutional Stations are designed to activate key operation only. This allows access for manual to be limited to authorized personnel. Operation key insertion and opening of the station cover. option activates when the lever is pulled. alarm initiation requires a key to activate a located behind the pull lever. Reset requires use of a key to reset the pull station and deactivate the alarm switch. If the break-rod is it must be replaced. requires physical activation of the pull lever for institutional stations). DOWN GLASS Action (Breakglass) Action Station Institutional Cover 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 9/00 to the National Building Code, a manual pull shall be installed in every floor area near every exit. CAN/ULC-S524-M91 states that stations mounted not less than 1200 mm nor more than 1400 mm the floor level… In addition, the National Fire Assocation (NFPA), Bulletin number 72 (reference 5-9), gives specific minimum requirements on this When manual station coverage appears limited in any additional units should be installed. Stations should be with the bottom of the station not less than 1.07 m ft.) or more than 1.52 m (5 ft.) from the floor. Usually are mounted at the 1.37 m (4.5 ft.) level. (In order to buildings and facilities accessible to, and usable by the handicapped, some specifications may require that station be installed not more than 1.07 m (3.5 ft.) from the Manual Station Specification Chart should be located in the normal path of exit, and in the protected area so that they are unobstructed readily accessible. should be provided on each floor to obtain a travel not more than 61 m (200 ft.) to the nearest station any point in the building. One station should be for each floor where the maximum floor area is m2 (10,000 ft.2) or more. Covers and pull levers are constructed of chip and dirt resistant, high impact Lexan polycarbonate. are red with white lettering and pull levers are white red lettering. 2099-9819 (Black) and 2099-9820 (Beige) are adapter kits designed to flush mount any one of 2099 series stations. Action Models Annun. Key Gang Box Depth (inches) Action Models Annun. Key Gang Box Depth (inches) (1.5) (2.0) (2.0) (2.0) (3.0) (2.0) (2.0) (3.0) (2.0) (1.5) (2.0) (2.0) (2.0) (3.0) (2.0) (2.0) (3.0) (2.0) = Normally Open Contact N/C = Normally Closed Contact C/L = Current Limited when activated SHOWN ARE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. ADD FOR FRENCH FOR BILINGUAL 2099-9754C, 2099-9754CF, 20

2099-Series Non-Coded Fire Alarm Stations and Operating Instructions (On all 2099 Stations) installed, unlocking and the front of the station an alarm. DOWN Action Station 1. GLASS PULL DOWN Action Station Glass 3. Action Station with Cover 2. DOWN Action Station Type 4. Alarm Station Operation Action Stations 2099-9101, -9102, -9754, -9755 Figure 1 the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible below the handle) the sounding of an alarm and the actuation of annunciator contacts provided). The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset handle before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace rod as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm 2099-9107 Figure 1 the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible below the handle) the sounding of a pre-signal alarm, actuates the annunciator contacts provided), and exposes the general alarm key switch. Insert and turn the key to sound a general alarm. The front of the station must be and opened to reset the handle before the fire alarm system can be to normal. Replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing (see 7). Action Station with Institutional Cover 2099-9762 Figure 2 and opening the station causes the sounding of a general alarm. station must be closed and locked before the fire alarm system can be to normal. Action Stations (Break Glass) 2099-9103, -9104, -9105 Figure 3 the glass with the hammer and pulling the handle down firmly to the rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of an alarm the actuation of annunciator contacts (if provided). The front of the must be unlocked and opened to reset the handle before the fire system can be returned to normal. Replace the glass plate as shown the replacement drawing (see Figure 5) and replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm (Break Glass) 2099-9108 Figure 3 the glass with the hammer and pulling the handle down firmly to the rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of a pre-signal actuates the annunciator contacts (if provided), and exposes the alarm key switch. Insert and turn the proper key to sound a general The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace the plate (see Figure 5) as shown in the replacement drawing and replace rod as shown in the mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station (Push Type) 2099-9756, -9757, -9758 Figure 4 on the push bar and then pulling the handle down firmly to break rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of an alarm and the of annunciator contacts (if provided). The front of the station be unlocked and opened to reset the handle before the fire alarm can be returned to normal. Replace the rod as shown in mounting (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm (Push Type) 2099-9759 4 on the push bar and then pulling the handle down firmly to break rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of a pre-signal actuates the annunciator contacts (if provided), and exposes the alarm key switch. Insert and turn the proper key to sound a general The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace the as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A local authorities and operate station as in an actual alarm station. After testing, replace rod (and glass plate on glass double action units), reset station, and restore the control panel. of Glass on Double Action Break Glass Type Figure 5 View View 5. Double Action Station Glass Plate Repl

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Peripherals Non-Coded, Non-Addressable Manual Stations; Series Single and Double Action Operation fire alarm stations for general purpose Operation complies with ADA requirements Pull lever protrudes when alarmed Break-rod is supplied (use is optional) Screw terminals for wiring connections Tamper resistant reset key lock (keyed same as fire alarm cabinets) Model, key operated only types include: Single action Double Action, Breakglass or Push Type Optional NO GRIP Single Action Retrofit Kits are with a more easily operated pull lever for where anticipated users may find the station lever difficult to activate Optional Local Alarm cover Optional pre-signal and annunciator contacts mounting options: Surface or semi-flush with standard boxes or matching boxes Flush mount adapter kit listed to Standard 38 of the Simplex single action manual stations a firm downward pull to activate the alarm switch. the action breaks an internal plastic break-rod below the pull lever, use is optional). The use of a can be a deterrent to vandalism without interfering the minimum pull requirements needed for easy The pull lever latches into the alarm position and extended out of the housing to provide a visible Action Stations (Breakglass) require the to strike the front mounted hammer to break the and expose the recessed pull lever. The pull lever then as a single action station. Action Stations (Push Type) require that a loaded interference plate (marked PUSH) be pushed to access the pull lever of the single action station. reset requires the use of a key to reset the manual lever and deactivate the alarm switch. (If the break- is used, it must be replaced.) testing is performed by physical activation of the lever. Electrical testing can be also performed by the station housing to activate the alarm switch. Action Station Action (Push Type) GLASS Action (Breakglass) Fire Alarm Option Action Station with Cover NO GRIP kit (Continued) Stations activate by key operation only access for manual alarms to be initiated by personnel. Operation requires key insertion opening of the station cover. Action Station NO GRIP Retrofit Kit For applications such as California Building Title 24, which requires and operating shall be operable with one hand and shall not tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist model 4099-9805 Retrofit kit provides a more easily pull lever compared to standard stations. Refer to page 2 for models with MEA acceptance. These products have been by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7150-0026:175 (Pull Boxes) and (NO GRIP Retrofit Kit) for allowable values and/or conditions concerning presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. 5/2012 Operation (Continued) Pre-Signal Option activates when the lever is pulled. alarm initiation requires a key to activate a located behind the pull lever. Reset requires the use of a key to reset the station lever and deactivate the alarm switch. the break-rod is used, it must be replaced. requires physical activation of the pull lever for institutional stations). Reference to NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm and Signaling and all applicable local codes for complete for manual stations. Product Selection Action Models (General Alarm) Applica

Overview Manual Stations -9761, -9795, -9796, & -9797 Instructions instructions describe installing and setting the address for a manual (single action, double action, or local). Installing a manual station of the following tasks: Setting the Address. The address, which uniquely identifies the manual on the MAPNET II channel, must be set in two places the dip on the rear of the manual station and through the programmer. The must match in both places. Wiring. Addressable manual stations connect to either a 2120 Multiplex Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system a twisted, shielded (recommended) wire pair (MAPNET), and receive power and data over this wire pair. Manual stations mount to a variety of standard switch and back Maintaining. Depending on the model of manual station, you may also to replace a small pane of glass or a glass rod following activation. 1 summarizes the features of each manual station model. this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # the Manual Station Address the Manual Station Glass Pane/Glass Rod 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A the Manual Station Address manual station has a unique address, which is set using a series of dip located inside the manual station. The manual station address must the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Report or the Programmer Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 Setting for the 2120 System (MAPNET) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. Setting for the 4020, or 4120 System Only) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. The address you set must match the address entered in the 2120 Job Report. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. The address you set must match the address entered in the Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. 1. Location of Dip Switches on next page Manuals Online! – the Manual Station Address, Continued and Dip Switch Chart Table 2 to convert a decimal address, such as address 7, to its binary This binary number can then be set on the manual station as shown the figure at the top of the table. 2. Address Settings IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.

ULC, CSFM Listed; Certified* fire alarm station for hazardous locations categories: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C & D Class II, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups E, F, & G Class III, Divisions 1 & 2 features: Copper-free, cast aluminum alloy enclosure finished red textured powder epoxy paint ground screw Double action operation, lift cover and pull down ring ratings: 1 normally open and 1 normally closed contact Rated 120 VAC, 6 A (see specifications for details) Conduit openings are NPT feed through are considered hazardous due to the presence of gases, flammable vapors, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings. Such areas exist at refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, painting booths, storage areas, and many other where potentially hazardous conditions occur. fire alarm stations for these hazardous areas are to ensure that initiation of the alarm will be safe compatible with the hazardous substance. Manual model 2099-9136 is constructed with a cast, aluminum enclosure, and is tested, listed, and for applications in most types of hazardous Agency listings are by Killark. Website: http://www.killark.com/ Peripherals Non-Coded Manual Stations for Hazardous Model 2099-9136 (Killark XAL-53) Manual Station for Hazardous Locations XAL-53) Ratings 1 N.O., 1 N.C. VDC Ratings VAC Ratings A, make/break A continuous carry A make, 7200 VA A break, 720 VA A continuous carry to 12 AWG wire (0.82 to 3.31 mm2) Specifications Connections Screw terminals for in/out wiring, diagram on 2) Material Copper-free, cast aluminum alloy textured powder epoxy paint H x 3 W x 4 D mm x76 mm x114 mm) 1/2013 Dimension Reference mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) (8 mm) 2 holes SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. 2013 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. Fire Protection Products Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA 1/2013

C-UL, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* mechanical/electrical features: Rugged cast metal construction Terminal connections for In/Out Wiring Visible break rod provides status indicator (optional, required for operation) Standard operation station will mount semi-flush on a gang box, 2 deep Operation is compliant with ADA requirements Listed to UL Standard 38 are available with: Single action operation with SPST contacts Dual action PUSH operation with SPST contacts Single Action with New York City stripe with SPST Explosion-Proof/Weather-Proof operation with DPDT 2975-9211, Weather-Proof surface mount cast box, provides NEMA Type 3R rating** 2975-9212, Indoor operation surface mount box Metal Construction. For applications requiring metal construction, these non-coded manual stations a variety of models and operations. Single action are operated by simply pulling the handle while action stations require a of the top lever to grabbing of the lever. and Reset. When pulled, the alarm is mechanically latched and indicated by the handle. Reset is performed by simply unlocking opening the enclosure. The lock is controlled by a key, provided with each station. Rods. Stations are shipped with a replacement rod that may be used if desired (use is optional). rod status is visible from the front of the station. use of a break rod can be a deterrent to vandalism interfering with the minimum pull requirements for easy activation. surface mount boxes match the contours of stations and provide an attractive appearance (model includes both station and enclosure). Use of 2975-9211 weatherproof box will provide a 3R rating. NEMA 3R enclosures are for outdoor primarily for protection against rain and sleet, and ice formation on the exterior. Peripherals Non-Coded Manual Stations, Metal Construction Single Action Manual Station Dual Action Station Single Action Station with White York City Stripe Explosion-Proof and Manual Station Refer to page 2 for additional agency listing references. This product has been approved by California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California and Safety Code. For non-explosion-proof models, see CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Additional may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Products. NEMA 3R rating is achieved when used with weatherproof mounting box 2975-9211 and gaskets. 8/2012 Product Selection Action Station; SPST, N.O. contact Action Station with PUSH Lever; SPST, N.O. contact Action Station with White New York City Stripe; SPST, N.O. contact (not CSFM listed) & Weather-Proof Station with Enclosure; DPDT contacts; NEMA 4X rated; UL listed, FM and Approved for: Class I, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Groups E, F, and G; also FM approved for Class III E, F, and G UL, C-UL listing, and CSFM approval is under model numbers shown except as noted. For other listing agencies, reference Signal Corporation (SIGCOM), model Series SG-32. Accepted for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA 382- Volume II (SIGCOM). For listings, reference Signal Communications Corporation (SIGCOM) model Series SGX-32; CSFM ref. 7151-1408:0112. (model 2099-9144 includes enclosure, separate box is not required) Weatherproof Box; cast aluminum construction with gasket kit, required for NEMA 3R rating Surface Mount Box; stamped steel construction

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* System Peripherals Manual Stations Releasing Applications fire alarm stations for releasing Double action push and pull operation with a open (N.O.) contact Current limited model is available with series 560 resistor for Style C operation limited = alarm; open or short = trouble) Operation complies with ADA requirements Pull lever protrudes when alarmed Break-rod is supplied (use is optional) Label kit provides six varieties of releasing (ordered separately) Screw terminals for wiring connections resistant reset key lock (keyed same as fire alarm cabinets) mounting options: Surface or semi-flush with standard boxes or Simplex boxes Flush mount adapter kit Adapters are available for retrofitting to commonly existing boxes listed to Standard 38 Action Push Type Manual Release require that a spring loaded interference plate PUSH) be pushed back to access the pull lever of single action station, reducing the possibility of an activation. A firm downward pull of the lever activates the alarm switch, breaking an internal break-rod, visible below the pull lever. use is optional. Use of a break-rod can provide additional reduction of the possibility of an accidental without interfering with the minimum pull needed for easy activation. activated, the pull lever latches into the alarm and remains extended out of the housing to a visible indication. reset requires the use of a key to reset the station lever and deactivate the alarm switch. (If break-rod is used, it must be replaced.) testing is performed by physical activation of pull lever. Electrical testing can be also performed by the station housing to activate the alarm switch. Action Push Type Manual Release (shown with sample release label) AGENT DIOXIDE SYSTEM Kit 4099-9802 Selection blank area on the front of the station allows the of a label to match the specific release (label kit is ordered separately). to data sheet S2099-0007 for standard Simplex stations.) This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. for use City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Safety Products Westminster. 8/2007 Specifications Connections Range Range Color Lever Color Dimensions Product Selection Action, Push Operation, Manual Release Stations operation, N.O. contact Style C operation, N.O. contact series connected 560 resistor kit; select the label required for the specific release application; types include: Clean Agent, Carbon Dioxide, Foam System, Sprinkler, and Manual release station, red housing with white letters and white lever; requires label kit 4099-9802 mount box aluminum trim plate for double gang switch box, red trim plate for Wiremold box V5744-2, red mount kit break-rod to page 3 for dimensions for retrofit, refer to 4 for details to page 4 for details terminal for in/out wiring, for 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm2 to 2.08 mm2) to 140 F (0 to 60 C) intended for indoo

Overview Manual Stations -9761, -9795, -9796, & -9797 Instructions instructions describe installing and setting the address for a manual (single action, double action, or local). Installing a manual station of the following tasks: Setting the Address. The address, which uniquely identifies the manual on the MAPNET II channel, must be set in two places the dip on the rear of the manual station and through the programmer. The must match in both places. Wiring. Addressable manual stations connect to either a 2120 Multiplex Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system a twisted, shielded (recommended) wire pair (MAPNET), and receive power and data over this wire pair. Manual stations mount to a variety of standard switch and back Maintaining. Depending on the model of manual station, you may also to replace a small pane of glass or a glass rod following activation. 1 summarizes the features of each manual station model. this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # the Manual Station Address the Manual Station Glass Pane/Glass Rod 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A the Manual Station Address manual station has a unique address, which is set using a series of dip located inside the manual station. The manual station address must the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Report or the Programmer Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 Setting for the 2120 System (MAPNET) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. Setting for the 4020, or 4120 System Only) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. The address you set must match the address entered in the 2120 Job Report. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. The address you set must match the address entered in the Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. 1. Location of Dip Switches on next page Manuals Online! – the Manual Station Address, Continued and Dip Switch Chart Table 2 to convert a decimal address, such as address 7, to its binary This binary number can then be set on the manual station as shown the figure at the top of the table. 2. Address Settings IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.

[email protected] Operating -9799 Alarm Stations ACTION STATION OF SINGLE ACTION TYPE handle) causes the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible sounding of an alarm. front of the station must be unlocked and opened reset the handle before the fire alarm system can be drawing. normal. Replace as shown OF GLASS DOUBLE ACTION TYPE glass with the hammer and pulling down firmly to break the rod (visible below the causes the sounding of an alarm. The front of station must be unlocked and opened reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to Replace the drawing and replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing. glass plate as shown authorities and operate station as in an (and alarm station. After plate on glass double action units), and restore the control panel. National Fire Protection Association minimum this subject. When manual station appears in any way, additional units be installed. Stations should be mounted with bottom of the station not less than 3-112 ft. (1.07M) more than 5 feet (1.52M) the floor. Usually are mounted at the 4-112 ft. (1.4M) level. order make building and usable by, the physically some specifications may require the station be installed not more than 3-l/2 (1.07M) from the floor. DOUBLE STATION should be located distributed and readily accessible. the normal path of exit, the protected area so that they are (ON ALL 2099 STATIONS) installed, unlocking and an alarm. front of station VIEW VIEW should be provided on each floor to obtain a distance of not more than 200 feet (60.96M) nearest station from any point in the building. One should be provided (929 sq. or more. One station should be provided on the if the floor and on each succeeding alternate to be protected are smaller the limits as above. 10,000 square where area each equipment must be installed 12.6-1987. hazardous accordance to Control Drawing #841-848 surface mounting, use a 2975-9178 or a 29759022 steel back back box. Do not 2-3/16 box with a depth semi-flush mounting, use a standard 4 (10.16cm) outlet box with a minimum depth of 2-118 with a 3/4 (1.9cm) deep single gang 6 (. 16cm) from the wall surface. NOT RECESS) DIRECTION THE GLASS RETAINER GLASS PLATE ON DOUBLE ACTION TYPE Lift hammer. Fit glass under tab @. Fit glass plate retainer @. notch of Push glass retainer into place. Gently lower hammer. STATIONS GANG NOT NO. 773, CITY NO. 52C-14 SIMPLEX 8469. OR (9.52cm) SIMPLEX DEPTH OUTLET BOX FURNISHED NO. 231 OR 337 NO. 451 i-ii4 OR 4SD-SPL, OR & 314. DO NOT USE SHALLOW ~. NO. 52171-3/4 OR __ STATIONS 3/4 INCH CONDUIT TOP BOTTOM OF BOX FURNISHED BY SIMPLEX)

Overview Manual Stations -9761, -9795, -9796, & -9797 Instructions instructions describe installing and setting the address for a manual (single action, double action, or local). Installing a manual station of the following tasks: Setting the Address. The address, which uniquely identifies the manual on the MAPNET II channel, must be set in two places the dip on the rear of the manual station and through the programmer. The must match in both places. Wiring. Addressable manual stations connect to either a 2120 Multiplex Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system a twisted, shielded (recommended) wire pair (MAPNET), and receive power and data over this wire pair. Manual stations mount to a variety of standard switch and back Maintaining. Depending on the model of manual station, you may also to replace a small pane of glass or a glass rod following activation. 1 summarizes the features of each manual station model. this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # the Manual Station Address the Manual Station Glass Pane/Glass Rod 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A the Manual Station Address manual station has a unique address, which is set using a series of dip located inside the manual station. The manual station address must the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Report or the Programmer Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 Setting for the 2120 System (MAPNET) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. Setting for the 4020, or 4120 System Only) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. The address you set must match the address entered in the 2120 Job Report. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. The address you set must match the address entered in the Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. 1. Location of Dip Switches on next page Manuals Online! – the Manual Station Address, Continued and Dip Switch Chart Table 2 to convert a decimal address, such as address 7, to its binary This binary number can then be set on the manual station as shown the figure at the top of the table. 2. Address Settings IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.

Overview Manual Stations -9761, -9795, -9796, & -9797 Instructions instructions describe installing and setting the address for a manual (single action, double action, or local). Installing a manual station of the following tasks: Setting the Address. The address, which uniquely identifies the manual on the MAPNET II channel, must be set in two places the dip on the rear of the manual station and through the programmer. The must match in both places. Wiring. Addressable manual stations connect to either a 2120 Multiplex Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system a twisted, shielded (recommended) wire pair (MAPNET), and receive power and data over this wire pair. Manual stations mount to a variety of standard switch and back Maintaining. Depending on the model of manual station, you may also to replace a small pane of glass or a glass rod following activation. 1 summarizes the features of each manual station model. this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # the Manual Station Address the Manual Station Glass Pane/Glass Rod 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A the Manual Station Address manual station has a unique address, which is set using a series of dip located inside the manual station. The manual station address must the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Report or the Programmer Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 Setting for the 2120 System (MAPNET) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. Setting for the 4020, or 4120 System Only) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. The address you set must match the address entered in the 2120 Job Report. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. The address you set must match the address entered in the Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. 1. Location of Dip Switches on next page Manuals Online! – the Manual Station Address, Continued and Dip Switch Chart Table 2 to convert a decimal address, such as address 7, to its binary This binary number can then be set on the manual station as shown the figure at the top of the table. 2. Address Settings IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.

Overview Manual Stations -9761, -9795, -9796, & -9797 Instructions instructions describe installing and setting the address for a manual (single action, double action, or local). Installing a manual station of the following tasks: Setting the Address. The address, which uniquely identifies the manual on the MAPNET II channel, must be set in two places the dip on the rear of the manual station and through the programmer. The must match in both places. Wiring. Addressable manual stations connect to either a 2120 Multiplex Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system a twisted, shielded (recommended) wire pair (MAPNET), and receive power and data over this wire pair. Manual stations mount to a variety of standard switch and back Maintaining. Depending on the model of manual station, you may also to replace a small pane of glass or a glass rod following activation. 1 summarizes the features of each manual station model. this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # the Manual Station Address the Manual Station Glass Pane/Glass Rod 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A the Manual Station Address manual station has a unique address, which is set using a series of dip located inside the manual station. The manual station address must the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Report or the Programmer Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 Setting for the 2120 System (MAPNET) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. Setting for the 4020, or 4120 System Only) Set the manual station address using Table 2. See Figure 1 for the of the switches. Use a small screwdriver or pen to set the switches. positioning each dip switch, note that 0 equals ON and 1 equals OFF. The address you set must match the address entered in the 2120 Job Report. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. The address you set must match the address entered in the Report for the 4020, 4100+, or 4120 system. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the manual station. a box for each dip switch in the ON position. Leave the OFF blank. Apply the label to the manual station near the dip switches. Double-check the address before wiring the manual station. 1. Location of Dip Switches on next page Manuals Online! – the Manual Station Address, Continued and Dip Switch Chart Table 2 to convert a decimal address, such as address 7, to its binary This binary number can then be set on the manual station as shown the figure at the top of the table. 2. Address Settings IS SHOWN SET AT ADDRESS 7.

[email protected] Operating -9799 Alarm Stations ACTION STATION OF SINGLE ACTION TYPE handle) causes the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible sounding of an alarm. front of the station must be unlocked and opened reset the handle before the fire alarm system can be drawing. normal. Replace as shown OF GLASS DOUBLE ACTION TYPE glass with the hammer and pulling down firmly to break the rod (visible below the causes the sounding of an alarm. The front of station must be unlocked and opened reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to Replace the drawing and replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing. glass plate as shown authorities and operate station as in an (and alarm station. After plate on glass double action units), and restore the control panel. National Fire Protection Association minimum this subject. When manual station appears in any way, additional units be installed. Stations should be mounted with bottom of the station not less than 3-112 ft. (1.07M) more than 5 feet (1.52M) the floor. Usually are mounted at the 4-112 ft. (1.4M) level. order make building and usable by, the physically some specifications may require the station be installed not more than 3-l/2 (1.07M) from the floor. DOUBLE STATION should be located distributed and readily accessible. the normal path of exit, the protected area so that they are (ON ALL 2099 STATIONS) installed, unlocking and an alarm. front of station Manuals Online! – VIEW VIEW should be provided on each floor to obtain a distance of not more than 200 feet (60.96M) nearest station from any point in the building. One should be provided (929 sq. or more. One station should be provided on the if the floor and on each succeeding alternate to be protected are smaller the limits as above. 10,000 square where area each equipment must be installed 12.6-1987. hazardous accordance to Control Drawing #841-848 surface mounting, use a 2975-9178 or a 29759022 steel back back box. Do not 2-3/16 box with a depth semi-flush mounting, use a standard 4 (10.16cm) outlet box with a minimum depth of 2-118 with a 3/4 (1.9cm) deep single gang 6 (. 16cm) from the wall surface. NOT RECESS) DIRECTION THE GLASS RETAINER GLASS PLATE ON DOUBLE ACTION TYPE Lift hammer. Fit glass under tab @. Fit glass plate retainer @. notch of Push glass retainer into place. Gently lower hammer. Manuals Online! – STATIONS GANG NOT NO. 773, CITY NO. 52C-14 SIMPLEX 8469. OR (9.52cm) SIMPLEX DEPTH OUTLET BOX FURNISHED NO. 231 OR 337 NO. 451 i-ii4 OR 4SD-SPL, OR & 314. DO NOT USE SHALLOW ~. NO. 52171-3/4 OR __ STATIONS 3/4 INCH CONDUIT TOP BOTTO

Wire guard for manual station applications to accidental contact Guard hinges at the top of its mounting plate, requires lifting guard and then activating station pull lever For use with surface mounted or semi-flush manual stations Compatible with the following Simplex manual types: Conventional (non-addressable) manual (refer to data sheet S2099-0007) MAPNET II addressable manual stations to data sheet S2190-0012) addressable manual stations to data sheet S4099-0001) 2099-9800 wire guard protects Simplex manual from damage due to accidental contact while easy access when actual alarm conditions Retention of the guard in the closed position is by a protrusion of the guard mounting bracket. lifting up from the bottom allows the guard to on its top mounted hinge and provides access to station activation handle. station guard will fit onto surface mounted or mounted manual stations. Flush mounted providing a semi-flush mounted station, are preferred since that mounting arrangement the guard to rest against the wall surface. Agency listing of this product is not applicable. Use is subject to approval of Local Having Jurisdiction. 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. Peripherals Accessories Manual Stations Guard DOWN Wire Guard station and mounting box not included) Plate Dimensions Dimensions Wire Diameter Compatibility Type Boxes Surface Mount Boxes Boxes are smaller than assembly, guard mounting will overlap.) 5/16 H x 4 5/8 W x 0.050 Thick mm x 117 mm x 1.3 mm) H x 4 5/8 W x 1 3/4 D mm x 117 mm x 44 mm) (2.36 mm) use with surface or semi-flush manual stations recessed mounted) or double gang electrical select depth per station 5 3/16 H x 4 W mm x 102 mm) 5 H x 3 7/8 W mm x 98 mm) 5/00 the Simplex logo, MAPNET II, and IDNet are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Time Recorder Co. in the U.S. and/or other countries. 5/00 Massachusetts 01441-0001 U. S. A. and Representatives Throughout the World us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice.

$Simplex Kit 2099~Series Stations Illustration Below insert (630-495) onto cover of pull station. the plate insert as a guide, drill two 7164 holes through pull station cover. the hardware provided, affix the plate insert to the pull station cover as shown SCREW x 112 l-420

2099-9819, Mount Station Adapter a suitable additional units. publication provides used in conjunction with any Simplex 2099 series LEXAN manual station. the 2099-9819 or 2099-9820 Flush Mount Station Adapter 2099-9819 adapter black in color while the 2099-9820 adapter is beige. The National Fire Protection Association locating a manual station. When manual station coverage appears Bulletin, Number 72, gives specific in any way, stations so that the bottom of the station is not less than 3% feet (1.07M) or more than 5 feet (1.52M) from floor. Stations are usually be located not more than 3% feet (1.07M) from the floor in order to make the stations accessible the physically handicapped. 4% feet (1.4M) from the floor. However, some specifications stations accessible. the normal path of exit and distribute the protected area so that they are unobstructed and stations on each floor to obtain a travel distance of not more than 200 feet (60.96M) to the nearest station any point in the building. Provide one station for each floor where the maximum area is 10,000 square (929 square meters) or more. For areas smaller (929 square meters), provide a on the first floor and on each successive alternate floor (Floors 3, 5, 7, etc.). 10,000 square See Figures 1 and 2 for the steps below. Make a suitable cutout in the wall surface to accommodate 4-l l/16 back box (A). Cutout must be a minimum of 6 high (15.24cm) by 5 wide For proper installation, electrical box 1 (2.54cm) to l-l 18 back from finished wall surface. Securely mount box (A) in wall cutout. The type of fastener and method of attachment depends upon local and wall construction. Install 314 (1.9cm) conduit (as required) at knockouts provided at top and bottom of box. Secure the 2099-9819 or -9820 flush mount station adapter (C) to the box using four (4) 6-32 screws (D). Route the manual station wires (not shown) through the adapter opening (E). 1988 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A Wire your 2099 series LEXAN manual station (F) in accordance with the fire alarm system wiring diagram and instructions provided with the station. Mount the station (F) to the adapter (C) using four (4) 6-32 screws (not shown). 1 BOX MUST BE WALL ,Simplex 7 88 2 -503 (574-658)

2099-9819, Mount Station Adapter a suitable additional units. publication provides used in conjunction with any Simplex 2099 series LEXAN manual station. the 2099-9819 or 2099-9820 Flush Mount Station Adapter 2099-9819 adapter black in color while the 2099-9820 adapter is beige. The National Fire Protection Association locating a manual station. When manual station coverage appears Bulletin, Number 72, gives specific in any way, stations so that the bottom of the station is not less than 3% feet (1.07M) or more than 5 feet (1.52M) from floor. Stations are usually be located not more than 3% feet (1.07M) from the floor in order to make the stations accessible the physically handicapped. 4% feet (1.4M) from the floor. However, some specifications stations accessible. the normal path of exit and distribute the protected area so that they are unobstructed and stations on each floor to obtain a travel distance of not more than 200 feet (60.96M) to the nearest station any point in the building. Provide one station for each floor where the maximum area is 10,000 square (929 square meters) or more. For areas smaller (929 square meters), provide a on the first floor and on each successive alternate floor (Floors 3, 5, 7, etc.). 10,000 square See Figures 1 and 2 for the steps below. Make a suitable cutout in the wall surface to accommodate 4-l l/16 back box (A). Cutout must be a minimum of 6 high (15.24cm) by 5 wide For proper installation, electrical box 1 (2.54cm) to l-l 18 back from finished wall surface. Securely mount box (A) in wall cutout. The type of fastener and method of attachment depends upon local and wall construction. Install 314 (1.9cm) conduit (as required) at knockouts provided at top and bottom of box. Secure the 2099-9819 or -9820 flush mount station adapter (C) to the box using four (4) 6-32 screws (D). Route the manual station wires (not shown) through the adapter opening (E). Manuals Online! – 1988 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A Wire your 2099 series LEXAN manual station (F) in accordance with the fire alarm system wiring diagram and instructions provided with the station. Mount the station (F) to the adapter (C) using four (4) 6-32 screws (not shown). 1 BOX MUST BE WALL ,Simplex 7 88 2 Manuals Online! – -503 (574-658)

Mimplex Institutional Cover Kit 2099~Series Stations Place insert (630-607) onto cover of pull station. Illustration Below Using the plate insert as a guide, drill two 7/64 holes through pull station cover. Using the hardware provided, affix the plate insert to the pull station cover as shown 12 – SCREW l-420

2099-Series Non-Coded Fire Alarm Stations and Operating Instructions (On all 2099 Stations) installed, unlocking and the front of the station an alarm. DOWN Action Station 1. GLASS PULL DOWN Action Station Glass 3. Action Station with Cover 2. DOWN Action Station Type 4. Alarm Station Operation Action Stations 2099-9101, -9102, -9754, -9755 Figure 1 the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible below the handle) the sounding of an alarm and the actuation of annunciator contacts provided). The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset handle before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace rod as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm 2099-9107 Figure 1 the handle down firmly to break the rod (visible below the handle) the sounding of a pre-signal alarm, actuates the annunciator contacts provided), and exposes the general alarm key switch. Insert and turn the key to sound a general alarm. The front of the station must be and opened to reset the handle before the fire alarm system can be to normal. Replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing (see 7). Action Station with Institutional Cover 2099-9762 Figure 2 and opening the station causes the sounding of a general alarm. station must be closed and locked before the fire alarm system can be to normal. Action Stations (Break Glass) 2099-9103, -9104, -9105 Figure 3 the glass with the hammer and pulling the handle down firmly to the rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of an alarm the actuation of annunciator contacts (if provided). The front of the must be unlocked and opened to reset the handle before the fire system can be returned to normal. Replace the glass plate as shown the replacement drawing (see Figure 5) and replace the rod as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm (Break Glass) 2099-9108 Figure 3 the glass with the hammer and pulling the handle down firmly to the rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of a pre-signal actuates the annunciator contacts (if provided), and exposes the alarm key switch. Insert and turn the proper key to sound a general The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace the plate (see Figure 5) as shown in the replacement drawing and replace rod as shown in the mounting drawing (see Figure 7). Action Station (Push Type) 2099-9756, -9757, -9758 Figure 4 on the push bar and then pulling the handle down firmly to break rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of an alarm and the of annunciator contacts (if provided). The front of the station be unlocked and opened to reset the handle before the fire alarm can be returned to normal. Replace the rod as shown in mounting (see Figure 7). Action Station with Pre-signal Alarm (Push Type) 2099-9759 4 on the push bar and then pulling the handle down firmly to break rod (visible below the handle) causes the sounding of a pre-signal actuates the annunciator contacts (if provided), and exposes the alarm key switch. Insert and turn the proper key to sound a general The front of the station must be unlocked and opened to reset the before the fire alarm system can be returned to normal. Replace the as shown in mounting drawing (see Figure 7). 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – A local authorities and operate station as in an actual alarm station. After testing, replace rod (and glass plate on glass double action units), reset station, and restore the control panel. of Glass on Double Action Break Glass Type Figure 5 View View 5. Double

amSimplex Fire Alarm Stations List No. Retainer Rod Pin 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. MA 01441-0001 speclficalions other were current as of publicatlon, S.A. are subject change without not!ce. Manuals Online! – 1 93 Manuals Online! –

firealarmresources.com

Multiplex Kit is required communicate with a 2100/2120 the BMUX. This kit consists of two printed circuit boards which will replace boards can be identified by two yellow and red LED on the outside edge of the board. The new Controller board has a single green LED on it and also an 87C51 microcontroller which will be required new Communications 2100 Transmission each 2100 the 2100 Loop Circuit Protector required on both sides of any communications located more than 10,000 (1.9 miles) from the BMUX, a DC repeater or a modem ,Simplex Circuit Boards Protection Simplex Model 2081-9027 leaves the building. Restrktions the 2100 required. Documents 2100 Multiplex Transponder Parts List MUX1 -81-002 2100 Multiplex 575-544 AC power and batteries all board DC and each 2100 transponder. See Figure 1 for board locations. 2100 CPU and to the (replacement) 2120. Model 2098-2097 on any DC communication the building. Circuit that called for) Install any repeaters or modems on communication Be sure that the polarity of the communication A and A are correct. and the B and B lines are negative. McCulloh, connections.) are A and B terminals are the 1999SimplexTime Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. BD BD BD* BD BOARDS BE REPLACED. 1 Transponder the Anti-static Kit (Part No. 553-503) when handling boards. 7) no alterations need to be made to the board. operated style 7, contact Board Preparation not operated Support at Headquarters. McCulloh Board banks of dip switches on operate. These switch banks are read and stored by the microcontroller are RESET button must be pressed or the power must be removed and re-applied transponder the settings changed controller board which must be configured powered the new settings pressed. the power up or when the RESET be read and Card Address Switch Settings and SW2) switches on switch banks SW1 and SW2 are numbered 0 to 15 and are set ON if their number corresponds the transponder. These addresses are found by either (a) looking them up an encoder card address present the 2100 TRANSPONDER SPECIFICATION SHEETS for the particular being converted or by (b) reading jumpers on the mother board of the transponder. These four jumpers are located next to the encoder card a bit in a four-bit address and is either a binary one by connected address, simply up the binary weights + 12 Volts or a binary zero by being connected Figure 2.) Each jumper corresponds each bit tied to + 12 Volts. GND. To determine to Figure 2) jumpers on the second encoder card are con- as follows: encoder binary slot address would address 4 + 28 NOC encoder card has an address of 2 + 8 = 10. determined, along the encoder card address edge appropriate dip switch

-a ,Simplex Circuit Boards Kit is required communicate with a 2100/2120 the BMUX. This kit consists of two printed circuit boards which will replace boards can be identified by two yellow and red LED on the outside edge of the board. The new Controller board has a single green LED on it and also an 87C51 microcontroller which will be required new Communications 2100 Transmission each 2100 the 2100 Loop Circuit Protector required on both sides of any communications located more than 10,000 (1.9 miles) from the BMUX, a DC repeater or a modem Protection Simplex Model 2081-9027 leaves the building. Restrktions the 2100 required. Documents 2100 Multiplex Transponder Parts List MUX1 -81-002 2100 Multiplex 575-544 AC power and batteries all board DC and each 2100 transponder. See Figure 1 for board locations. 2100 CPU and to the (replacement) 2120. Model 2098-2097 on any DC communication the building. Circuit that called for) Install any repeaters or modems on communication Be sure that the polarity of the communication A and A are correct. and the B and B lines are negative. McCulloh, connections.) are A and B terminals are the 1999SimplexTime Manuals Online! – Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. BD BD BD* BD BOARDS BE REPLACED. 1 Transponder the Anti-static Kit (Part No. 553-503) when handling boards. 7) no alterations need to be made to the board. operated style 7, contact Board Preparation not operated Support at Headquarters. McCulloh Board banks of dip switches on operate. These switch banks are read and stored by the microcontroller are RESET button must be pressed or the power must be removed and re-applied transponder the settings changed controller board which must be configured powered the new settings pressed. the power up or when the RESET be read and Card Address Switch Settings and SW2) switches on switch banks SW1 and SW2 are numbered 0 to 15 and are set ON if their number corresponds the transponder. These addresses are found by either (a) looking them up an encoder card address present the 2100 TRANSPONDER SPECIFICATION SHEETS for the particular being converted or by (b) reading jumpers on the mother board of the transponder. These four jumpers are located next to the encoder card a bit in a four-bit address and is either a binary one by connected address, simply up the binary weights + 12 Volts or a binary zero by being connected Figure 2.) Each jumper corresponds each bit tied to + 12 Volts. GND. To determine to Figure 2) jumpers on the second encoder card are con- as follows: encoder binary slot address would address 4 + 28 NOC encoder card has an address of 2 + 8 = 10. determined, along the encoder card address edge

aSimplex Multiplex Placement Switch Settings 1~7S~W*XlhOR0WrdwC0., Mass.01441-0001 -21-002 OF CONTENTS PLACEMENT Placement Monitor Point Operation. Control Point Status Monitor Point Status ……………………………….. Board Address Control Console Channel & Annunciator Console Printer & CRT Baud Rate ……………………….. Rate ………………………………………… Rate. …………. SETTINGS ………………………………………………………… )I HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing Simplex Representatives. be performed repairs. quali- publication jumper wire connections switch information be used either verify newly meets the 2100 to modify new or existing equipment. PLACEMENT PLACEMENT proper placement Sheets which are shipped with each transponder. shown ,jumpers within a transponder Figure 1: be determined sheets Transponder following that transponder all jumpers 1 Channel number 2 Transponder 3 Encoder numbers within 4 Encoder addresses Monitor point numbers and labels Control point numbers and labels 7 Programming point sense 7b Monitor point operation 7c Control point contacts 8 Control by Event SPECIFICATION SHEET SHADEDAREAS(;ARDNER USEONLY STANDBY LISTINGS REO NO –oocm ENCODER NO 18 1 MONITOR PO#[email protected]%lQN monitor – can be prepared one of three of operation: or KEY. A the use of each type of operation as follows: type of monitor point operation stations and smoke detectors. action of the sensing device, used with sensing devices this mode of operation, transponder soon as the sensing device alarm; e.g., will reset. of monitor point operation alarm only after the alarm has been recognized this mode of operation used with sensing devices transponder alarm; e.g., security will do not may give only a mo- as,door the alarm state, the Central Control Console. of operation mode of operation, when a sensing device goes the alarm state and remain be used with both momentary This insures alarm, until a keyswitch latching devices. transponder that monitor an alarm can only be reset by authorized operation For KEY operation, b predetermined is listed on the Transponder NORMAL and LATCH modes of operation determined

BlSimplex Multiplex List 1987SlmplexTlmeRecorderCo., Mass..01441-0001 -81-002 11 87 Those parts with an asterisk (*) next to their part number are field service parts. The remaining parts are not field parts. OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …….. 2 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 BOARD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WIRING TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MODULE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……… 7 WATCH TOUR STATION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 RELAY STATION ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 RESET ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……. 8 RESISTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 LISTING OF FIELD SERVICE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 f- J J– ASSEMBLY 1 ASSEMBLY 1 No. Description No. Description Unit) & 6 Unit) Connector, 4 Circuit Cap Housing Connector, 4 Circuit Plug Power Transmission 45 Harness, Power Transmission PC Bd Zone Interface Channel, Mounting (2 Unit) Channel, Mounting (4 Unit) Channel, Mounting (6 Unit) Wiring (See page 6) Suppressor Board Relay (See page 6) .5 Amps Fuse Screw, 1 O-24 x 3/8 PH Clip Plate, Name Harness (2 Unit) Harness (4 & 6 Unit) Harness, Battery (2 & 6 Unit) Harness, Battery (4 Unit) Bracket, End (2 & 6 Unit) Battery 12V 1 12-044 Battery, 12V Panel 733-070 Harness, 34 Length Hinge 6-32 x 318

2100 Multiplex OF CONTENTS …………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………. Aids.. Test Points ……………………………………………………………… Definitions HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing should be performed by quali- Simplex Representatives. repairs. publication designed as a troubleshooting aid in locating malfunctions 2100 Multipiex systems. the information will be able to isolate most faults to a board level. this publication, a troubleshooter with a good background 2100 Multjplex sys- publication divided into two major sections: Outlines Flowcharts outlines provide details on tests and checks a 2100 system, we recommend that you read through these outlines of troubleshooting procedures. the flowcharts may ask you to perform. Before you gain a better understand- are five separate flowcharts as shown below: troubleshooting can follow the flow to the end of thischart without being directed to another flowchart, your system working properly. the system, this chart will direct you to the flowchart nec- to locate the trouble. should always begin at the Basic Flowchart, which there is a malfunction a test chart. using the flowcharts, always follow you skip could be the one most necessary sure to read all information list in an action block all steps necessary to perform an action. materials aren heeded, it may prevent you from locating the problem. flow exactly as directed without skipping any steps. The you wasn references to outlines and equally important to in the reference blocks before performing an action. locating the trouble. The flowcharts utilize universal symbols. However, if you are unfamiliar with their meaning, to the page of symbol definitions preceding the flowcharts. 8 82 Troubleshooting Operating Instructions.. CRT & Keyboard Service Instructions Installation Jumper Placement and Switch Settings.. Printer Service Instructions.. . .575-529 Test Equipment: Diagnostic Program Line Tester Panel Outline AC power. Both halves of the POWER

Multi-Application Peripherals Accessories Series Hard-Wired Remote Control and LED Annunciation Listed* Modular design, select remote control and/or annunciation as required Compatible with Simplex models 4004 and 4005 alarm control panels System control module provides: Yellow system status LEDs for supervisory, and alarm silence Acknowledge switch for alarm, supervisory, or conditions Alarm silence switch for silencing audible appliances System reset switch Built-in tone-alert Key switch for enable/disable of system control Multi-application red LED annunciator module four locations with labeling provisions Red trim plates for 2, 3, or 4-gang sizes UL listed to Standard 864 used with the Simplex 4004 Fire Alarm Control these annunciators provide a remote LED status of Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble conditions local tone-alert operation. Additionally, the key enables control of Silence, Acknowledge, and The four LED alarm annunciator module is with the Simplex models 4004 and 4005 fire control panels as well as most LED drive circuits share a common +24 VDC. mount into standard 1 1/2 deep gangable boxes with plates available for 2, 3, or 4-gang Refer to selection chart on page 2. Voltage Current Current Switch Rating Plates Box Requirements by others) Terminations Temperature Range VDC, nominal 24 VDC mA @ 24 VDC, per LED mA @ 24 VDC A maximum @ 18-32 VDC with white lettering multi-gang switch 1 1/2 (38 mm) deep blocks, 22 to 16 AWG to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 95% RH, non-condensing 95 F (35 C) Humidity Range 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. Alarm Annunciator Plate Assembly Alarm Annunciator Plate Assembly Alarm Annunciator Plate Assembly This product was not ULC listed or approved by FM, MEA (NYC), or CSFM as of document date. Additional listings may be applicable, contact Simplex for the latest status. 7/00 SERIES ANNUNCIATOR PRODUCT INFORMATION Selection Chart four LED annunciator module labels for local zone identification with most LED drive 10 mA at 24 VDC, each LED status LEDs, control switch module, tone-alert, requires 2-gang space blank filler module (black) Dual-gang cover plate, red cover plate, red cover plate, red 4004 Fire Alarm Control Panel 4004-9808 Annunciator Interface to match module choice cover plate, 4601-9153 LED annunciator module, 4601-9104 Alarm Annunciator status LEDs and control switch double-gang, 4601-9106 blank filler module, 4601-9150 and the Simplex logo are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Simplex Time Recorder Co. the U.S. and/or other countries. 7/00 Massachusetts 01441-0001 U. S. A. and Representatives Throughout the World us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice.

firealarmresources.com

oocP/ozcz s~0113ntll~~i olanw SA431HW 3tllJ w ~NNVH~ moA uodn puadap a!) e 6upnp uewe) suo!pV ~13jvs aw atmow ems eg *eeqpeld 01 )eqm mouq 31W3dO 01 MOH 3NOHd 31W3dO 01 MOH 01 MOH u~rn )uewemnouue ue eyew 01 dn d!lj :sv3tlv 01 YlVl peps JeyeedS pSJ!Sep ~0~1 eyw e+tueM UMOP d!lj :SV~WV ~1m3.ks Ylsl eY!W sseJd 06 01 a31 Ylsl Jol I!sM eyeW 4181 ey!yy eseelel 1lV UMoP dill UerlM UOySod Je)ueD 0) dill pue pales JeyeedS peieA!pe 31VlllNI 01 MOW NOllVfBVA3 Sv3wv 3MCMdS 3~v/Jw/w peles JeyeedS peJ!sep lie dn 3~~3 3~113313s dn d!u uw JeAo )uewecxJnouue ue eyeur 01 31Vt13dO 01 MOH 3% ees UMOl#3 SUO!~llJ~SU! 1lV UMoP d!u ue UO!&!SOd Je1UW 3VA3 $DeleS JeyeedS psleA!pe eq) KE!ldeJ MOH d!l) pue A=I 33N3-B 6u!ssaJd uo!genDena w~ele sclaued OZLZ YWV3dS &BSeW/lrele 13NOWd EL 3NOHd d!lj 1~31~ mmds -k UWP d!u U~UM W91lMS 133138 NO = dfl NMOCI J.UTlV/XlVUNO 440 = M31N33 ;.-A’ leued 01 [email protected] o!pne &JeUJ!Jd) d!lj UMoP d!tj UellM SN0l13flkllSNI3S3Hl Q31NfIOW AW3kI UOj 13NVd lOUN03 pal!eJap JOJ IenueH uojgm~suj s,lolemdo aas 3NOHd u! pe66nld s! euoqd eloweJ uetlM s! iespueq eloweJ Jetsew dn *id euogd dn dill peuub 01 uo pJeeq s! leu6!s 614 le seqseli a31 euoqd le spunos euol se06 pu6!s ~U!J )espueH Gu!qseU 01 txeu wms uo suJn$ a37 6u!14selj l se euoqd Jetsew esn p pue E sde)s IeedeH peuJnl s! euol leued )espueq pe66nld s! euoqd JO peu!I euot eq) emel!s 01 dn d!u [email protected] 6u!pauum 3Al13V euoqd Jelsew dn 61×14 ueqM PeleS euoqd umop dill UMoP G 3Al13V/33N3llS pe66nldun eq lsnw euoud e)oweu )I) pe9eldeJ Iespueg eloweJ 0 1 ueql eJow yooq I)O s! euoqd a31 pue spur-m-eJ euo~ leued 41 W31SAS S3Oa NOIlVkifl9IJN03 SlHl 3Hl NI a31Sll SI X3ldWIS 3SV3 NI Cl P3 (LSl-PLS) ZlO- CC-zxnw OPERATING FOR FIRE FIGHTER AUDIO SYSTEM CHANNEL AUDIO) SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST! practices. Be sure you know what during a fire depend upon do. OPERATION TO OPERATE MIKE TO OPERATE MICROPHONE To make an announcement with mike: ALL AREAS: Flip up ALL SPEAKERS switch. SPEC/f/C AREAS: Flip up all desired Select Switches. AREA IN ALARM: Go to step 2. Remove mike from enclosure and press

Life Alarm Systems Processing Unit and -8702 CPU W/21 20-0801 BAY an attractively styled 51 2120-8701 console containing a Central Processing Unit (CPU) accepting standard 19 rack- space available equipment. The 2120-8702 the same as -8701 with the additional capability height up to 86 colors these consoles are black frame and panels systems berge on side and top panels, rust-colored grain cowlrng around contractor connections front perimeter. be in the bottom of the door and lower front panel, with a extend ULC Listed Approved Housed an 19 Rack-Mount Front CPU and Accessory Freestanding Console All modules Designed Equipped with Slide Mounts 2040 Monitor Points Control Points 2 Communications 10 Levels of Priority Event-Initiated Programs Battery Back-up Security Alarm Bypass Time Control, Field-Programmable Alphanumeric Distributed Processing Alarm Verification Display 20-Column Strip Printer BCD Time Output for Synchronizing Simplex Systems Standard RS-232-C Output Control Printer(s) and/or CRT(s) Full Alphanumeric Key Pad Simplex 2120 Multiplex System consists of the Processing Unit (CPU), Status Command Cen- (SCC), and Transponders with communications system modules reporting and/or controlling conditions and functions within a building or The system ideally suited for smaller-size buildings where the higher cost of a more complex Multiplex System cannot justified, and it offers an alternative a larger hard- system installation cost that may be prohibitive. the microprocessor-based and Transponders the latest in electronics designed spe- be cost-effective over a wide range of Life The system be easily expanded when additional monitor/control are required. For more detailed data sheet S2120-0021. 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. S2120-0018-7 DIMENSIONS NOTE 2 SLOPE 2120-0804 19 turret top, shown and the 2120-0805 35 top is to allow status command center modules line of sight to the operator viewing be angled down at a more ease status of points being an- DETAIL A-A OF RACK AREA A-A 112 (128.3cm) 718 (129.2cm) 518 (151.4cm) 318 (173.7cm) 118 (195.9cm) 718 (218.lcm) + 2120-0813 + 2120-0814 + 2120-0815 + 2120-0816 Door To remove drawer umt from the rack 20 00 wide. wth a 20.00 space. r&i. must be a min. of Frame width 21 t 16 add 3 8 ior each 01 the two side determine total wdth of a console 2120-0802 30 pie section, shown and the 2120-0803 45 pie sections to be used when console bays are ar- to insure proper spacing and for overall corners or in a wraparound MODULE BOARD 1 MAY BE PROGRAMMED COMMERCIAL POWER OUTAGES. OPERATE ONLY DUR- A 7 panel space shall henceforth be referred as 1 Each row is 3

How To Operate The 2120 System During Alarm Situations SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST! Be sure you know what to do. during a fire depend upon When appropriate, unlock and open the BMUX door. TO ACKNOWLEDGE THE ALARM: Press the ACKNOWLEDGE button next to the flashing LED on the BMUX front panel. TO SILENCE SIGNALS, press the SIGNAL SILENCE button on the BMUX front panel. To display the location of the alarm, press the LOCATION INFORMATION button on the BMUX front panel. TO OPERATE THE MICROPHONE (IF APPLICABLE): Remove the microphone from its enclosure, touch the lip guide to your upper lip, and press the mike Signals Are Sounding: to talk. Signals Are Not Sounding: Flip the OSC STOP switch up. Select speaker circuits via the ALL CIRCUITS switch or the appropriate SCC switch(es). Remove the microphone from its enclosure, touch the lip guide to your upper lip, and press the mike to talk. Restore all switches to their appropriate positions when done. When the alarms have been cleared, reset the device(s) in alarm and acknowledge the clear condition. TO RESET THE SYSTEM after alarms have been cleared, press the DETECTOR RESET button on the BMUX panel. Refer to the BMUX Operating Voice Communications Operating for details on system operation. 4 87 0 1987 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

Simplex BMUX List unit are grounded before making any or repairs. installation and servicing should performed by qualified Simplex Representatives. 2120 BMUX Parts List contains only 2120 replaceable parts Those the 2001 line are listed in the 2001 Parts List, Pub. No. FA-2-81-001. parts which belong Ensure that this properly No. Assembly (See Figure 2) 96 Board Panel Assy. 96 Controller Board 96 (FE232 To Printer Controller) 94 (Printer Controller To Printer) (Printer Switches To Printer) Kit Trim Kit Trim Kit Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Front Panel 1 Assembly 2 )?o. 6-475 Assembly Assembly Belt Belt Board Paper, Roll Shown 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notIce. Manuals Online! – – .-. ._,_,,_- —. No. Boards (See Page 3) Supply & Card Rack (See Figure 4) Panel (See Figure 5) Standby ( 2V 33AH) Standby ( 2V 8AH) Standby ( 2V 18AH) Shown Shown Battery H,xness (4 Unit) Battery Hsrness (6 Unit) Shown Shelf I10 Board City Board Shown Shown (AC lnpL t Bd. to BT I/O Bd.) 95 (BT I 0 Eld. to Local BT Bd.) Input Board (120VAC) 109 Input Board (240VAC) Shown Shown Shown Shown (RS232 Bd. to AC IO Bd.) (DC Transmission AC Input Bd.) (Celestrs to AC Input Bd.) (Motherboard Front Panel) Shown (AC I 0 13d. to Power Supply) Assembly 3 No. Supply Board Board IN2498 2N58134 3 Ohms Shown (Pwr. Supply Bd. to Motherbd.) Supply 81 Card Rack 4 Manuals Online! – No. Assembly (Includes 562-214) Supply Board Panel 5 Modules Face Components No. 5 Amp 3/l 0 Amp 0.5 Amp 2 Amp 0.2 Amp 4 Amp 10 Amp 2 Amp 83 Chip (8048) 86 Chip (Programmed) (lN5242B) (IN4148) (lN6263) (2N6036) No. Board Board 96 Board 09 67 92 Printer Board Supply Board Input Board (120VAC) Transmission Board BT Board I/O Board Controller Board

B5implex Multiplex Procedure: 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass specifications other were current as of publication. are subject 10 change Who Manuals Online! – 10 90 Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS TO USE THIS PUBLICATIO-N . . . . . ..__………………….__……………____…_._……_………………………………………………… AN OVERVIEW . . . .._……..__.._………….._……………..__………………………………………………………………………………. GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._……_………___…………..___….._.._……………………………………………………………………. CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.. PRELIMINARY CHECKOUT.. BATTERY ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FINAL CHECKOUT.. A B PANEL JUMPER PLACEMENT AND SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PERIPHERAL SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . .._…………………………………………………………………………………….. HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- REQUiREMENT system, disconnect removing power FIRST and AC power When connecting to this system, connect AC power FIRST and not and used radio communications. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio energy and with the instructions manual, may cause has been and found to comply with the limits for a Class A Subpart J of Part 15 of device pursuant Rules, which are designed provide reasonable against such be required to correct the interference. a residential cause which case the user at his own expense take whatever measures may be when operated Manuals Online! – TO USE THIS PUBLlCATlON publication provides a guide to the installation and checkout of the 2120 communicating device transponder sure that you understand guide. information the 2120 Multiplex System manual before reading YOU WILL NEED DURING THE INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT will need the system-supplied manual (MUX2-21-003) below to install and check out a CDT. The 2120 Multiplex method of interpreting equipment drawings. System drawings the communications any audio and telephone and all CDT equipment cabinet drawings showing component and external (contractor) connections. M-2120-CDT wiring diagrams. your Simplex Representative you do not receive the proper system documentation. communicating 2120 communications (see Figure 1). is a 2120 system component is connected the BMUX via AN OVERVIEW CLARITY) VAC OTHER 2120

B!!Simplex Multiplex Device (CDT) Reference 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. other specifications Manuals Online! – were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. (575-278) 9 92 HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- FIRST and AC power When connectmg to this system, connect AC power FIRST and not and used radio communications. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio energy and with the instructions manual, may cause has been and found to comply with the limits for a Class A device pursuant Subpart J of Part 15 of Rules, which are designed against such interference when operated be required to correct the interference. a residential cause which case the user at his own expense take whatever measures may be provide reasonable Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS PANEL INSTALLATION PANEL JUMPER PLACEMENT AND SWITCH SETTINGS PERIPHERAL SWITCH SETTINGS.. CHECKOUT.. OF FIGURES No. 2120 System With CDT …………………………………………………………………………………………………. Communicating Device Transponder Block Diagram ……………………………………………………………………………………….. Board To 2120 Communications Connections.. Power Supply Terminal Connections Panel Jumper And Switch Locations …………………………………………………………………………… Monitor And Control Point Locations Power Supply Terminal Connections Power Supply Terminal Connections For 12 Volt Power Option.. …………………………………… Board To 2120 Communications Supply ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Termination TB2 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Memory …………………………………………………………… Connections Termination TBl Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – communicating 2120 communications (see Figure 1). a 2120 system component is connected the BMUX via ET 2120 System with CDT 1 CDT mounts identify and control points. location a 2-, 4-, or 6

2120 Multiplex Command Center Operating 0 1988SlmplexTlmeRecorderCo., Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. Manuals Online! – (575-555) 9-88 ) HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing Simplex Representatives. be performed by quali- repairs. significant programming programming system reprogramming controlled manual, may cause equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre- energy and if not installed and used in accordance communications. has been tested and found to com- with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed operated case the user at his own expense will be required measures may be required to correct Operation of this take protection a commercial a residential area is likely interference. such cause Manuals Online! – INFORMATION Status/Command Center (SCC) (Figure 1) is an auxiliary operating station for the 2120 Multiplex System. The annunciates selected monitor zones and provides controls for outputs. SCC is composed of a number of modules 2120 system. eight switches or combinations all cases with door modules, an SCC control module (Figure 2) is always mounted of the cabinet while other modules the quantity of which depends on the size and complexity of the of which contains columns of eight LED the eight indicators and eight switches) are installed elsewhere annunciates LED could be status, bypass condition or trouble). Each switch is assigned outputs control signals at the selected priority level. a selected monitor zone, control point, or condition a selected output and, when SCC cabinet may contain modules other than those listed above. If so, please refer to the proper instruction of the additional modules. the operation The priority structure the 2120 system may not allow all switch commands are not affective by priority and continue indicate be followed. However, actual status of the selected On Flashe when acknowl- is required. – To P vower is lost or an de- to test the SCC Display. earth Used si- alert tone & flash- indicators. to enable SCC during power MODULE 1 2 control module (Figure 2), located in the upper right-hand corner of the SCC unit, contains indicators and controls the SCC itself. The indicators give information on the status of the SCC, thereby confirming validity of the displayed. The control module also contains the SCC functions. The indi- controls and their functions will be described operating controls necessary the top down. Manuals Online! – LINE Indicator LINE Indicator CHANGE Indicator Control off. POWER FAILURE Indicator DISPLAY Control TEST Control ON LINE 2120 has been established and is in progress. normally ON. This communication SCC and the OFF LINE indicator qualified maintenance personnel should be called. normally OFF. When communication lost, this LED indicator will be ON

2120 Multiplex Transponder Alarm Digital Monitor, Class A Isolation Procedure or be pet-t- HAZARD power *men making any internal sewdng quatihed Simplex Representa- REOUIREMENT renming power from this system, dusonmct FIRST and AC power last when connecting cmneot AC poww FIRST end publication provides A (McCulloh board. procedures the expanded fire alarm digitafmonitor. ET McCulloh feature is provided by two boards: The fire alarm digital monitor board, Class A (562-465) an ET daughter card. The fire alarm digital monitor board, Class A (562-466). feature provides Class A operation ET McCulloh monitor points 1 through 4 on the fire alarm digital troubles; monitor 6 through 8 may be used as normal. A single break on any one of the first four monitor point circuits will the I/O board to put all four board, Class A. Monitor point 5 on the I/O board used to report McCulloh Class A operation. of the way the ET McCulloh point that, is actually by an ET.) This procedure trouble. outlined below. feature works, a special procedure there BMUX only knows required a McCulloh locate the Class A trouble being proceeding, notify building personnel and local authorities will be working on the 2120 system. department, etc.) that RECEIVING AN ET MCCULLOH LOOP TROUBLE REPORT: Determine which ET reported the McCulloh Go to that ET and locate the fire alarm digital monitor I/O board, Class A, that contains the troubled zone. Do one of the following: trouble via the BMUX trouble report. Find switch Si on the I/O board just located. Hold Sl down for five seconds. This will allow the ET at the BMUX trouble report to determine trouble; report the monitor point that is actually troubled zone. Locate board block TB2. Hold switch Sl down and, at the same time, use your VOM check each monitor point circuit for opens via the terminals on terminal block TB2. Manuals Online! – 1986 Simpbr Recorder Gardner. Mass 01441-0001 S A Repair the open in the troubled monitor point circuit wiring. (Optional) Hold Sl on the I/O board down for five seconds. no monitor point troubles are reported, then have fixed the problem. Press the BMUX DETECTOR RESET pushbutton. The McCulloh trouble will clear, and the ET Class A boards will resume normal operation. Manuals Online! –

B$implex McCulloh Multiplex Procedure electrical power when making any internal or and servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- REQUIREMENT removing power from this system, disconnect FIRST and AC powar last. When connecting to this system, connect AC power FIRST and last. publication provides trouble isolation procedures for the FABT McCulloh loop board. McCulloh loop board is used on FABTs to provide McCulloh loop (Class A) operation for FABT monitor point 1 through 4. Monitor point 5 on the associated FABT is used to report McCulloh loop troubles; monitor 6 through 8 may be used as normal. of the way that the McCulloh loop board operates, a special procedure is required to locate the McCulloh monitor point that is actually in trouble. (The BMUX only knows that there is a M,cCulloh loop trouble being by an FABT.) This procedure is outlined below. proceeding, notify appropriate building personnel and local authorities (fire department, that you will be working on the 2120 system. RECEIVING A MCCULLOH LOOP TROUBLE REPORT: Determine which FABT reported the McCulloh loop trouble via the BMUX trouble report. Go to that FABT and observe the McCulloh loop board. Look at the LEDs on the McCulloh loop board just located to isolate the troubled zone(s). LED 1 trouble on monitor point 1; LED 2 indicates trouble on monitor point 2; etc. Repair the trouble in the indicated monitor point circuit wiring. Press the BMUX DETECTOR RESET pushbutton. The McCulloh loop trouble will clear, and the McCulloh loop board will resume normal operation. are two versions of the McCulloh loop board that you may encounter: The 562-318 McCulloh loop board,, used only with 562-312 FABTs. This board is now The 562-550 McCulloh loop board, used only with 562-531 FABTs. these two McCulloh loop boards look the same, ARE NOT INTERCHANGEABLE! 9 86 1966 Simpler Tlme Recorder Gardner, Mass. 01441.0001 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

B5implex Multiplex Procedure: 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner. Mass specifications other were current as of publication. are subject 10 change Who 10 90 OF CONTENTS TO USE THIS PUBLICATIO-N . . . . . ..__………………….__……………____…_._……_………………………………………………… AN OVERVIEW . . . .._……..__.._………….._……………..__………………………………………………………………………………. GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._……_………___…………..___….._.._……………………………………………………………………. CHECKOUT PROCEDURES.. PRELIMINARY CHECKOUT.. BATTERY ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FINAL CHECKOUT.. A B PANEL JUMPER PLACEMENT AND SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PERIPHERAL SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . .._…………………………………………………………………………………….. HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- REQUiREMENT system, disconnect removing power FIRST and AC power When connecting to this system, connect AC power FIRST and not and used radio communications. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio energy and with the instructions manual, may cause has been and found to comply with the limits for a Class A Subpart J of Part 15 of device pursuant Rules, which are designed provide reasonable against such be required to correct the interference. a residential cause which case the user at his own expense take whatever measures may be when operated TO USE THIS PUBLlCATlON publication provides a guide to the installation and checkout of the 2120 communicating device transponder sure that you understand guide. information the 2120 Multiplex System manual before reading YOU WILL NEED DURING THE INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT will need the system-supplied manual (MUX2-21-003) below to install and check out a CDT. The 2120 Multiplex method of interpreting equipment drawings. System drawings the communications any audio and telephone and all CDT equipment cabinet drawings showing component and external (contractor) connections. M-2120-CDT wiring diagrams. your Simplex Representative you do not receive the proper system documentation. communicating 2120 communications (see Figure 1). is a 2120 system component is connected the BMUX via AN OVERVIEW CLARITY) VAC OTHER 2120

-a ,Simplex Circuit Boards Kit is required communicate with a 2100/2120 the BMUX. This kit consists of two printed circuit boards which will replace boards can be identified by two yellow and red LED on the outside edge of the board. The new Controller board has a single green LED on it and also an 87C51 microcontroller which will be required new Communications 2100 Transmission each 2100 the 2100 Loop Circuit Protector required on both sides of any communications located more than 10,000 (1.9 miles) from the BMUX, a DC repeater or a modem Protection Simplex Model 2081-9027 leaves the building. Restrktions the 2100 required. Documents 2100 Multiplex Transponder Parts List MUX1 -81-002 2100 Multiplex 575-544 AC power and batteries all board DC and each 2100 transponder. See Figure 1 for board locations. 2100 CPU and to the (replacement) 2120. Model 2098-2097 on any DC communication the building. Circuit that called for) Install any repeaters or modems on communication Be sure that the polarity of the communication A and A are correct. and the B and B lines are negative. McCulloh, connections.) are A and B terminals are the 1999SimplexTime Manuals Online! – Co., Gardner. Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. BD BD BD* BD BOARDS BE REPLACED. 1 Transponder the Anti-static Kit (Part No. 553-503) when handling boards. 7) no alterations need to be made to the board. operated style 7, contact Board Preparation not operated Support at Headquarters. McCulloh Board banks of dip switches on operate. These switch banks are read and stored by the microcontroller are RESET button must be pressed or the power must be removed and re-applied transponder the settings changed controller board which must be configured powered the new settings pressed. the power up or when the RESET be read and Card Address Switch Settings and SW2) switches on switch banks SW1 and SW2 are numbered 0 to 15 and are set ON if their number corresponds the transponder. These addresses are found by either (a) looking them up an encoder card address present the 2100 TRANSPONDER SPECIFICATION SHEETS for the particular being converted or by (b) reading jumpers on the mother board of the transponder. These four jumpers are located next to the encoder card a bit in a four-bit address and is either a binary one by connected address, simply up the binary weights + 12 Volts or a binary zero by being connected Figure 2.) Each jumper corresponds each bit tied to + 12 Volts. GND. To determine to Figure 2) jumpers on the second encoder card are con- as follows: encoder binary slot address would address 4 + 28 NOC encoder card has an address of 2 + 8 = 10. determined, along the encoder card address edge

Simplex Multiplex Information T 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications were current as of publication. other information are subject change without notice. l-007 OF CONTENTS TO USE THIS PUBLICATION ADDS VIEWPOINT CRT/KEYBOARD.. ADDS BASIC + CRT/KEYBOARD MICRO-TERM CRT/KEYBOARD GENICOM TERMINET ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… CENTRONICS CENTRONICS H80 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. CENTRONICS HPC-80 CENTRONICS PS 21O/BROTHER M-1409 EPSON LX-810 ………………………………………………………………………….. publication provides on the following 2120 Multiplex peripherals: TO USE THIS PUBLICATION The ADDS Viewpoint CRT/keyboard. The ADDS Basic + CRT/keyboard. The Micro-Term CRT/keyboard The Genicom Terminet (formerly the G.E. TermiNet). The Centronics 150 printer. The Centronics H80 printer. The Centronics HPC-80B printer. The Centronics PS 210 and Brother M-l 409 printers. The Epson LX-81 0 printer. service information provided for each peripheral. ADDS VIEWPOINT CRT/KEYBOARD ADDS Viewpoint CRT/keyboard 1) consists of a green phosphor monitor and a keyboard. shipped prior to April 1985 are black; those shipped after are white. VIEWPOINT KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS ADDS CRT/Keyboard 1 2 shows and perform special functions. ADDS Viewpoint keyboard. Look at the keys in the numeric keypad on the right. The keys Pressing Fl acknowledges 2120 alarms and troubles. Pressing F2 activates Pressing F3 activates 2120 SIGNAL SILENCE program. 2120 DETECTOR RESET program. , F2, and F3 are functional only when the remote acknowledge option is enabled. LOCK A 1 SHFT 1 2 1 X 1 C 1 V 1 B N I M I r: -f ADDS Viewpoint Keyboard 2 look at the on the left side of the keyboard. The when used in conjunction with other also performs special functions. Holding key down and then pressing key will end a report that was requested by a command. Holding key down and then pressing key will acknowledge 2120 alarms and troubles if remote acknowledge enabled). Holding key down and then pressing key will activate

Bimplex Multiplex Editing Feature Instructions 1989 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice, COMMANDS DESCRIBED THIS PUBLICATION ALLOW YOU TO CHANGE CRITICAL POINT PARAMETERS. ONCE YOU HAVE CHANGED A POINT PARAMETERS, SMPL EQUATIONS CONTAINING THAT POINT MUST BE CHECKED AND ALTERED OR THE EQUATIONS MAY NOT OPERATE PROPERLY. BE CAREFUL WHEN THE RESIDENT EDITING COMMANDS. programming of this system can result in sig- damage controlled equipment. Read the in- carefully before programming or reprogram- the system. TO USE THIS PUBLICATION publication describes operating commands used in the 2120 Resident Editing software you have a thorough knowledge of the 2120 and SMPL programming before attempting commands. Be sure use Resident manual is divided into the following chapters: WHAT RESIDENT EDITING? RESIDENT EDITING COMMANDS STORING RESIDENT EDITING CHANGES USING THE 2120 CASSETTE TAPE UNIT APPENDIX A: NUMBER OF NAME/LABEL CHANGES ALLOWED of these chapters divided into subheadings covering specific topics. Comprehensive can help you quickly and easily locate topics of interest to you. below provides a cross-reference various by page number. Use it often – Resident Editing Introduction 2 General Definition System Requirements LOG ON . . .2 . 2 Valid Resident Editing Commands HELP…3 LABEL. NAME. SENSE. .3,4 .4,5 .6 . . Using SENSE with monitor points Using SENSE with ET control points. Using SENSE with analog pseudo points . . . 8, 9 7 . PRIORITY. SUPPRESS CLASS.. DEVICE .9,10 . . 10,ll 11,12 . . 12, 13 Resident Editing and the Cassette Tape Unit Storing Changes Loading Changes . . 14 the BMUX . 14,15 Number of NAME/LABEL Changes Allowed. . 16 RESIDENT EDITING? 2120 Resident Editing allows you to change the following system parameters at the 2120 site: names). Custom Symbolic point specifiers Point sensing. Point priority. Print suppression RS232C port assignments. system points. Resident Editing of all SMPL operating and Resident Editing commands. also includes a system-level HELP command which, when used, provides brief can use the 2120 cassette this aspect of Resident Editing later in this publication. unit to record all field changes (except for RS232C port assignments). We Requirements 2120 system must have at least two 96K PRAM boards (562-511) or six 32K PRAM boards (562-305) use the Resident Editing feature. Resident Editing is included with SMPL revision 5.0 or later. order You cannot 32K and 96K PRAM boards. to use the SMPL password: Resident Editing commands use of the system SMPL password. There are now two You can use the /PA qualifier after each Resident Editing command. The system will then prompt you for as it has always done with SMPL commands. Throughout publication, included with the Resident Editing command examples used. password, You can use the following command remove password protection all protected SMPL and Editing commands: system will then prompt you for the SMPL password. Notice that you only have to use the password you LOG ON. Once you LOG ON, the SMPL password When you finish changes, you would enter: no longer return the system you have entered no commands the password-protected longer than five minutes. The system will automa

S$implex Multiplex Channel Communications Information i987~i~Pl~XTl~OR~rderCo.,G~dner. 014414001 l-003 electrical power when making any internal servicing be pettormed by qualifted Simplex Representa- system, disconnect removing power FIRST and AC power When connecting to this system. connect AC power FIRST and TO USE THIS PUBLICATION publication Typical equipment configurations are illustrated, as are specific equipment. on 2120 Multiplex systems equipped with 2001 voice communications 2120 and manual divided into the following sections: MAIN EQUIPMENT REMOTE EQUIPMENT CLASS A AUDIO of these sections divided into subheadings covering specific topics. This manual intended those who already have a solid background 2120 Multiplex systems 2120 and 2001 voice communications 2001 Voice Communications materials basic information. Refer MORE DETAILED to the documents below. Voice Communications Wiring Diagrams Systems Troubleshooting Guide Voice Communications Module Descriptions with Voice Communications Multiplex System cabinet drawings 20 and M-2120~ET initiating wiring diagrams drawings manual the specific installation the specific installation W.D. No. 801-529 use 2001 voice communications equipment are configured differently Multiplex systems Since 2120 systems equipped with voice communications to lose the multiplex advantage in the building or complex a special approach because we want voice communications. their 2001 of applications, a 2120 system set up – we don shown major difference 2120 use what we call an audio riser. An audio riser is typically a single wire pair that carries an amplified signal to transponder cabinets where the audio signal is applied to FABT or ET speaker circuits (via audio boards). As you can see in the block diagram, most FABT or ET cabinets contain audio relay boards contain an audio interface transformer and a remote amplifier. Figure 1. Since we must provide audio signals each building BMUX equipment cabinet contains The SCC cabinet, usually close-nippled preamp boosts The equipment the BMUX cabinet original audio signal so that the signal can make it to its destinations without voice communication equipment originate system audio the BMUX cabinet, contains what we call the power preamp. of the SCC cabinet via a harness equipment connected BMUX local BT is used to monitor and control both BMUX and SCC audio equipment conditions. look at the various components of a 2120 voice communications starts – at the beginning of the audio riser. We start where the original audio publication we will use 2001 product you make easier cross-reference voice voice RISER IN REU EACH INDIVIDUAL EACH lNDlVlD RELAV TRANBPoNDENB TO/FROM

firealarmresources.com

SlSimplex Multiplex Software Feature Instructions7 1997 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. A of Contents Started with SMPL ……………………………………………………………… Status Commands Operating Commands 2120 Priority System ………………………………………………. SETCommand of the SET Command with Monitor Points ……………………………….. of the SET Command with Control Points. ……………………………….. of the SET Command with Pseudo Points Alarm, and Trouble Messages …………………………………………………. or System Trouble Messages ………………………………………. Line Trouble Messages. ……………………………………. Trouble Messages. ………………………………………….. Point Trouble Message ………………………………………….. Control Point Trouble Message ………………………………….. 1 2 3 1 1 Software Feature publication provides operating instructions for 2 120 Multiplex Systems with the SMPL operating/programming Before attempting to and SMPL-equipped 2120, read the material found on pages 1 through 6 in BMUX Customer Operating Instructions (Part No. 575-543). This information general operating procedures for the 2 120 BMUX. stands for Simplex Multi-Programming Language. This new operating and language provides greatly enhance features over the previous programming. is truly simple to use. Very little memorization is required – most of the are expressed in plain English. Many of the commands are set up in a way that a single command can be used to obtain a wide variety of about the system. So . . . once you have become familiar with the way works, you should have no difficulty using it. Started with SMPL status/operat

—– 4 SSimplex G ~987ShPbX~m%twckeCo.. Mass.01441.0001 OF CONTENTS Troubleshooting or Intermittent Troubles Code Outline Outline Outline Outline of the 2120 Diagnostic Program Definitions Flowchart Flowchart Flowchart 1 of 2) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 of 2) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1 of 2) ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2 of 2) ………………………………………………………………………………………………. Flowchart HAZARD seniclng Simplex Ropmssntatlves. mpaln. pwfannod qusli- sfgnlflcsnt system controllsd Outlines Flowcharts publication designed as a troubleshooting in locating 2120 Multiplex System malfunctions. the information to isolate most faults to a board level. this publication, a troubleshooter with a good background 2120 Multiplex Systems will be publication divided two major sections: outlines provide details on tests and checks Multiplex System, read through these outlines to gain a better understanding of troubleshooting procedures. the flowcharts may ask you to perform. Before you service a are four separate as shown below: basic flowchart to the end of the basic flowchart without being directed is a trouble in the system, a test chart. Your troubleshooting chart will direct you to the flowchart necessary locate the tro

SSimdex Multiplex Diagrams 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. 6 92 following order Headquarters have been revised following directly publication this document. Blue Print Room at Documents Documents 96 Numbers 27 listed by wiring listed by assembly are located the rear of this publication.) numerical WIRING DIAGRAMS OF CONTENTS Printer with Voice Communications Power Supply Power Supply Interconnection Modem Power Supply Power Supply Supply pt.) pt.) Power Option Signal Power Option Multiplex Board Communication 96 1 92 Panel Display Board Panel Display Board BT Board BT l/O Board BT City Board BT City Board Transmission l/O Board 110 Board Board Board Board PRAM Board PRAM Board Board* Power Supply Power Supply Board Power Supply Board Converter Board Converter Board Printer Board Controller Board and new wiring diagrams 01 Pg. Pg. Controller Board Controller Board Controller Board Loop Board Controller Board Controller Board Relay Board Relay Board Relay Board Audio Relay Board Relay Board Relay Board* Relay Board Board Suppressor Board Monitor Board Loop Board Relay Supervision Relay Supervision Supply 11 Power Supply Board Motherboard Board Monitor Board Control Board with S.upetvision Control Board without Supervision Alarm Digital Monitor Board Alarm Digital Monitor Board, Class A Monitor Relay Relay Relay Alarm Digital Monitor Alarm Digital Monitor Monitor Board Relay Board Board, Class A Board Board Board Board Board, Class A Power Supply Converter Board Supply Board Power Supply Board 562-464

B!!Simplex Multiplex Device (CDT) Reference 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. (575-278) 9 92 HAZARD electrical power when making any internal servicing be performed by qualified Simplex Representa- FIRST and AC power When connectmg to this system, connect AC power FIRST and not and used radio communications. equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio energy and with the instructions manual, may cause has been and found to comply with the limits for a Class A device pursuant Subpart J of Part 15 of Rules, which are designed against such interference when operated be required to correct the interference. a residential cause which case the user at his own expense take whatever measures may be provide reasonable OF CONTENTS PANEL INSTALLATION PANEL JUMPER PLACEMENT AND SWITCH SETTINGS PERIPHERAL SWITCH SETTINGS.. CHECKOUT.. OF FIGURES No. 2120 System With CDT …………………………………………………………………………………………………. Communicating Device Transponder Block Diagram ……………………………………………………………………………………….. Board To 2120 Communications Connections.. Power Supply Terminal Connections Panel Jumper And Switch Locations …………………………………………………………………………… Monitor And Control Point Locations Power Supply Terminal Connections Power Supply Terminal Connections For 12 Volt Power Option.. …………………………………… Board To 2120 Communications Supply ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Termination TB2 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Memory …………………………………………………………… Connections Termination TBl communicating 2120 communications (see Figure 1). a 2120 system component is connected the BMUX via ET 2120 System with CDT 1 CDT mounts identify and control points. location a 2-, 4-, or 6-unit backbox the 2120 system Figure 2). Each CDT has two transponder addresses used only

[email protected] Multiplex Concepts 1987SlmplOXTlmeRacorderCo., Mass. 01441-0001 OBJECTIVES AND ORGANIZATION publication course you will be able to install, operate, program, and service any 2120 system. the 2120 Multiplex system a continuation course. Once you have completed Before reading this training manual, be sure you have studied the 2120 Multiplex BT and FABT Concepts you have not read the BT and FABT concepts manual, do so now before reading further. manual. objectives this manual are listed below. Be able to list the similarities between ETs and the other 2120 transponders you have studied. Be able to list the differences between ETs and the other 2120 transponders you have studied. Be able to explain how the two ET control point sensing assignments are used. Be able to define the function(s) of each of the following: board converter board cards cards Be able to correctly number the daughter and I/O cards in an ET cabinet. Be able to list the two ways that the ET can transmit and receive 2120 data. Be able to explain the meaning of any given ET monitor and control point number. no need concept of expanded opportunity manual. Give become comfortable with your rush through above all, IF YOU HAVE A QUESTION YOUR COURSE ADMINISTRATOR! OF 2120 TRANSPONDER CONCEPTS if you can correctly answer each of the following general questions about 2120 transponders. When yot~ check your answers against on page 25. you answer Multiplex BT and FABT Concepts manual. than four of the five questions correctly, you might want to review some of the material the How many transponders there be on one 2120 communications What makes possible the BMUX to distinguish between one 2120 transponder and another? What does the number to? what applications are BTs used? what applications are FABTs used? previous publications, 2120 transponders the brains of the 2120, then the transponder we have learned and FABTs are and how they are used. Now we want to look at another then see how ETs compare a more detailed picture of how the ET works. the the 2120 eyes, ears, and hands. We also learned what or ET. We first see what ETs look like and what role they play in the 2120 polling cycle. make up an ET to BTs and FABTs. Later we look at the components BMUX to all external devices. of 2120 1 CRTs, OR TAPE 1) COUNTS AS AT ONE Fs(( l==-L- AN TRANSPONDER? expanded more monitor and control points). But, even though ET bears little physical is just what BTs and FABTs. name – 2120 transponder with expanded capabilities BMUX an ET as just another you are: ET a backbox. group of ET CPU board the ET status to the BMUX. controls all ET functions and eight daughter mounted of these daughter a support up to eight monitor points or four points, and each card points to the CPU

2120 Multiplex Command Center Operating 0 1988SlmplexTlmeRecorderCo., Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. (575-555) 9-88 ) HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments servicing Simplex Representatives. be performed by quali- repairs. significant programming programming system reprogramming controlled manual, may cause equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre- energy and if not installed and used in accordance communications. has been tested and found to com- with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed operated case the user at his own expense will be required measures may be required to correct Operation of this take protection a commercial a residential area is likely interference. such cause INFORMATION Status/Command Center (SCC) (Figure 1) is an auxiliary operating station for the 2120 Multiplex System. The annunciates selected monitor zones and provides controls for outputs. SCC is composed of a number of modules 2120 system. eight switches or combinations all cases with door modules, an SCC control module (Figure 2) is always mounted of the cabinet while other modules the quantity of which depends on the size and complexity of the of which contains columns of eight LED the eight indicators and eight switches) are installed elsewhere annunciates LED could be status, bypass condition or trouble). Each switch is assigned outputs control signals at the selected priority level. a selected monitor zone, control point, or condition a selected output and, when SCC cabinet may contain modules other than those listed above. If so, please refer to the proper instruction of the additional modules. the operation The priority structure the 2120 system may not allow all switch commands are not affective by priority and continue indicate be followed. However, actual status of the selected On Flashe when acknowl- is required. – To P vower is lost or an de- to test the SCC Display. earth Used si- alert tone & flash- indicators. to enable SCC during power MODULE 1 2 control module (Figure 2), located in the upper right-hand corner of the SCC unit, contains indicators and controls the SCC itself. The indicators give information on the status of the SCC, thereby confirming validity of the displayed. The control module also contains the SCC functions. The indi- controls and their functions will be described operating controls necessary the top down. LINE Indicator LINE Indicator CHANGE Indicator Control off. POWER FAILURE Indicator DISPLAY Control TEST Control ON LINE 2120 has been established and is in progress. normally ON. This communication SCC and the OFF LINE indicator qualified maintenance personnel should be called. normally OFF. When communication lost, this LED indicator will be ON indicate The SCC data being displayed during an OFF LINE indication

Field Installation of the Multiport SLI Option C Manuals Online! – SDJH OHIW EODQN Manuals Online! – 127 ,167$// $1< 6,03/(; 352 7+$7 $33($56 8SRQ XQSDFNLQJ 6LPSOH[ SURGXFW(cid:15) LQVSHFW WKH FRQWHQWV RI FDUWRQ IRU VKLSSLQJ GDPDJH(cid:17) ,I GDPDJH LV DSSDUHQW(cid:15) LPPHGLDWHO ILOH D FODLP WKH FDUULHU DQG QRWLI 6LPSOH[(cid:17) +$=$5 (cid:16) HOHFWULFDO SRZHU ZKHQ PDNLQJ DQ DGMXVWPHQWV RU UHSDLUV(cid:17) 6HUYLFLQJ VKRXOG EH SHUIRUPHG E TXDOLILHG 5HSUHVHQWDWLYHV(cid:17) )5(48(1&< (1(5*< (cid:16) 7KLV HTXLSPHQW JHQHUDWHV(cid:15) XVHV(cid:15) DQG FDQ UDGLR IUHTXHQF HQHUJ DQG LI QRW LQVWDOOHG DQG XVHG LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK LQVWUXFWLRQ PDQXDO(cid:15) PD FDXVH LQWHUIHUHQFH WR UDGLR FRPPXQLFDWLRQV(cid:17) ,W KDV WHVWHG DQG IRXQG WR FRPSO ZLWK WKH OLPLWV IRU D &ODVV $ FRPSXWLQJ GHYLFH WR 6XESDUW - RI 3DUW (cid:20)(cid:24) RI )&& 5XOHV(cid:15) ZKLFK DUH GHVLJQHG WR SURYLGH SURWHFWLRQ DJDLQVW VXFK LQWHUIHUHQFH ZKHQ RSHUDWHG LQ D FRPPHUFLDO 2SHUDWLRQ RI WKLV HTXLSPHQW LQ D UHVLGHQWLDO DUHD LV OLNHO WR FDXVH LQ ZKLFK FDVH WKH XVHU DW KLV RZQ H[SHQVH ZLOO EH UHTXLUHG WR WDNH PHDVXUHV PD EH UHTXLUHG WR FRUUHFW WKH LQWHUIHUHQFH(cid:17) Manuals Online! - SDJH OHIW EODQN Manuals Online! - (cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17)(cid:17) (cid:20) (cid:20)

Simplex Multiplex Information T 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications were current as of publication. other information are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – l-007 Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS TO USE THIS PUBLICATION ADDS VIEWPOINT CRT/KEYBOARD.. ADDS BASIC + CRT/KEYBOARD MICRO-TERM CRT/KEYBOARD GENICOM TERMINET ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… CENTRONICS CENTRONICS H80 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. CENTRONICS HPC-80 CENTRONICS PS 21O/BROTHER M-1409 EPSON LX-810 ………………………………………………………………………….. Manuals Online! – publication provides on the following 2120 Multiplex peripherals: TO USE THIS PUBLICATION The ADDS Viewpoint CRT/keyboard. The ADDS Basic + CRT/keyboard. The Micro-Term CRT/keyboard The Genicom Terminet (formerly the G.E. TermiNet). The Centronics 150 printer. The Centronics H80 printer. The Centronics HPC-80B printer. The Centronics PS 210 and Brother M-l 409 printers. The Epson LX-81 0 printer. service information provided for each peripheral. ADDS VIEWPOINT CRT/KEYBOARD ADDS Viewpoint CRT/keyboard 1) consists of a green phosphor monitor and a keyboard. shipped prior to April 1985 are black; those shipped after are white. VIEWPOINT KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS ADDS CRT/Keyboard 1 2 shows and perform special functions. ADDS Viewpoint keyboard. Look at the keys in the numeric keypad on the right. The keys Pressing Fl acknowledges 2120 alarms and troubles. Pressing F2 activates Pressing F3 activates 2120 SIGNAL SILENCE program. 2120 DETECTOR RESET program. , F2, and F3 are functional only when the remote acknowledge option is enabled. LOCK A 1 SHFT 1 2 1 X 1 C 1 V 1 B N I M I r: -f Manuals Online! – ADDS Viewpoint Keyboard 2 look at the on the left side of the keyboard. The when used in conjunction with other also performs special functions. Holding key down and then pressing key will end a report that was requested by a command. Holding key down and then pressing key will acknowledge 2120 alarms and troubles if remote acknowledge enabled). Holding

a @Simplex Power Supplies Aid NOTES ON CHECKING POWER SUPPLY TROUBLES BMUX will report the following power supply trouble conditions for all 2120 power supplies: AC brownout (incoming AC level is less than 102V). Battery problems – Ground faults – A leakage to ground detected on either the + or – side of the supply. batteries; charger failure; unplugged battery harness; open in-line battery harness fuse. Earth Grounds are easy checks make that will help you isolate an earth ground. These checks apply to any 2120 power Under NORMAL operating conditions, a meter connected between ground and OV will read about 15 volts (12.5 for the BMUX supply). the 28VDC side of the supply were directly shorted to ground, a meter connected between ground and OV read about 28VDC (24VDC for the BMUX supply). the OV side of the supply were directly shorted to ground, a meter connected between ground and OV would OV. On the BMUX power supply, the nominal operating voltage is 24VDC. following chart illustrates ranges. LOCATION(s) OF GROUNDS for BMUX) 28V short to gnd 28V point; + supply wire; zone or signal wire. to 28V 28V leak to gnd + point. to 24V for BMUX) for BMUX) 0 to 15V 0 to 12.5V for BMUX) leak to gnd OV point; – supply wire; zone or signal wire. short to gnd supply wire; any OV point. readings taken between OV and ground. interconnection diagram for the BMUX power supply is shown in Figure 1. 1988SlmplexTlmeRecorderCo.,Gardner, 01441-0001 U.S.A. interconnection the BT/FABT/SCC power supply is shown in Figure 2. Power Supply 1 r, Power Supply 2 the BT/FABT/SCC power supply, several visual checks can immediately determine type of failure: Check to see if Kl has dropped out. If Kl is dropped, this can indicate either loss of AC or, on newer boards, of the 28VDC. (If transistor Q5 [located directly above pot R25] is present, then you have a newer Check to see if the yellow LED is ON. If the LED is on, then you have a ground fault. Kl picked and the LED is OFF, then you have a battery problem (low battery, open battery fuse, etc.). interconnection diagram for the ET power supply is shown in Figure 3. Power Supply 3 ET Power Supply and Converter ET power supply has TP4) which allow you to access supply trouble outputs. These points are normally high 5VDC) and go low (OV) if there a trouble. The are shown in the illustration at right. points test points indicate trouble as follows: a battery trouble when its voltage is OV. TPl TP2 indicates a signal power trouble when its voltage is OV. TP3 indicates a ground fault when its voltage is OV. TP4 indicates an AC brown out when its voltage is OV. TP5 is the 28VDC reference. TP6 is the OV reference. LEFT-HAND OF POWER BOARD ET power converter performs functions: provides a convenient converts and distribution point for the internal electronics. 28VDC from the ET power supply to + 5V, + 12V, and – 12V needed by the ET. and Power Supplies a mixture of SCCs and transponders on the same power supply, the SCC will be used to transmit there supply connections will bypass transmission of fault messages so that a transponder can report faults instead.) SCC converter board PF TERM and the BMUX. (A jumper wire between messages SCC power converter board converts 30V. The test points

Bimplex Multiplex Editing Feature Instructions 1989 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice, Manuals Online! – COMMANDS DESCRIBED THIS PUBLICATION ALLOW YOU TO CHANGE CRITICAL POINT PARAMETERS. ONCE YOU HAVE CHANGED A POINT PARAMETERS, SMPL EQUATIONS CONTAINING THAT POINT MUST BE CHECKED AND ALTERED OR THE EQUATIONS MAY NOT OPERATE PROPERLY. BE CAREFUL WHEN THE RESIDENT EDITING COMMANDS. programming of this system can result in sig- damage controlled equipment. Read the in- carefully before programming or reprogram- the system. Manuals Online! – TO USE THIS PUBLICATION publication describes operating commands used in the 2120 Resident Editing software you have a thorough knowledge of the 2120 and SMPL programming before attempting commands. Be sure use Resident manual is divided into the following chapters: WHAT RESIDENT EDITING? RESIDENT EDITING COMMANDS STORING RESIDENT EDITING CHANGES USING THE 2120 CASSETTE TAPE UNIT APPENDIX A: NUMBER OF NAME/LABEL CHANGES ALLOWED of these chapters divided into subheadings covering specific topics. Comprehensive can help you quickly and easily locate topics of interest to you. below provides a cross-reference various by page number. Use it often – Resident Editing Introduction 2 General Definition System Requirements LOG ON . . .2 . 2 Valid Resident Editing Commands HELP…3 LABEL. NAME. SENSE. .3,4 .4,5 .6 . . Using SENSE with monitor points Using SENSE with ET control points. Using SENSE with analog pseudo points . . . 8, 9 7 . PRIORITY. SUPPRESS CLASS.. DEVICE .9,10 . . 10,ll 11,12 . . 12, 13 Resident Editing and the Cassette Tape Unit Storing Changes Loading Changes . . 14 the BMUX . 14,15 Number of NAME/LABEL Changes Allowed. . 16 Manuals Online! – RESIDENT EDITING? 2120 Resident Editing allows you to change the following system parameters at the 2120 site: names). Custom Symbolic point specifiers Point sensing. Point priority. Print suppression RS232C port assignments. system points. Resident Editing of all SMPL operating and Resident Editing commands. also includes a system-level HELP command which, when used, provides brief can use the 2120 cassette this aspect of Resident Editing later in this publication. unit to record all field changes (except for RS232C port assignments). We Requirements 2120 system must have at least two 96K PRAM boards (562-511) or six 32K PRAM boards (562-305) use the Resident Editing feature. Resident Editing is included with SMPL revision 5.0 or later. order You cannot 32K and 96K PRAM boards. to use the SMPL password: Resident Editing commands use of the system SMPL password. There are now two You can use the /PA qualifier after each Resident Editing command. The system will then prompt you for as it has always done with SMPL commands. Throughout publication, included with the Resident Editing command examples used. password, You can use the following command remove password protection all protected SMPL and Editing commands: system will then prompt you for the SMPL password. Notice that you only have to use the password you LOG ON. Once you LOG ON, the SMPL password When you finish changes, you would enter: no longer return the system you have entered no commands the password-p

SlSimplex Multiplex Software Feature Instructions7 1997 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – A Manuals Online! – of Contents Started with SMPL ……………………………………………………………… Status Commands Operating Commands 2120 Priority System ………………………………………………. SETCommand of the SET Command with Monitor Points ……………………………….. of the SET Command with Control Points. ……………………………….. of the SET Command with Pseudo Points Alarm, and Trouble Messages …………………………………………………. or System Trouble Messages ………………………………………. Line Trouble Messages. ……………………………………. Trouble Messages. ………………………………………….. Point Trouble Message ………………………………………….. Control Point Trouble Message ………………………………….. 1 2 3 1 1 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – Software Feature publication provides operating instructions for 2 120 Multiplex Systems with the SMPL operating/programming Before attempting to and SMPL-equipped 2120, read the material found on pages 1 through 6 in BMUX Customer Operating Instructions (Part No. 575-543). This information general operating procedures for the 2 120 BMUX. stands for Simplex Multi-Programming Language. This new operating and language provides greatly enhance features over the previous programming. is truly simple to use. Very little memorization is required – most of the are expressed in plain English. Many of the commands are set up in a way that a single command can be used to obtain a wide variety of about the system. So . . . once you have become familiar with the way works, you should have no difficulty using it. Manuals Online! –

TABLE Ill Commands IV Commands = VALID CLOSED MODE (EQUATION MODE) = VALID OPEN MODE (LINE MODE) Multiplex SMPL Commands Card VALID LOGIC ELEMENTS NUMERIC POINT SPECIFIER (101-101) SYMBOLIC POINT SPECIFIER (ROOM31) POINT CONDITION SPECIFIER (TBL) ANALOG COMPARATOR RECALL LOGICAL INVERSE (NOT) DETECT (LEADING EDGE) VALID /Atf OPERATORS OR (PARALLEL WITH ALL PREVIOUS AND (SERIES WITHALL PREVIOUS SAVE (ALLOWS YOU TO START A NEW LADDER) SPULSE (NO MIN -SETS MAX ON TIME) CYCLE (1 :OO:OO, 1 :OO:OO – ON/OFF TIME) DELAY (1 :OO:OO) COUNT (COUNT3 RST:lOl-101) VALID UUTfUTACTlON SET (EVERY POLLING CYCLE) TRACK (FOLLOWS THE INPUT) HOLD (DIFFERENT EQUATION TO TURN POINT OFF) ANALOG HOLD (SET TO A VALUE) HPULSE (MIN = MAX = ON TIME) BYPASS (FOLLOWS THE INPUT) more information, refer to Publication MUX2-41-001. HELP STATUS 3. WHERE USED SYSTEMCOMMAND 5. FIND 6. QUIT 7. TOP 6. BOTTOM 9. LIST NEXT DELETE JUMP FILE OPEN 17. CLOSE CHANGE more information, refer to Publication MUX2-41-001. 8 87 Recorder co . Srnplex Plaza . Gardner MallaChYYIk 0,141.ml us A 1dWS DNlllCl3 AtlvwwnS Awan0t-i Aep!)OH paleledes) UI lueJ6oJd U! Al)UOJJrl3 UIeJ6OJdl,-J~S 301 SfIlWlS ws ws ONllVUdO eiqel ees)ewoi wi swl )u!od A~P!Io~ tts!tqem 3Hl ONlLElS 3Hl ONlLl3S 101-101 sla lU!Od 3!lOCjWAS JO D!JOWIlN -, 13s SSVdM JOQUOW 3!J&IJnN 3lOqWAS sisg aql u! SJa!j!3adS w!od 3!loqwk 11s sls!l 3!lOqwAS u! s~upd qo!q~ weI& SiS!l l!lOqwAS efteeq SlU!O,, JOl!UOW We&Sk SlS!-, WslSks St,, U! SlU!Od cyoqwr(s eql u! slu!od w!od 3!lOqwb sis!l q3!qm AIIU~JJIIO aql U! S,U!Od 0p 301,. sB ewes SlS!l q3!q1 JOl!UOW pOlqeS!p w!od 3!lcqwk 11~ sc!l 1 SKI ml ewes SIS!l SlS!l lOJlUO!3 PslqsS!P AI~u~JJ eJe iaql slu!od 11s SIS!~ UO!S!bsJ sJSMl,OS lUeJJ e,,i [email protected], e Bu!uJamoD uo!letuJo,u! Ile s)sy 3!lOqwl(S JO 3!Jaw S! ..]u!od..) NOW NO3 lSl1 lSl1 VNV lSl1 VNV lSl1 lSl1 191 SlS!, WHVlV) J!eql PUS SlU!O., JOl!UOW JO SlqnOJl J! PUS SlU!Od JOl!UOW IIs SIS!l klV313) UC UO!l!pUOS J!sql PUS SlU!Od lOJ]UOC, Il.2 SlS!l S,S!, SlqnOJl J!e,,, p S, ~0 tmi3) uo!~ sls!l Jo NO) slu!Od OPnssd SlS!l j0 JO NO) SlU!Od OpnsSd 6OlsUs isn,, se auw 1Sl-L ssau=S uo!~e3!unrukuo3 eqi 10 snle8s eqi SIS!~

firealarmresources.com

2120 Multiplex Software Feature Guide 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specificallow. other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice 1 94 and can used cause has been a Class A computing accordance com- designed of Part 15 of FCC Rules. which equipment not communications. with Subpart a commercial a residential user at his own expense measures may be required correct cause be slgnlficanl programming system reprogrammlng controlled Valid Open (Line) Mode Editing Commands .36 .36 Help. . .34 Status.. Where Used. . .34 System Command.. Close.. QUIT.. Top of equation. Bottom of equation. List. Next…37 Previous. Delete. Change.. Find…40 .38 . .38 .37 Cross-Reference Topic Valid Logic Elements .4 Numeric Point Specifier. Symbolic Point Specifier. Point Condition Specifier. Analog Comparator. Recall . . .6 Logical Inverse (NOT). Detect. .7 .6 Valid INPUT Condition Operators OR…8 AND.. SAVE…10,59 SPULSE…ll CYCLE…12 DELAY.. COUNT…13 Valid OUTPUT Action Operators SET…16 TRACK…17 HOLD…18 Analog HOLD. HPULSE…lS BYPASS. PRINT. .20 Valid Closed Mode Editing Com- .26 HELP. Status. System Command. FILE.. QUIT. Top of Program Block. Bottom of Program Block. List. . .28 Next. Previous. Delete. Jump…33 Find…33 Open…33 .30 commands, 34 (;a), 33,34 8-l 0 action operators, 16-21 statements 2,15 Wh mode, 30 mode, 37 condition specifier, 4,5 46 21 program blocks, 22 Points, 52-54 56,57 mode, 28 mode, 35 program blocks, 22 6,10,56,60 27 10,56,59 16,17,55,56 editor, 22-40 equations, 2,22,23-25 11 start-up routines, 53 command, 27 point specifier, 4, 15 mode, 28 mode, 36 57,58 17,18,55,56 27 Alphabetical priority systems, 15,16 program structure, 22,23 comparator, 5 8-10 mode, 28 mode, 36 20,55,56 39,40 (;Q), 34,35 mode editing commands, 26-34 13 12 51,52 mode, 30,31 mode, 38 12,13 7,43 buffer, 23 operating modes, mode, 26 mode, 26,34 pointer, 24 buffer, 23 (PID) mode, 33 mode, 40 25,26 18 analog, 18,19 19,20 mode, 31,32 mode, 38,39 closed mode, 26 open mode, 34 condition operators, 8-14 statements, 2,4 mode, 24,25 (N/;Q), 33 mode, 28,29 mode, 36,37 logic, 3 elements, 4-7 dual operation, 20 W), mode, 29 mode, 37 tracking, 20 (logical inverse), 6 point specifier, 4, 15 TO USE THIS GUIDE

—– 4 SSimplex G ~987ShPbX~m%twckeCo.. Mass.01441.0001 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS Troubleshooting or Intermittent Troubles Code Outline Outline Outline Outline of the 2120 Diagnostic Program Definitions Flowchart Flowchart Flowchart 1 of 2) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2 of 2) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 1 of 2) ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2 of 2) ………………………………………………………………………………………………. Flowchart HAZARD seniclng Simplex Ropmssntatlves. mpaln. pwfannod qusli- sfgnlflcsnt system controllsd Manuals Online! – Outlines Flowcharts publication designed as a troubleshooting in locating 2120 Multiplex System malfunctions. the information to isolate most faults to a board level. this publication, a troubleshooter with a good background 2120 Multiplex Systems will be publication divided two major sections: outlines provide details on tests and checks Multiplex System, read through these outlines to gain a better understanding of troubleshooting procedures. the flowcharts may ask you to perform. Before you service a are four separate as shown below: basic flowchart to the end of the basic flowchart without being directed is a trouble in the system, a te

S$implex Multiplex Channel Communications Information i987~i~Pl~XTl~OR~rderCo.,G~dner. 014414001 Manuals Online! – l-003 electrical power when making any internal servicing be pettormed by qualifted Simplex Representa- system, disconnect removing power FIRST and AC power When connecting to this system. connect AC power FIRST and Manuals Online! – TO USE THIS PUBLICATION publication Typical equipment configurations are illustrated, as are specific equipment. on 2120 Multiplex systems equipped with 2001 voice communications 2120 and manual divided into the following sections: MAIN EQUIPMENT REMOTE EQUIPMENT CLASS A AUDIO of these sections divided into subheadings covering specific topics. This manual intended those who already have a solid background 2120 Multiplex systems 2120 and 2001 voice communications 2001 Voice Communications materials basic information. Refer MORE DETAILED to the documents below. Voice Communications Wiring Diagrams Systems Troubleshooting Guide Voice Communications Module Descriptions with Voice Communications Multiplex System cabinet drawings 20 and M-2120~ET initiating wiring diagrams drawings manual the specific installation the specific installation W.D. No. 801-529 use 2001 voice communications equipment are configured differently Multiplex systems Since 2120 systems equipped with voice communications to lose the multiplex advantage in the building or complex a special approach because we want voice communications. their 2001 of applications, a 2120 system set up – we don shown major difference 2120 use what we call an audio riser. An audio riser is typically a single wire pair that carries an amplified signal to transponder cabinets where the audio signal is applied to FABT or ET speaker circuits (via audio boards). As you can see in the block diagram, most FABT or ET cabinets contain audio relay boards contain an audio interface transformer and a remote amplifier. Figure 1. Since we must provide audio signals each building BMUX equipment cabinet contains The SCC cabinet, usually close-nippled preamp boosts The equipment the BMUX cabinet original audio signal so that the signal can make it to its destinations without voice communication equipment originate system audio the BMUX cabinet, contains what we call the power preamp. of the SCC cabinet via a harness equipment connected BMUX local BT is used to monitor and control both BMUX and SCC audio equipment conditions. Manuals Online! – look at the various components of a 2120 voice communications starts – at the beginning of the audio riser. We start where the original audio publication we will use 2001 product you make easier cross-reference voice voice RISER IN REU EACH INDIVIDUAL EACH lNDlVlD RELAV TRANBPoNDENB

Listed; FM and Approved* II Communicating Devices Zone Adapter Modules (ZAMs) Interface to Conventional Circuits MAPNET II ZAMs provide an addressable interface conventional fire alarm zone circuit devices** Initiating devices (Monitor ZAM) Notification appliance circuits (Signal ZAM) Control relays (Control ZAM) ZAMs are compatible with the following fire alarm control panels when equipped MAPNET II communications: 4100/4100U Series fire alarm control panels 4100 Series Universal Transponders 4120 Series Network node fire alarm control panels 4020 Series fire alarm control panels 2120 Communicating Device Transponders II communications can be wired: NFPA Style 4/Class B or Style 6/Class A Style 4/Class B communications may be wired tapped or In/Out DIP switch address selection listed to Standard 864 MAPNET II zone adapter modules (ZAMs) provide addressable interface between conventional zone and the host fire alarm control panel. ZAMs provide status monitoring and of an initiating device circuit (IDC) zone and used for circuits with non-addressable detectors and other contact closures such as waterflow and tamper or non-addressable manual stations. Different of Monitor ZAMs are available for two-wire IDCs B, or Class A, and for four-wire IDCs with Class B input. Each type required a separate 24 VDC input from a listed fire alarm power supply. ZAMs supervise and operate 24 VDC notification speakers, and telephone circuits. Output is up to 2 A @ 24 VDC, or 50 W of 25 VRMS or up to three simultaneously activated phones. The signal ZAM is available for either Y/Class B or Style Z/Class A operation for appliance circuits. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. This product not ULC listed or approved by MEA (NYC) as of document revision date. Additional may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. ZAM ZAM (Continued) Control ZAMs provide addressable control functions as elevator capture, HVAC control, pressurization control, and damper control. The control relay a DPDT contact (contact ratings are shown on 4). Specifications Information Connections Means Range Range by MAPNET II, to 40 VDC with data 24 VDC required from listed alarm power supply to reference diagrams on 3 and 4 terminals for in/out wiring, to 12 AWG wire switch, 8 position F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) for indoor operation to 85% RH

WARNING HAZARD present printer power ON. Static electricity not touch contacts printer circuit boards. damage components. 2190-9038 Remote Printer a hard copy of 2120 Multiplex, 4100+ Systems (BCS), status reports. Nurse Call, and LX-81 0) Building DIP Switches/Jumpers COMPLIANCE certified comply with pursuant Subpart limits of equipment Class 6 computing 15 of the FCC rules. For Steps 1 through see Figure 1. connected, disconnect printer surge suppressed outlet adapter (A) from AC outlet. The printer checks and new DIP switch settings only when the printer is powered up. Surge suppressed outlet adapter is an Electricord XP, Cat. No. A-1491 -l/C-AS. At the right side of the printer, set switches on SW1 and SW2 as follows: or 5100 or 5100 Characters Zero Characters Short Tear-Off Quality in. Page Length Cut Sheet Mode Skip-over Perforation Return Only Characters If printer is printing on paper perforation, set SW2-3 the ON position. To check DIP switch settings at power-up, hold down the DRAFT/LINE FEED button when turning the switch to the ON position; then release the DRAFT/LINE FEED button. Printer responds with g of the current DIPswitch settings. connected, disconnect RS-232C connector with internal MOV suppression (B) or the male DB25 connector shown) from printer serial connector (C). 1 2120 BMUX, MASTER CARD 1994 Simplex speciticetions Recorder Co. other were current aS of publication, are subject change without notice. Remove the following printer parts if installed: front lid (D); push feed tractor (E) and its cover (F); paper guide paper feed knob (H); and cut sheet feeder (not shown). See Figure 2. Remove push feed tractor !E) by pressing in the tabs on both sides using a screwdriver. See Figure 3. 2 As shown in Figure 4, release the printer upper case (J).from its bottom case (K) using a thin flatblade Insert the screwdriver into each of the two holes in the front of the printer – one hole at a time. inside each hole, gently twist and simultaneously push up the screwdriver until the upper case is from the bottom case. SEE STEP 6 BEFORE PULLING THE PRINTER UPPER CASE AWAY BOlTOM CASE. FROM 4 As shown in Figure 5, slightly raise the upper case (J) from the front of the printer. Be careful not to pull the cable (L) out from the upper case. Disconnect the other end of the flat cable from Connector CN3. Remove the printer upper case (J). See Figure 5. 5 For Steps 8 and 9, see Figure 6. Set SW1 switches on Serial Interface Board #8143 as follows: or 5100 oo+ Baud Rate Data Word Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity * Parity Check Baud Rate Interface Valid OFF position = Odd Parity; ON position = Even parity OFF position = Parity Check Disabled; ON position = Parity Check Enabled SW1 -1, l-3, & 1-4-OFF, l -7-ON = 1200 baud for 2120, or 4100+, or 5100; SW1 -1 -ON, l-3, l-4, & l -7-OFF = baud for 5001 Off position for attachment to 2120 Command Center For the 2120 Multiplex, 4100+ Fire Alarm, 5001 Nurse call, or 5100 BCS printer

Cautions and Warnings Remote Printer Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. 2190-9039 Remote Printer (Syntest SP-700) provides a hard copy of 4010, 4100+, and 4120 Fire Alarm status reports. Connect the printer to the fire systems by using the information below. This Publication following topics are covered in this publication: Page # Settings Connection Connection Front Panel Programming for an Printer Port Information 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. B Settings Settings switches SW1 and SW2 according to Figure 1. (Access the switches by two plastic plugs on the printer bottom cover.) Rate Bits Default Panel Values Shown 1. Switch Settings Connection Connection to wiring diagram 841-731 for interconnection wiring information. 24 VDC printer power is supplied from either the (Master) Power Board or the Expansion Power Module located within the 4100 Fire Alarm Power is channeled to the printer via a two-wire adapter/plug (supplied printer) inserted into a five-pin DIN connector (Figure 2). The two wires are connected to system 24 V power using cable with the requirements: Use # 14 AWG wire if distance is less than 395 ft. Use # 12 AWG wire if distance is greater than 395 ft. but less than 625 ft. – Black Wire to 0 V (Pin 5) VDC – Red Wire to +24 VDC (Pin 4) 2. Power Connector Connection Connection RS-232 harness to either Port 1 (via TB1 or P3) or Port 2 (via TB2 or as indicated in Figure 3. Wiring (pin numbering) is shown in wiring diagram Observe harness tag for proper harness number. 3. RS-232 Terminal Connections on next page Connection, Continued Connection to Figure 4 below to wire the 2190-9039 Remote Printer to the RS-232 of a 4100 Panel. 5 7 the proper harness is to the printer and Card. 4. Wiring the Printer to a 4100 RS-232 Card to Figures 5 and 6 below to wire the 2190-9039 Remote Printer to a 4010 4020 Fire Alarm Control Panel. the proper harness is connected to the printer and Card. to the Front Panel Programming for an Printer Port section of this document if you are the printer to a 4010 FACP. or 8 or 9 or 10 RS232 CARD USED) PRINTER PRINTER 5. Wiring the Printer to a 4010 RS-232 Card 6. Wiring the Printer to a 4020 RS-232 Card Front Panel Programming for an RS-232 Port an RS-232 Card section describes programmin

UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Model 2190-9173, 2-Point I/O Module Supervised Input and Control Relay Output II Communicating Devices II addressable module providing a input and a control relay output in one package**: Low power latching relay design allows MAPNET II to supply both data and module power Module uses two sequential addressable points with designation requiring only one address selection For use with Simplex fire alarm control panels that MAPNET II addressable communications UL listed to Standard 864 input point: Monitors status of normally open, dry contacts for normal, open, and contact closure Operation reports to the MAPNET II channel as a supervised Individual Addressable (IAM) control relay: Power limited rating: 2 A @ 30 VDC, resistive; A @ 30 VDC, inductive Non-Power limited rating: 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, 1/4 A @ 120 VAC, inductive Operation reports to the MAPNET II channel as a Zone Adapter Module (ZAM) sealed construction: Enclosed design minimizes dust infiltration Mounts in standard 4 square electrical box I/O Module. The 2190-9173, 2-Point I/O allows a Simplex MAPNET II communication to monitor an input contact closure and control an relay from a single compact module. Module is supplied from the MAPNET II communications eliminating the need for separate power wiring. Operation. The input and output are and operation is controlled by the host panel selection. Points may be directly associated each other such as monitoring the status of the function by the contacts, or may be programmed for operation. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this It is subject to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for City of New York Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products + – TIME RECORDER CO. POINT I/O INSTR. 574-995 _ _ – _ _ _ 2-Point I/O Module approximately 1/2 size) Applications Package. For smoke control applications, this provides an efficient package for fan damper with feedback. The monitor point connects to a position indicator switch allowing the host panel to the fan damper status with respect to the requested control operation. Applications. The monitor and control points be applied for a variety of associated or independent Flexible programming abilities at the host can provide the association logic required for a variety of fire or utility operations. and by MAPNET II, two addresses required per module Information to diagram on page 2 Assignment Addresses Required) Connections address setting selects an even address for the input point and next sequential (odd) number is automatically assigned to the point terminals for in/out wiring, to 12 AWG wire (0.82 to 3.31 mm2 ) H x 4-1/8 W x 1-3/8 D mm x 105 mm x 35 mm) Material thermoplastic Plate Material metal, galvanized Range F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) for indoor operation Range to 93% RH at 100 F (38 C) MAPNET II addressable communications are protected by U.S. Patent No. 1/2006 Wiring Reference Distance to Monitored Contacts: For internal wiring run, no overvoltage protector, 500 ft (152m). For wiring external to buildin

and Warnings 2-Point I/O Module Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled components wrapped in anti-static material at all times. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference when operated in a commercial Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take measures may be required to correct the interference. the information in this publication to install the 2190-9173, 2-Point I/O This Publication following topics are covered in this publication. Page # the Address Connections or following an eight-digit Product ID number denotes ULC Listed product. 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. II Communication Net is protected by U.S. Patent 4,796,025. C Characteristics 2190-9173, 2-Point I/O Module has the following characteristics: Connects to the 4100, 4120, or 4020 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) via MAPNET II channel Provides the host panel output control of one Form C unsupervised contact Provides the host panel with a Supervised IAM (Individual Addressable input status monitoring of dry contact devices The relay output field wiring is unsupervised The relay powers up in the normal state (Normally Open contacts are OPEN) The input circuit monitors dry contacts only The input monitors the zone and provides 3-state status of OPEN, and SHORT This device uses two addresses on the MAPNET II channel The module consumes two device loads of power + – + – 1 TIME RECORDER CO. POINT I/O INSTR. REV. Switch Re-sealable 1. 2190-9173, 2-Point I/O Module the Address the I/O Module FACP II Channel) I/O Module has a unique address. The address of the module is set via an DIP switch. DIP switch Position 1 is the Least Significant Bit and Position 8 is the Most Significant Bit (MSB). Set the module using Figure 2 as reference. Use a small screwdriver to set the switches. device address for the I/O Module should be written on the re-sealable this information provides an aid in troubleshooting the system. A DIP switch in Position 1 is while a DIP switch in Position The MAPNET II channel (4100, 4120, or 4020 FACP) supports Address 1 through 127. The Even address is taken by the Supervised IAM and the Odd address is by the Control IAM* (i.e. If the address is set for 100, the Supervised uses address 100 and the Control IAM uses address 101.) The point type for a Control IAM must be configured as a Control (Zone Adapter Module). THRU 4 SWITCHES 5

firealarmresources.com 2005 Tyco Safety Products Westminster. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. Safety Products Westminster Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA 9/2005

Time Control Products and Special Order Features Dials and Hands Series 12 Square Clocks Five Optional Standard Dial Styles Three Optional Standard Hand Styles Special Order Dials and Hands 15 Round Clocks Three Optional Standard Dial Styles Two Optional Standard Hand Styles Special Order Dials and Hands model Simplex wall clocks satisfy the most system or non-system For applications with specific architectural Simplex wall clocks are available with a variety optional standard and special order dial and hand 2310 series clock cases are optionally or polished chrome. Cases may also be match specific color samples upon special beige, brown, matte white, dark grey, satin STANDARD HANDS O-3001 STANDARD DIALS O-4001 O-4002 O-4003 SQUARE ONLY O-3003 O-4027 SQUARE ONLY o-3o1 2 SQUARE ONLY) 1993 Simbx Recorder Co. S2310-0005-5 ORDER DIALS: 10 3 5 HOUR ROUND ONLY) 5 ROUND ONLY) Some combinations of dials and hands are not compatible. Building Systems DETECTION SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS TIME CONTROL Massachusetts and Representatives Throughout Time Recorder Co. U.S.A. World specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. U.S.A.

firealarmresources.com

Multi-Application Peripherals and Accessories Series, 24 Point Serial LED Annunciators Listed LED annunciator for use with the Simplex 4010 alarm control panel is transmitted over one twisted, pair 24 Red/Yellow LEDs, jumper selectable Long life LEDs Low current consumption Supervised from Simplex 4010 control panel Lamp test Surface mount on standard electrical box 18 gauge steel casing Simplex 4616 series serial LED annunciators are for use with the Simplex 4010 series fire control panel. Initiating circuit alarm and information is transmitted to the annunciator one twisted, shielded pair. zone information (i.e., Zone 1, Zone 2) is on labels. Specific zone may be typed on the reverse side (i.e. wing, first floor) of the label. 4616 series annunciators come standard with 24 of annunciation, a On LED, a Trouble LED and a Test feature. A and a piezo silence are available as options. various configurations are listed on the back. 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 TROUBLE SYST ON MARCHE Serial LED Annunciator models scrip tion Point Annunciator Point An nun ci a tor with Piezo Point An nun ci a tor with Piezo and Si – Series LED Annunciator Specifications eral Spec i fi ca tions op er at ing rent mA VDC, sys tem supplied current current per a ture Range mid ity Range mA (all LEDs) mA ex ter nal an nun ci a tor com mu ni – tions line from 4010 FACP F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) to 90% RH, non-con dens ing, 90 F (32 C) 1/4 H x 7 1/4 W x 1 3/8 D mm x 185 mm x 35 mm) ing In for ma tion face mount on a stan dard sin gle gang elec tri cal box or front of 4010 fire alarm con trol panel 2000 Sim plex In ter na tional Time Equip ment Co. Ltd. 08/01 Reference ALARM AUT I O N O W E R SYSTEM IS NORMAL** 8-Mar-99 C K C K K 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel On LED tem Trou ble LED Information A lo cal piezo si lence switch is avail able as an op tion. 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 TROUBLE SYST ON MARCHE Series LED Annunciator One #18 AWG twisted shielded pair Two #18-12 AWG – Power One #18 AWG as needed – See below Refer to Field Wiring Specifications for distance limitations. Maximum distance determined by 4602 Field Wiring Specifications. wired trolled trolled trolled by tem Trou ble LED 3/8 mm) 1/4 (185 mm) 1/4 mm) Gang Box 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 13 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 TROUBLE SYST ON MARCHE View View 08/01 Skymark Av e nue, Mississauga, On tario L4W 5K5 us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and ot

:

Bimplex Network Network Display Unit (NDU) 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. -002 (574-307) 1 93 FSB-432R Service Bulletin 3,1993 4020/4100+/4120/UT – Modified Operator Interface Panel Replaces FSB-432 May 11, 1993. Revised sections of the FSB are not shaded because FSB was rewritten. modified Operator Panel. Panels now have hardware and software made on the panel for the PRIORITY 2 LED which will be activated shortly. The figure below ALARM SILENCED LED. In addition, supports TO OPEN DOOR NORMAL 20 MAY 93 OPERATING OR TROUBLE CONDITION SYSTEM INDICATOR FLASHING. TONE ON ACKNOWLEDGE: PRESS =ACK LOCATED UNDER FLASHING REPEAT ORERATION UNTIL ALL REPORTS ARE SILENCE ALARM SIGNAL PRESS SILENCE RESTORE SYSTEM TO NORMAL PRESS RESET PRESS SILENCE TONE DEVICE to Silence Alarm Signals ALARM SILENCE key silences lights the ALARM SILENCED LED. Evacuation Tone/Message silence alarm evacuation press the Operator Panel ALARM SILEN key. Panel Hardware and Software table below the hardware and software the modified panel. Controller 565-l 48 565-209 Note 3 Notes 2 and 4 6.02 Note 1 565-l 73 Replaces 635-775 636-394 Replaces 635-775 553-612 5.03 6.02 553-612 5.03 Board Software The PRIORITY 2 ALARM LED is for future use and is not functional with System Software Version 6.02. The 565-331 Display Board, Revision Bi, Header Plug P7 on the 565-333 Master Controller have Pins 2 and 3 jumpered provide 12 Volts to the LCD. System Software Version 6.02 downwards with all earlier of the Master Controller The 565331 Display Board can only be used with the 565-333 Master Controller Board. OF CONTENTS 1 – SYSTEM OVERVIEW Networking Network Display Unit (4120-8801) NDU with Status Command Center (4120-8821) Operating Description In Procedure Out Procedure Abnormal Conditions 2 – ALARM CONDITIONS Acknowledge Panel Operation During Alarm Conditions

2500 NETWORK DISPLAY UNIT (NDU) OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOWING ALARM/SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU COMES FIRST. you know what during a fire depend Be do. SYSTEMS WITH INDIVIDUAL ACKNOWLEDGE LED IS FLASHING AND TONE-ALERT PULSING LED IS FLASHING AND TONE-ALERT ON STEADY NUMERIC ALARM S TROUBLE SILENCE0 ON Unlock and open the panel door. Read the display. It will show number of alarm conditions. 1 0 review. 0 Press the (ALARM ACK) key under the flashing red LED. Read alphanumeric display. The tone-alert momentarily silenced and the display will pertinent report information, such as shown below. FLOOR EAST WING STATION Press (ALARM ACK) key. Read report data. Repeat this When all alarms are acknowledged, acknowledge additional alarms. tone-alert silenced alarm LED turns ON steady. TO SILENCE THE SIGNALS Press the (ALARM SILENCE) key and read the display. The display will show signal status. ALARM SILENCED LED turns ON steady. SILENCE PROGRESS TO RESET THE SYSTEM When the alarm condition has been cleared, restore or replace affected devices (pull stations, smoke detectors, etc.) in with the instructions provided with each device. Press the (SYSTEM RESET) key. After a delay, the alarm LED flash, and the tone-alert will again sound pulsing. Press the (ALARM ACK) key under the flashing red LED. The display will show the system status. Press the (ALARM ACK) key. Repeat to acknowledge additional After a delay, the system will show the following: NORMAL 27 MAY 93 i 0 i 0 (ACK, to re point*. i 1 PRlORlTY2 SYSTEH SYSTEM UARM POWER ALARM S TROUBL SlLENCW ON (FLASHING) A Trouble Condition Condition described handled in a similar manner. example. A Unlock and open panel door. The alphanumeric display will the number of abnormal conditions. = 0 0 review. 1 Press the (ACK) key under the flashing yellow LED. Read and instructions on the alphanumeric display. The display the area and type of problem, as shown below. The tone-alert will silence momentarily, resound. FLOOR EAST WING MONITOR ZONE CKT TROUBLE Press the (ACK) key under the flashing LED again to review the status. Read the alphanumeric display; then, The alphanumeric display will show the area and type of problem to determine cause. The tone-alert silenced and the LED turns ON steady. If a Trouble Condition, or replace the defective device wire, notification appliance, etc.) in accordance with instructions. When abnormal yellow LED flash and the tone-alert will sound steady. Press the (ACK) key under the flashing yellow LED. The display will show the system status. Press the (ACK) key under the yellow LED again. After a delay, the alphanumeric display should show the NORMAL 27 MAY 93 case of trouble, notify: # ARE INTENDED TO BE FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE PANEL FOR READY REFER

Wimplex TO OPERATE MIKE TO OPERATE MICROPHONE To make an announcement with mike: AREA IN ALARM: Gq to step 2. ALL AREAS: Flip up ALL TALK switch. SPEClFlC AREAS: Flip up all Speaker Select Switches. Remove mike from enclosure and press Talk Switch. Turns off any active tone or message. Wait for Talk LED to go on. Make appropriate announcement. Releasing Mike Talk Switch restarts or message if alarm exists. With NO ALARM, when finished, flip ALL SPEAKERS TALK switch all activated Speaker Select Then replace the mike. TO INITIATE AN EVACUATION TO EVACUATE ALL AREAS: Flip up SPEAKERS EVAC switch. EVACUATESfEC/F/CAREAS:Flip all desired Speaker Select Switches; flip up SELECTIVE EVAC switch. To make an announcement over mike, HOW TO OPERATE shown When finished, flip down ALL EVAC switch. TO SILENCE ALARM SIGNALS ALARM SILENCE key silences and lights the SILENCED LED. To silence alarm evacuation signals, NDU Panel ALARM SILENCE TO USE LOCAL SPEAKER active tone/message on panel Flip up LOCAL SPEAKER switch. When finished, flip down LOCAL switch. TO ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS FOR A 2500 NDU COMMAND CENTER CHANNEL AUDIO) SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST! practices. Be sure you khow what to do. during a fire depend upon NDU WlTH CO SELECTIVE TO OPERATE PHONE OPERATION When remote phone is plugged in or handset is lifted: Ring signal is heard on remote hand- Phone LED flashes at panel. Tone sounds at panel. Pick up master phone. To connect phone, flip up Phone Select next to flashing LED. Handset ring signal goes off. Flashing LED turns on steady. Panel tone is turned off. Use master phone as required. Repeat steps 3 and 4 if another remote is lifted or phone is plugged silence the tone without connecting remote phone, flip up PHONE SILENCE switch. When finished, hang up master phone flip down Phone Select Switches. Remote phone must be unplugged or handset replaced. (If remote is off hook more than 10 panel tone re-sounds and flashes.) YOUR SYSTEM SWITCH CONFIGU- DOES NOT MATCH THIS CONSULT SIMPLEX FOR OPERATIONS. SIMPLEX IN THE YELLOW PAGES. CASE OF TROUBLE, NOTIFY: PHoNE 4 1 —V–J-+ SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SWITCH OPERATION) SELECT UP DOWN CENTER NO.: INSTRUCTIONS ARE INTENDED TO BE FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE CONTROL PANEL FOR READY REFERENCE Operator Instruction Manual for detailed operation Simplex nme Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, and are subject change without notice. Ed 6 93

firealarmresources.com

Access Control Systems Accessories Sensor 12 to 24 VACNDC Operation Single or Double Door Applications Wall or Ceiling Mount Adjustable Pattern 0.25 to 60 Second Adjustable Latch Time Walk Test/Activation LED Two Form-C Relay Output Contacts Wide Temperature Range Two Color Choices Available 2750-9813 is a Passive Infrared Sensor designed Hands-Free egress from a secured area. It is to detect the change in temperature caused a target of a different temperature from a stable passes through its coverage pattern. sensor can be wall or ceiling mounted. its wide pattern (24 feet max.), the 2750-9813 is suited for double door applications. Simple (kit supplied) can reduce the pattern for single applications. sensor has a mode selectable WalkTestiActivation indicator. If position-A is selected, the relay will de- upon detection and the LED will light. If is selected, the relay will energize upon and the LED will extinguish. alarm output consists of two Form-C sets of which may be adjusted to activate from 0.25 to seconds. Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 to 24 VACNDC Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26mA @ 12VDC Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Zone Activation Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fl4 Vertical Latch Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 to 60 Sec., Adjustable Series SENSORS Immunity . ..__.._.._……….._……….. Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Form-C, 1 A @ 30VDC Resistive Loads Sensitivity (*) ._…………. 30 Inch Step per Second Cross-Walk in the 26 to MHz Range Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2O to +12O to +49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50 x 6.25 x 1.5O x 15.8 x 3.8cm) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall or Ceiling/7 to 15 ft. Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Grey (2750-9813) (2750-9814) 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co. Coverage will be somewhat affected depending oh walk-rate and S2750-0003-l PATTERNS: PAlTERN WALL MOUNTED, ANGLED 14 DOWN Meten a1 7teet ON FLOOR ABOVE DOOR ANGLED 14 DOWN) specifications and other information shown ware current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. Massachusetts and Representatives U. S. A. World us on the World Wide Web 0 www.simDlexnet.com

firealarmresources.com

Time Control Products Control Accessories VAC Poker Qpplies Series (Type-4595) Listed Certified Fused 24VAC Power Supply 250 VA Output (2861-9021, Type 4595-l) 500 VA Output (2861-9022, Type 4595-2) Surface Mount, Surface Mount Cabinet 2861 series power supplies are used with the Master Clocks to control wired secondary windings are protected with an 8 fuse for the type 2861-9021, a 15 amp fuse for 2861-9022. and terminal strip. clocks and/or bells. The unit incorporates transformer, voltage 1998 Simplex Ttne Recorder Co. 50,160 Hz Voltage Voltage.. …………………………………………. Beige Finish ………………………………. Mounted Back box H: 8 WI 19, D: 6-l/2 Trim.. …………… H: 8-3/8 W 19-3/8 D: 6-112 Weight 20 pounds NOTE: Sync contacts of 6400 rated 3A max. sync contact of rated at 5A max. o—-.—— SIMPLEX CLOCK o——–1 AMPS (250) WAlT AMPS WATT MODEL NO. 1 288 250 kkdt 5OOWatt 8 kflD us on Representatives Worki World Wide Web Q wwwsimplexnet.com

Time Control Su Series Fused 24VAC Power Supply Surface Mount Includes Box and Trim Multi-Tapped Transformer Primary 2861 Series 24VAC power supplies are used with Master Clocks to provide voltage power to of the transformer are protected with an 8 amp for the 2861-9001, and a 15 amp fuse for the Clocks and/or Bells. Secondary Voltage.. volts, 60 Hz. Voltage Finish.. …………………………….. Beige Back Box H 8 W: 19 D: 6-l/2 Trim ………………… H: 8-3/8 W: 1 g-3/8 D: l/6 Weight.. 20 pounds AMPS AMPS WATT WATT NO. voty$E MODEL NO. 2861-9011 Vat Vat Vat Vat 250 Watt Watt Watt Watt 8Ama/ Amp Amp Amp 1 A 1993 Simplex Tfme Recorder Co. specifications, and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject lo change without notice. in U.S.A. Representatives World

Listed Peripherals Accessories Chimes, and Buzzers Series Modular Design Operating Current DC Operation Standard 4 (10.2 cm) Outlet Box Mounting High Output Level Simplex 2901 series bells are modular in design provide a loud penetrating sound output that is heard over most ambient noise levels. 2901 series bells are designed for installation on standard four inch square electrical box or two inch or non-gangable) switch box. guards, which cover the entire unit, are also for any bell size. The 826 yard hood is for outdoor use to mount a bell mechanism bell gong on a weatherproof box. It is designed allow a maximum amount of signal level to radiate the hood outwards, yet protect the audible from the elements. applications require a weatherproof box, Model BBX-4. (15.2 cm) Bell (25.4 cm) Bell CHART # VDC Voltage Pressure UL Rating Pressure Typical mA mA 28.8VDC VDC 28.8 VDC dB dB – 91 dB – 95 dB level measurements are made in accordance UL Standard 484. The sound power output is in a reverberant room qualified for pure under methods for the Determination of Sound Level of Small Sources in Reverberation ANSI S1, 21. Bell shall be capable of a sound output equivalent to that of an source with an A-weighted sound level of at least the level specified in the unit but not less than 75 decibels in any case. MEASUREMENT level in indoor installation may vary depending the bell spacing. 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 MECHANISM AND GONGS 1/32 ARE LOCATED TO TO A STANDARD SQUARE OUTLET BOX, 2 WIDE NON-GANGABLE BOX. 3/8 3/8 Square Holes INSTALLATION WIDE GANGABLE OR NON-GANGABLE BOX WASHER BOLT ONLY (FRONT VIEW) OBSERVE POLARITY SQUARE BOX by others) CARE SHOULD BE TO AVOID DAMAGE THE STRIKER MECHANISM. BOTH TERMINALS FOR BREAK WIRE TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PRECEDING OR CONTROL PANEL NEXT BELL OR RESISTOR 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Listed Peripherals Accessories Chimes, and Buzzers Series Modular Design Low Operating Current DC Operation Red Finish Standard 4 (10.2 cm) Outlet Box Mounting High Output Level heavy-duty vibrating bells are designed to a complete choice of mountings and design at a minimum cost. The operating for these bells is 24 VDC. bell consists of a mechanism and either a (15.2 cm) or 10 (25.4 cm) gong. Mounting for surface, flush, weatherproof and conduit mountings is available. bells are gasketed and are easily adapted to design by adding a cast backbox with conduit bosses on the top and bottom (1.2 cm) conduit entrance. guards, which cover the entire unit, are also for any bell size. The 826 yard hood is for outdoor use to mount a bell mechanism bell gong on a weatherproof box. It is designed allow a maximum amount of signal level to radiate the hood outwards, yet protect the audible from the elements. (15.2 cm) Bell (25.4 cm) Bell 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 MTG. MTG. SURFACE BELLS @ 10 DC Supervised w/Diode Vibrating Bell (15.25 cm) (25.4 cm) dB/97 dBA dB/104 dBA dB calculated from integrated sound pressure measurements at Underwriters Laboratories per UL #464 dBA measurements with conventional sound level meters are made in an anechoic chamber and indicate the typical output in an actual installation. WT. International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. MOUNTING DETAILS International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Listed Peripherals Accessories Chimes, and Buzzers Series Modular Design Low Operating Current DC Operation Red Finish Standard 4 (10.2 cm) Outlet Box Mounting High Output Level heavy-duty vibrating bells are designed to a complete choice of mountings and design at a minimum cost. The operating for these bells is 24 VDC. bell consists of a mechanism and either a (15.2 cm) or 10 (25.4 cm) gong. Mounting for surface, flush, weatherproof and conduit mountings is available. bells are gasketed and are easily adapted to design by adding a cast backbox with conduit bosses on the top and bottom (1.2 cm) conduit entrance. guards, which cover the entire unit, are also for any bell size. The 826 yard hood is for outdoor use to mount a bell mechanism bell gong on a weatherproof box. It is designed allow a maximum amount of signal level to radiate the hood outwards, yet protect the audible from the elements. (15.2 cm) Bell (25.4 cm) Bell 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 MTG. MTG. SURFACE BELLS @ 10 DC Supervised w/Diode Vibrating Bell (15.25 cm) (25.4 cm) dB/97 dBA dB/104 dBA dB calculated from integrated sound pressure measurements at Underwriters Laboratories per UL #464 dBA measurements with conventional sound level meters are made in an anechoic chamber and indicate the typical output in an actual installation. WT. International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. MOUNTING DETAILS International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Listed Peripherals Accessories Chimes, and Buzzers Series Modular Design Operating Current DC Operation Standard 4 (10.2 cm) Outlet Box Mounting High Output Level Simplex 2901 series bells are modular in design provide a loud penetrating sound output that is heard over most ambient noise levels. 2901 series bells are designed for installation on standard four inch square electrical box or two inch or non-gangable) switch box. guards, which cover the entire unit, are also for any bell size. The 826 yard hood is for outdoor use to mount a bell mechanism bell gong on a weatherproof box. It is designed allow a maximum amount of signal level to radiate the hood outwards, yet protect the audible from the elements. applications require a weatherproof box, Model BBX-4. (15.2 cm) Bell (25.4 cm) Bell CHART # VDC Voltage Pressure UL Rating Pressure Typical mA mA 28.8VDC VDC 28.8 VDC dB dB – 91 dB – 95 dB level measurements are made in accordance UL Standard 484. The sound power output is in a reverberant room qualified for pure under methods for the Determination of Sound Level of Small Sources in Reverberation ANSI S1, 21. Bell shall be capable of a sound output equivalent to that of an source with an A-weighted sound level of at least the level specified in the unit but not less than 75 decibels in any case. MEASUREMENT level in indoor installation may vary depending the bell spacing. 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 MECHANISM AND GONGS 1/32 ARE LOCATED TO TO A STANDARD SQUARE OUTLET BOX, 2 WIDE NON-GANGABLE BOX. 3/8 3/8 Square Holes INSTALLATION WIDE GANGABLE OR NON-GANGABLE BOX WASHER BOLT ONLY (FRONT VIEW) OBSERVE POLARITY SQUARE BOX by others) CARE SHOULD BE TO AVOID DAMAGE THE STRIKER MECHANISM. BOTH TERMINALS FOR BREAK WIRE TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PRECEDING OR CONTROL PANEL NEXT BELL OR RESISTOR 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

Listed* Peripherals Audible Notification Appliances, Grill Speakers for Canadian Fire Alarm Applications 2902 Series Speaker diameter grill shown) 2902 Series Speaker grill shown) design detail summary: Separate models are available with 4-1/2 or 8″ and with 25 or 70 VRMS input Output power is selectable as 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, or 4 W; Refer to product selection below and sound ratings information on page 2 for listings and guidance One inch speaker coil provides high quality sound Finish is satin white baked enamel Grills are heavy gauge steel Mounting is into square or round backbox (refer to 2 for models and compatible backboxes) ULC listed to Standard CAN/ULC-S541* Fire alarm listed frequency response is 400 to 4000 Hz 2902-93xx Series Speakers provide voice and tone when used with Simplex Emergency Communication fire alarm control panels. gauge steel grills provide resistance against Standard screws are used to mount the speaker its compatible backbox. Wattage Selection. Input line matching are pre-installed and a jumper switch allows of the desired output wattage. The cone is proof and treated with an antifungal, tropical compatible agent. Alarm Applications Note: These speakers must be painted or have their finish altered in any way. Refer to Product Selection and Sound Output Ratings for additional details. are ULC listed under SimplexGrinnell, div of Tyco International of LTD. Product Selection to diagram on page 2 for dimension reference (A, B, C) Model V Input Description (A) V Input Round Grill, 8-9/16 mm) diameter mm) Backboxes with Dimensions (B x C) Mount Mount 6 round x 3-7/16 deep mm x 87 mm) 2902-9313** Note) Grill, 6-3/8 mm) mm) 5-9/16 square x 4-11/16 (141 mm x 119 mm) Round Grill, 12-3/4 mm) diameter mm) 10 round x 4 deep, with lip (254 mm x 102 mm x Square Grill, 12-1/2 mm) mm) 11-3/4 square x 4 deep mm x 102 mm) mm x 102 mm) Note: The combination of speaker 2902-9313 and backbox 2975-9304 requires use of the 1 W tap to achieve 85 dB per ULC 12-7/8 x 4 deep chamber testing. 7/2010 Available 6-5/8 x 4 deep mm x 104 mm) Note below) Available Sound Output Ratings Model Shape and Size V Input 70 V Input 2902-9311 Round, 8-9/16 dia. 2902-9313 Square Grill, 6-3/8 sq. 2902-9315 Round Grill 12-3/4 dia. 2902-9317 Square Grill, 12-1/2 sq. pressure level (dBA) in Chamber at 3 m (~10 ft) ULC-S541, see Note 1 Pressure Level Losses see Note 2 W W W W W dBA dBA 30 60 30 35 1: Use of the 1, 2, or 4 W settings is required to achieve 85 dB minimum per ULC sound chamber testing. The combination of 2902-9313 and backbox 2975-9304 requires use of the 1 W tap to achieve 85 dB per ULC sound chamber testing. 2: 0 dBA (reference) is on-axis. Angular losses apply equally for horizontal and vertical axis. Installation Reference Placement placement of Notification must conform to: Canadian Building Code Sound (Sound Pressure Level) of Intended Protec

Simplex Visual and Units List 18 No. (Rear Mounted Device) (Front Mounted Device) 24VDC 120VDC Flasher 24VDC Flasher 120VAC Wht. – Blank Wht. W. Lamp 24VDC Lamp 120VAC Assy Wrap illustration Type of device and mounting vary. Visual Units 1 No. l-689 6-19 x ST 6-19 x 3!8 ST Trim Label Label Label 8-32 x 1 OH Nut 1966 Simplex Racorde~ A No. 85 Red – Blank Amber – Blank Blue – Blank Wht. – Blank Wht. – Frre Red Red – Frre Wht. Lamp Holder Flasher Holder 24VDC Lamp 24VDC 120VAC Lamp 120VAC Units 2 No. 10 l-690 Flasher 24VDC Flasher 120VAC 6-32 >: 3. BH Wrap 6-32 x 9 PH Assy 6-32 x Label Label Label OH Symbols 3 No. Symbol Panel Symbol Panel 8 86 -300

[email protected] Audio/Visual Units ) HAZARD servicing Simplex Representatives. be pertormed when making any repairs. quali- -300 (575-856) lSS6 Slmpkx Recorder Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 8 86 FRONT MOUNT be mounted PROCEDURE Assemble signaling device and bezel as shown in 1,2,3, or 4. bell (Fig. A & B) to mount solenoid to bezel. gong must be removed Hang assembled A/V unit on back box as shown in 5 (see note below). Install wires as shown appropriate wiring on front page. Mount AIV unit to back box with two screws as in Fig. 5 (see note below). If bell (Fig. l), mount gong to assembled unit,. the case of signaling devices shown in Fig. or 4, the A/V unit may be mounted with device above and audible device below shown in Fig. 5) or vice versa. the case of a bell, however, the unit must be with the bell on top and the visual below as shown in Fig. 1 (upside down respect to Fig. 5). any case, unclip and change position of lens necessary. 2 FRONT MOUNT SPEAKER OR BUZZER MOUNT Fig. 4 OR SPEAKER bottom bezel on back cl6 mounted can be looped to aid Installation. 5 screws use screws as shown

[email protected] Audio/Visual Units ) HAZARD servicing Simplex Representatives. be pertormed when making any repairs. quali- -300 (575-856) lSS6 Slmpkx Recorder Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 8 86 FRONT MOUNT be mounted PROCEDURE Assemble signaling device and bezel as shown in 1,2,3, or 4. bell (Fig. A & B) to mount solenoid to bezel. gong must be removed Hang assembled A/V unit on back box as shown in 5 (see note below). Install wires as shown appropriate wiring on front page. Mount AIV unit to back box with two screws as in Fig. 5 (see note below). If bell (Fig. l), mount gong to assembled unit,. the case of signaling devices shown in Fig. or 4, the A/V unit may be mounted with device above and audible device below shown in Fig. 5) or vice versa. the case of a bell, however, the unit must be with the bell on top and the visual below as shown in Fig. 1 (upside down respect to Fig. 5). any case, unclip and change position of lens necessary. 2 FRONT MOUNT SPEAKER OR BUZZER MOUNT Fig. 4 OR SPEAKER bottom bezel on back cl6 mounted can be looped to aid Installation. 5 screws use screws as shown

Simplex Visual and Units List 18 No. (Rear Mounted Device) (Front Mounted Device) 24VDC 120VDC Flasher 24VDC Flasher 120VAC Wht. – Blank Wht. W. Lamp 24VDC Lamp 120VAC Assy Wrap illustration Type of device and mounting vary. Visual Units 1 No. l-689 6-19 x ST 6-19 x 3!8 ST Trim Label Label Label 8-32 x 1 OH Nut 1966 Simplex Racorde~ A No. 85 Red – Blank Amber – Blank Blue – Blank Wht. – Blank Wht. – Frre Red Red – Frre Wht. Lamp Holder Flasher Holder 24VDC Lamp 24VDC 120VAC Lamp 120VAC Units 2 No. 10 l-690 Flasher 24VDC Flasher 120VAC 6-32 >: 3. BH Wrap 6-32 x 9 PH Assy 6-32 x Label Label Label OH Symbols 3 No. Symbol Panel Symbol Panel 8 86 -300

[email protected] be peftormad By qualilied Simplex Representa- when maklng any DC BULBS 24VDC DC VAC) (NEUT AC) VDC VAC WIRE NUTS NOT SUPPLIED. NUMBERS VAC VAC ISOLATE AND TAPE UNUSED WIRE NUTS NOT SUPPLIED. -301 (575-858) 1966 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 8 86

[email protected] be peftormad By qualilied Simplex Representa- when maklng any DC BULBS 24VDC DC VAC) (NEUT AC) VDC VAC WIRE NUTS NOT SUPPLIED. NUMBERS VAC VAC ISOLATE AND TAPE UNUSED WIRE NUTS NOT SUPPLIED. -301 (575-858) 1966 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 8 86

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

ULC Listed Approved Peripherals Accessories Chimes and Buzzers Hardware) Series/2975 Series ID & Bell Box for 6 Bells/Chimes Steel for 2975-9042 Stainless Steel for 2975-9042 Steel for 2975-9045 Steel for 2975-9045 Plate for 2975-9042 Hood 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 FLUSH BOX FOR BELLS/HORNS/CHIMES & CHIME 1/16 1/16 1/2 1/8 1/2 1/2 1/8 1/2 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/8 1/8 1/2 Steel Stainless Steel FLUSH BOX FOR BELLS OR CHIMES 1/8 (25.7cm) (5.0cm) 1/8 Steel Stainless Steel Box* 9/16 1/2 (8.89cm PLATE 13/16 1/16 DIA., 4 HOLES ASSEMBLY SERIES & CHIME 3/16 (335mm H X 3/4 (349mm) W CONDUIT WALL (16mm) BOX PAGE 3 DIMENSIONS SERIES CHIME YARDHOOD mm) mm) mm) 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

ULC Listed Approved Peripherals Accessories Chimes and Buzzers Hardware) Series/2975 Series ID & Bell Box for 6 Bells/Chimes Steel for 2975-9042 Stainless Steel for 2975-9042 Steel for 2975-9045 Steel for 2975-9045 Plate for 2975-9042 Hood 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 11/00 FLUSH BOX FOR BELLS/HORNS/CHIMES & CHIME 1/16 1/16 1/2 1/8 1/2 1/2 1/8 1/2 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/8 1/8 1/2 Steel Stainless Steel FLUSH BOX FOR BELLS OR CHIMES 1/8 (25.7cm) (5.0cm) 1/8 Steel Stainless Steel Box* 9/16 1/2 (8.89cm PLATE 13/16 1/16 DIA., 4 HOLES ASSEMBLY SERIES & CHIME 3/16 (335mm H X 3/4 (349mm) W CONDUIT WALL (16mm) BOX PAGE 3 DIMENSIONS SERIES CHIME YARDHOOD mm) mm) mm) 11/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 and Representatives Throughout the World. us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Multi-Application Peripherals and Accessories Manual Station Series (Metal) Listed* Single Action Durable Extruded Aluminum Construction Test & Reset Handle Hangs Down in Alarm Attractive, Low Profile Design Single Gang Mount French, or Bilingual or Two-Stage Alarm and durable, MS-300 Series pull Stations non-coded, single action devices which initiate an signal when pulled. MS-300 pull stations are constructed of durable aluminum and finished in red. An abrasion label with large, raised letters provides clear instructions. The unique side reset design is simple does not detract from the appearance of the station. model MS-302C (two-stage) is similar to the except it contains an additional normally switch for General Alarm (G.A.). The G.A. switch accessible only after the handle has been pulled. A Alarm key is supplied with each unit. firmly on the station handle will open the and activate the internal switch to trigger the detection circuit. The handle, once pulled, will open until the station is reset. MS-302C provides a key switch which will be only after the handle is pulled. Operation the key switch, when connected to a separate alarm circuit, will initiate the 2nd stage of a alarm signalling system. station is reset with a 1/8 diameter screwdriver. ALARM single action pull station shall be constructed of aluminum and finished in red enamel paint allow quick identification. Pulling the handle shall immediate operation of the alarm detection Those stations installed in a two-stage system come equipped with an internal key switch to operate the 2nd stage alarm initiating The manual fire alarm stations shall be according to the specific requirements in the applicable codes and standards. INFORMATION: # Action, Single Stage Pull Station Action, Two-Stage Pull Station (Key LISTED ABOVE ARE ENGLISH LANGUAGE, ADD FOR FOR BILINGUAL e.g. MS-301C, MS-301CF, MS-301CB 2000 Simplex International Time Equipment Co. Ltd. 7/00 HOLE ALARM DIAGRAM: PREVIOUS FIRE ALARM NEXT END-OF-LINE NEXT END-OF-LINE WIRE AS SHOWN SO THAT SUPERVISION CONNECTIONS IS MAINTAINED. MOUNTS TO 2 X 4 X 2.25 OUTLET BOX. SWITCH RATINGS: ALL MODELS A @ 30 VDC; 0.1 A @ 125 VAC. 7/00 Skymark Avenue, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5K5 us on the world wide web at www.simplexnet.com specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. Printed in Canada.

Intrusion Control/Communicator Simplex 3007-9005 8-Zone Control/Communicator accepts to 15 Personal ID Numbers (PINs), is keypad or remotely pro- supports multiple languages, and has a wide range features. Event History Buffer by up to 4 Programmable Keypads Programmable Key User Interface Programmable Alpha Display Personal Identification Numbers (PINs) Listed, CSFM approved EMC 89/336, 73/23 and Alpha Keypad Support 3007-9005 can use the 3007-9501 LED keypad the 3007-9502 Alpha Numeric keypad. The 3007- provides one LED per zone, plus 8 system status that indicate conditions such as armed, fire and trouble. The 3007-9502 provides a two 16 character display, backlit keys and backlit dis- The end user can adjust the sounder volume and intensity using easy two-button commands. 3007-9502 is required for system programming. and LCD keypads can be mixed in the same sys- Personal ID Numbers (PINs) system supports fifteen 4-digit Personal ID Num- (PINs). The PINs can contain any combination of Any number of PINs can be designated as mas- PINs. Only master PINs can be used to reprogram PINs other than master PINs can be pro- at 7 different access levels, and can be from bypassing, testing and disarming the Function Key User Interface labeled function keys eliminate the need for multi- commands. Functions such as arming, disarm- and resetting smoke detectors are performed by entering a PIN followed by the function key. interface provides the new user with easy to fol- procedures while allowing the expert user quick without the use of cumbersome menu driven Residential Mode only requires a PIN to dis- the system, to silence alarms, and to reset the Arm” Feature Arm allows the system to be turned on without use of a PIN. A PIN is required to turn the system to silence alarms, or to perform system tests. 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 8/98 Zones 3007-9005 accepts up to 8 input zones that are flexible and can be programmed to provide different functions. Detector Alarm Verification 3007-9005 can be used in residential fire alarm It can be programmed to perform an reset on the smoke detectors, should an occur. If a second alarm occurs within the verifi- window, an immediate fire alarm results. This potential false alarms, while still providing fast to an alarm. Programmable system is completely keypad programmable using 3007-9502 LCD keypad, eliminating the need for hand-held programmers. Programmable Detection System Remote Programming (WDSRP) for Windows allows the system to remotely programmed using a PC running Win- and a standard Hayes modem. Running diag- arming systems, and bypassing zones can all accomplished using an off-site computer. Remote provides a prompt, efficient means to customer assistance while reducing the need service visits. Event History Buffer 30 event history buffer keeps track of events Alarms, Troubles, etc. time and date. The buffer can be read at the 3007-9502 keypad or to the WDSRP software. The installer can the type of events that are stored. Arming Configurations system can be programmed to arm in different providing a means to automatically a group of zones. Protection or part of the programming can be locked so the cannot be changed should someone attempt take over the account. Zoning Control can be programmed to produce an alarm only specific zone pairs are activated. This can be to reduce false alarms by requiring multiple acti- Cross zoning can be programmed to cause an when zones are activated in sequence. This for directional detection. Independent Entry Delays can be programmed to select from one of two delay times. This feature allows for the selection a longer entry delay time for zones that are located long distance from the keypad. Machine Override 3007-9005 has a built-in answering machine over- functio

Intrusion Control/Communicator Simplex 3007-9009 6-Zone Control/Communicator accepts to 15 Personal ID Numbers (PINs), is keypad or remotely pro- supports multiple languages, and has a wide range features. by up to 4 Programmable Keypads Programmable Key User Interface Alpha Display Personal Identification Numbers (PINs) Listed, CSFM approved – EMC 89/336, 73/23 and Alpha Keypad Support 3007-9009 can use the 3007-9507 or 3007-9501 keypads and the 3007-9502 Alpha Numeric key- The 3007-9507 and 3007-9501 provide one LED zone, plus system status LEDs that indicate condi- such as armed, fire alarm, and trouble. 3007-9502 provides a two line, 16 character backlit keys and backlit display. The end user adjust the sounder volume and backlight intensity easy two-button commands. The keypads pro- three programmable emergency keys. The 3007- is required for system programming. LED and keypads can be mixed in the same system. Personal ID Numbers (PINs) system supports fifteen 4-digit personal ID num- (PINs). The PINs can contain any combination of Function Key User Interface labeled function keys eliminate the need for multi- commands. Functions such as arming, disarm- and resetting smoke detectors are performed by entering a PIN followed by the function key. This provides the new user with easy to follow pro- while allowing the expert user quick access the use of cumbersome menu driven formats. Mode only requires a PIN to disarm the to silence alarms, and to reset the system. Arm” Feature Arm allows the system to be turned on without use of a PIN. A PIN is required to turn the system to silence alarms, or to perform system tests. Zones 3007-9009 accepts up to 6 input zones that are flexible and can be programmed to provide different functions. 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 8/98 (3) Telephone Numbers system supports two 32-digit telephone numbers a three or four digit account code for each. These phone numbers can be individually configured for type of communication format and for the choice of or tone dialing. The third phone number is re- for remote programming. Options LED Keypad Zone LEDs. 4 system status LEDs. Mounts to a sin- gang box. Flip-top cover for easy instruction guide. LED Keypad zone LEDs. 8 system status LEDs. Sounder volume controlled via simple two button commands. Alpha Numeric Keypad two lines of 16 characters. The Alpha infor- is remotely downloadable and it can be pro- by the installer at the keypad. Sounder and backlight intensity are controlled with sim- two-button commands. Bell Supervision Module power and supervision for one end-of-line su- bell circuit. Connects to alarm output of Indicates trouble condition using a Form connected to one zone. Single Phone Line Monitor one phone line. Provides a normally open re- output that closes upon phone failure. individually programmable outputs can be con- by alarms, access control, ground start, smoke reset, or the control arming state. Detector Alarm Verification 3007-9009 can be used in residential fire alarm ap- It can be programmed to perform an auto- reset on smoke detectors, should an alarm If a second alarm occurs within the verification an immediate fire alarm results. This reduces false alarms, while still providing fast to an alarm. Programmability system is completely keypad programmable using 3007-9502 LCD keypad, eliminating the need for hand-held programmers. Programmability Detection System Remote Programming (WDSRP) for Windows allows the system to remotely programmed using a PC running Windows a standard Hayes modem. Running diagnostics, systems, and bypassing zones can all be ac- using an off-site computer. Remote pro- provides a prompt, efficient means to customer assistance while reducing the need service visits. Protection or part of the programming

SECURITY Control Systems Supplies and Accessories Series 12VDC POWER SUPPLY 60Hz to 12VDC Operation and Regulated Listed Class II Plug-in Type Fused Short Circuit- and 3210-9802 is a UL Listed*, Class II 115VAC, 60Hz 12VDC filtered and regulated power supply. The supply is internally fused and has inherent short and overvoltage-protection. One 3210-9802 power up to two controllers of any type less door power. If battery back-up is required, use the power supply. Power 60Hz, 0.2 A type, 3-prong) Power 1.2A Output MV (P.P.) max. Connection 66 (1.68m) Cable with Push-On Connection Block x 3.10 x 2.28 x 7.87 x 5.79 cm) Size ELPAC lb. (.9 kg) POWER SUPPLY 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved 8/98 12VDC POWER SUPPLY Listed Amp Capacity Battery Operation and Reverse-Polarity Protected 3210-9803 is a UL listed* 12VDC/4-Amp power and is complete with an internal step- transformer, louvered cabinet and key-lockable Supervision of the cabinet door may be moni- with the optional 3209-9812 tamper switch. One two optional 3210-9804 12VDC, 10Ah maintenance- batteries with harness may be housed within the cabinet, to provide up to 20Ah maximum standby power. The 3210-9803 is capable of operat- with up to 38Ah batteries. (38Ah batteries must be in a separate enclosure). DC POWER SUPPLY WITH 3210-9804 BATTERIES VOLTAGE +/- 10%, 60 Hz+ VAC +/- 10%, 50VA++ VAC +/- 10%, 50VA++ CURRENT Max. Max. Max. POWER @ 13.2 VDC, 4A Max. Regulated @ 13.2 VDC, 1.5A Max. @ 13.2 VDC, 0.75A Max RIPPLE (RMS) .350 VAC @ 4A Load VAC @ 1A Load POWER SUPPLY Linear/Uninterruptible VAC @ 0.75 Load = A.C., Yellow = Fault = A.C., Yellow = Fault = A.C., Yellow = Fault MONITORED Battery, Loss of A.C., Fuse, A.C. Fuse Battery, Loss of A.C., Fuse, A.C. Fuse Battery, Loss of A.C. Fuse, A.C. Fuse Limited via Terminals Relay, Rating = 2A @ 26VDC Relay, Rating = 2A @ 26VDC x 15 x 4 x 38.1 x 10.2 cm) x 12 x 4 x 30.5 x 10.2 cm) (LESS BATT) Lbs. (7.7 kg) MATERIAL Gauge Steel Lbs. (2.4 kg) Gauge Steel x 8 x 3.5 x 20.3 x 8.9 cm) Lbs. (1.6 kg) Gauge Steel OUTS (2.2 cm), 8 Total Back, Bottom, Top, 1 each Side) (1 Back, Left, Bottom, Top, 2 Right Side) (1 Each Side and Back) (2.2 cm), 5 Total (2.2 cm), 6 Total LOCK DOOR (10 or 20Ah)** Option PS 1265 (13Ah Total) Included 1242 (4Ah) Included WEIGHT Lbs. (3.4 kg)** to 120(cid:176) F, (0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C) 85% @ 85(cid:176) F (65(cid:176) C) Lbs. (2.6 kg) Each to 120(cid:176) F, (0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C) 85% @ 85(cid:176) F (65(cid:176) C) Lbs. (1.7 kg) to 120(cid:176) F, (0(cid:176) to 49(cid:176) C) 85% @ 85(cid:176) F (65(cid:176) C) OUTPUT SIZE ALARM SAF AS/PS5-BPS-12-UL, PS-FMC-12/15 BFS/UL, PS-FMC-12/10-BFS/UL, ALL UL LISTED. BATTERY WEIGHT IS PER BATTERY (ONE IS REQUIRED PER POWER SUPPLY FOR 12VDC, 10AH OR USE TWO 12VDC. BATTERIES IN PARALLEL TO PROVIDE 20AH) TRANSFORMER IS MOUNTED WITHIN THE CABINET EXTERNAL PLUG-IN, CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER USED (115VAC, 60HZ PRIMARY, 16.5 VAC SECONDARY) 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved 8/98 24VDC POWER SUPPLY Listed Amp Capacity Battery Operation

SECURITY Parallel Dot Matrix Printer Serial Dot Matrix Printer Speed Rate Feed 1284 75 cps (Near Letter Quality) 300 cps (Utility) 390 cps (High Speed Draft) 435 cps (Super Speed Draft) ips KB RAM KB receive buffer top/rear Rear Push with zero- and paper park W x 4.6 H x 13.6 D cm x 11.7 cm x 34.5 cm) lb (7 Kg) UL, CSA FCC-B EPA Energy Star dBA (Utility Mode) dBA (Quiet Mode) W (max.) operating V V to 104 (5 to 40 to 90% relative humidity hours @ 25% duty cycle, page density million characters @ 25 % cycle Matrix Printer Impact Dot Matrix printer inches-per-second feed KB RAM Memory Tractor feed Parallel Port interface (3400-9102) Serial Port interface (3400-9103) includes: Parallel Interface cable includes: Serial Interface module Serial Interface cable 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved 08/00 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. Massachusetts 01441-0001 USA www.simplexnet.com and the Simplex logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Simplex Time Recorder Co. other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. S3700-0005 08/00

Parallel Laser Printer 3400-9104 Parallel Laser Printer can be used to print event and reports generated by Report Manager. Technology REt with UltraPrecise toner cartridge ppm dpi PCL 5e Intellifont 1284-compliant parallel connector); 6 ft (2 m) cable paper, envelopes, labels, card stock up to thickness legal, executive, envelopes, (3 x 5 inch minimum; legal maximum) H x 14.5 W x 12.8 D cm x 36.8 cm x 32.5 cm) lb (7.3 Kg) dB (Printing) UL, CSA FCC-B EPA Energy Star W (printing) W (PowerSave [sleep] mode) VAC (100 V 127 V), 50/60 Hz to 90.5 (10 to 32.5 to 80% relative humidity Type Sizes Compliance Consumption Temperature Laser print speed and quality Manual Duplexing N-up Printing (up to 9 pages per sheet) Uses HP UltraPrecise Toner Cartridge for improved pages per minute rated engine speed MB RAM Memory Sheet bin capacity scale images Parallel cable included HP UltraPrecise toner cartridge (HP part number User Documentation Software drivers on CD-ROM Power cord 6 ft. (2 m) IEEE-1284 compliant bi-directional cable 1999 Hewlett-Packard Company. Reproduced with permission. 2001 Simplex Time Recorder Co. All rights reserved. 9/01 the Simplex logo, and iSecure are either trademarks or registered trademarks Simplex Time Recorder Co. in the U.S. and/or other countries. Windows, and intelliMouse are either trademarks or registered trademarks Microsoft Corporation. is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation. All other trademarks are property of their registered owners. Massachusetts 01441-0001 USA www.simplexnet.com 2002 Simplex Time Recorder Co. DBA TEPG-US (a Tyco company). specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. 9/01

Reader Module Provides two reader ports for access control at doorways or one doorway at both entry and side Supports two readers, or keypads, or integrated or any two in combination Complete door monitoring and control with dedicated door contact and for exit (REX) inputs, and door control relays at each reader port four (4) general purpose inputs and two general purpose outputs Mounts internal to the iSecure Controller* Reader ports are jumper configurable for reader and communications requirements** Field wiring connections are via pluggable blocks On-board diagnostic LED status indicators to datasheet 3500-0001 for detailed information about the 3500-9801 Reader modules plug into expansion slots the ISC backplane where module power and are supplied. Each module provides two ports with the capability to support a wide range of and keypads. readers include: Wiegand, magnetic stripe, code, proximity, biometric, RF, and integrated Both Wiegand and Clock and Data are supported. Controller Module (3500-9801) for the ISC monitoring and control are available with these inputs and outputs at each reader port: Door contact input Request for exit monitoring (REX) input Door lock output power requirements that exceed the power from the ISC can be easily met by installing an power supply assembly. Port Port Voltage Options per Reader VDC regulated, 100 mA VDC regulated, 80 mA nominal (120 mA peak) VDC unregulated, 120 mA nominal (150 mA peak) AWG, 5 or 6 conductor, with drain wire BSCC S1806S22 conductor)** to specific reader for Typical distances vary 250 ft (76 m) to 500 ft (152 m) Wiring Requirements** Type Distance listed are typical, refer to specific readers for wiring requirements. 05/02 Module Wiring Information Available) Available) Wiring Information pluggable terminal blocks (1 per reader connection) blocks support 6 conductors, #14 to #22 AWG wire supply jumper selectable at: 5 VDC regulated, 12 VDC regulated, or 12 VDC unregulated Purpose I/O Wiring Information shielded pair with drain wire, 1000 ft (305 m) maximum distance terminal blocks accept #14 AWG to # 22 AWG wire are selectable for N.O. or N.C. contacts, sensed with 12 VDC inputs detect four states: Normal, Abnormal, Cut, and Short inputs detect two states: Normal and Abnormal Supervision requires two, 4.99 k resistors per circuit, supplied separately part number 378-323) shielded pair with drain wire, 500 ft (152 m) maximum distance terminal blocks accept #14 AWG to # 22 AWG wire contacts, jumper selectable as N. O. or N. C., rated 2 A @ 30 VDC maximum for loads A fuse at each output supplied from external power supply, 30 VDC maximum Properly suppressed loads have suppressed transient voltage and do not exceed 2 A inrush current. Simplex, the Simplex logo, and iSecure are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Tyco International Services AG its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All trademarks are property of their respective owners. Massachusetts 01441-0001 USA www.simplexnet.com 2002 TEPG-US (a Tyco company). specifications and other information shown were current as of printing and are subject to change without notice. 05/02

Le iSecure Pro peut agir comme un poste secondaire et de surveillance d Source ponctuelle simple pour alarme incendie et d : Surveillance Archive d historiques G de rapports d Capacit d une alarme de feu vers une du r iSecure Les points de sortie peuvent d par une d de feu Contr des composantes de l iSecure en fonction des conditions d de feu le module facultatif iSecure Vision) iSecure FireWatch du syst de gestion et de s iSecure Pro fournit une interface du r iSecure de Simplex permettant de signaler, enregistrer, imprimer et contr des d Chaque de feu peut avec une alarme et un niveau de priorit appropri le syst iSecure Pro. L de feu peut signal sur les postes du iSecure et trait d sp ou de la m mani que les autres d Les d g du r iSecure peuvent pr comme passant au travers de l et affich sur le facultatif iSecure Cartes. du r iSecure configur pour des conditions d peuvent accus d poste de travail du iSecure. Les points comme alarme de feu n pas la totale du syst iSecure Pro. des d changements d des points 4120 fonctionnent de la mani que ceux des points de contr d Ils envoy une imprimante, un poste de ou un op syst iSecure Pro peut configur pour une condition d en fonction des d ou d g sur le r est un message g par le logiciel et par un changement physique ou logique d point. d g sur le r iSecure peut configur pour se produire uniquement certaines de la journ 2002 La Cie du Temps Simplex Internationale Lt Tous droits r FireWatch la d d alarme, le iSecure Pro peut pour acheminer ou retransmettre un une alarme une ou plusieurs destinations. Les possibles peuvent des postes de travail des op ou des imprimantes. La d diff de celle d poste de dans le sens que tous les messages assign suivent ce dernier peu importe le poste du sur lequel il ouvre une session. L pourrait une alarme sur un poste d immeuble la semaine, puis sur un autre poste et dans un autre la semaine suivante. Lorsqu ou alarme est achemin un poste, l ou sera toujours signal sur ce poste. toute alarme g sur le syst iSecure Pro peut assign un niveau de priorit entre 1 et 99 avec une distincte qui aide dans l et le traitement l En outre, chaque alarme peut assign message d personnalis pour que l au courant des actions pr entreprendre lorsque est affich Les alarmes d importance configur pour syst l en cours sur un ordinateur et afficher informations p

4001-9401, -9402 Alarm Systems List assembly board options Number battery list below. list below. (12OVAC) PC board harness option harness D (formerly Class A) harness D (formerly Class A) harness other options) standoff List – 112-112 – 112-113 – 112-046 input 10A (Fl) pwr. 0.75A (F2) – ckt. 3A (F3) – input 6A (F4) – Board Options disconnect board – suppressor board – 562-657 supp./zone disc. – board – D (formerly Class A) board – Option voltmeter ammeter Assembly – – 1990 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. 11 90

– Alarm System List – Batteries – Door Assembly – PC board options – Transformer – 4001 pc board -Overlay – Battery harness – PC option harness A harness A (with options) harness – Snap-in Standoff Number battery list below. (see also list below) list below. List -112-111 -112-112 -112-113 112-046 Board Options disconnect board – 562-664 suppressor board – 562-657 supp./zone disc. – 562-666 board – 562-698 A board – 562-900 Input 5A (Fl) – 208-128 Pwr. 0.75A (F2) – 208-l 26 Ckt. 3A (F3) – 208-003 Input 6A (F4) – 208-057 Assembly 698-313 266-005 – 635-538 1988 Simplex Recorder Co.. Gardner. MA OlMl-OWl 188

BSimplex and -9404 Alarm Systems and Operating 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. your Time Recorder Co. Office (listed in the Pages under Fire Alarm) Warranty Registration & OF CONTENTS DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……….. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 and Equipment Required ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Notes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Requirements Wiring Specifications Check List …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… System Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. PROCEDURES Panel Mounting and Wiring Peripheral Devices …………………………………………………………………………………………………. Wiring Checkout Procedure Panel Terminal Connections Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, or Combination Transient Suppressor/Zone Disconnect Terminal Connections. Programming.. Power-Up.. Panel During an Alarm Condition to Recognize Normal, Trouble, and Alarm Indications ………………………………………………………………………. to Operate to Reset the Fire Alarm System Following an Alarm Condition to Operate to Do in Case of Trouble ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Verification Feature …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… to Test the System ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. to Perform the LED Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

a. and -9404 Alarm Systems publication provides following on the 4001-9403 and -9404 fire alarm panels: Test points. Circuit board inputs and outputs. details on panel operation and for panel switch settings. to the 4001-9403 and -9404 Fire Alarm Systems Operating and Installation 1 In this publication 2: The 4001-9403 accepts 120VAC as its source; the 4001-9404 accepts 220/240VAC. to a voltage reading between 3.5 and 5 volts. term no. FA4- POINTS panel test points are shown in Figure 1 and are listed below. is the OV test point. access to the panel 5 volt bus. access to the panel 24 volt bus. 2OV, drops to 0.8V during an AC brown-out. high, drops to 0.8V when the batteries are low or disconnected. DC (approximately 28V). high, drops to 0.8V when there is an open on the city lines. read voltage between desired test point and the GND test point. POINT 24V OUT TBL TBL 24V DlJT/ TBL / Test Points 1 1986 Simplex Recorder Gardner. Mass. o,.M,-000, INPUTS AND OUTPUTS are five terminal blocks that are used to interface external devices to the panel. block TBl interfaces panel power supply to the transformer and batteries. secondary secondary + terminal – terminal block TB2 interfaces (if used). panel to the signal circuits, 4-wire detectors (if used), and remote acknowledge input activated on the remote annunciator. the + terminal of an external power source. Can be up to the remote acknowledge an open circuit (floating); when switch @ 2.3 mA. @ 2A (maximum). are being used). are being used) or the OV line of an external power source. output is 32V average at up to 2 amps. the – wire of the 4-wire detector power the + wire of the 4-wire detector power the – wire of the signal circuit. the wire of the signal circuit. Under normal (non-alarm) voltage output is 24VDC at 1.8 mA. Under alarm conditions (if 4-wire (if 4-wire block TB3 interfaces a trouble relay. panel to an annunciator and remote trouble station, Terminals are also provided contact of trouble relay. of trouble relay. contact of trouble relay. 1 (-) 2 ( – ) 3 (-) 4 (-) remote trouble. remote + line; provides 24VDC. block TB4 interfaces panel to the initiating device circuits (zones). 1 + line (24VDC). 1 – line. 2 + line (24VDC). 2 – line. 3 + line (24VDC). 3 – line. 4 + line (24VDC). 4 – line. contacts of relay 1. of relay 1. contacts of relay 1. contacts of relay 2. of relay 2. contacts of relay 2. block TB5 interfaces panel to the city loop and also provides access to auxiliary relay contacts.

.__._…_ . .-.. -.. -I and -9404 Alarm Systems and Installation 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – your local Time Recorder Co. office listed in the Pages for Warranty & Information. Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DEFINITIONS To Recognize Normal, Trouble, and Alarm To Operate The Panel During An Alarm Condition To Reset The Fire Alarm System Following An Alarm Condition To Operate The Panel When Water Is Flowing In The System To Do In Case Of Trouble Verification Feature To Test The System to Perform LED Test ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. And Equipment Required Notes Requirements For System Wiring Wiring Specifications Checklist Panel Mounting And Wiring Peripheral Devices Wiring Checkout Procedure Panel Terminal Connections Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, or Combination Transient Suppressor/Zone Disconnect Terminal Connections Programming Power-Up

a. and -9404 Alarm Systems publication provides following on the 4001-9403 and -9404 fire alarm panels: Test points. Circuit board inputs and outputs. details on panel operation and for panel switch settings. to the 4001-9403 and -9404 Fire Alarm Systems Operating and Installation 1 In this publication 2: The 4001-9403 accepts 120VAC as its source; the 4001-9404 accepts 220/240VAC. to a voltage reading between 3.5 and 5 volts. term no. FA4- POINTS panel test points are shown in Figure 1 and are listed below. is the OV test point. access to the panel 5 volt bus. access to the panel 24 volt bus. 2OV, drops to 0.8V during an AC brown-out. high, drops to 0.8V when the batteries are low or disconnected. DC (approximately 28V). high, drops to 0.8V when there is an open on the city lines. read voltage between desired test point and the GND test point. POINT 24V OUT TBL TBL 24V DlJT/ TBL / Test Points 1 Manuals Online! – 1986 Simplex Recorder Gardner. Mass. o,.M,-000, INPUTS AND OUTPUTS are five terminal blocks that are used to interface external devices to the panel. block TBl interfaces panel power supply to the transformer and batteries. secondary secondary + terminal – terminal block TB2 interfaces (if used). panel to the signal circuits, 4-wire detectors (if used), and remote acknowledge input activated on the remote annunciator. the + terminal of an external power source. Can be up to the remote acknowledge an open circuit (floating); when switch @ 2.3 mA. @ 2A (maximum). are being used). are being used) or the OV line of an external power source. output is 32V average at up to 2 amps. the – wire of the 4-wire detector power the + wire of the 4-wire detector power the – wire of the signal circuit. the wire of the signal circuit. Under normal (non-alarm) voltage output is 24VDC at 1.8 mA. Under alarm conditions (if 4-wire (if 4-wire block TB3 interfaces a trouble relay. panel to an annunciator and remote trouble station, Terminals are also provided contact of trouble relay. of trouble relay. contact of trouble relay. 1 (-) 2 ( – ) 3 (-) 4 (-) remote trouble. remote + line; provides 24VDC. Manuals Online! – block TB4 interfaces panel to the initiating device circuits (zones). 1 + line (24VDC). 1 – line. 2 + line (24VDC). 2 – line. 3 + line (24VDC). 3 – line. 4 + line (24VDC). 4 – line. contacts of relay 1. of relay 1. contacts of relay 1. contacts of relay 2. of relay 2. contacts of relay 2. block TB5 interfaces panel to the city loop and also provides access to

BSimplex and -9404 Alarm Systems and Operating 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. other specifications Manuals Online! – were current as of publication. are subject change without notice. your Time Recorder Co. Office (listed in the Pages under Fire Alarm) Warranty Registration & Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……….. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 and Equipment Required ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Notes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Requirements Wiring Specifications Check List …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… System Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. PROCEDURES Panel Mounting and Wiring Peripheral Devices …………………………………………………………………………………………………. Wiring Checkout Procedure Panel Terminal Connections Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, or Combination Transient Suppressor/Zone Disconnect Terminal Connections. Programming.. Power-Up.. Panel During an Alarm Condition to Recognize Normal, Trouble, and Alarm Indications ………………………………………………………………………. to Operate to Reset the Fire Alarm System Following an Alarm Condition to Operate to Do in Case of Trouble ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Verification Feature …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… to Test the System ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. to Perform the LED Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

– Alarm System List – Batteries – Door Assembly – PC board options – Transformer – 4001 pc board -Overlay – Battery harness – PC option harness A harness A (with options) harness – Snap-in Standoff Number battery list below. (see also list below) list below. List -112-111 -112-112 -112-113 112-046 Board Options disconnect board – 562-664 suppressor board – 562-657 supp./zone disc. – 562-666 board – 562-698 A board – 562-900 Input 5A (Fl) – 208-128 Pwr. 0.75A (F2) – 208-l 26 Ckt. 3A (F3) – 208-003 Input 6A (F4) – 208-057 Assembly 698-313 266-005 – 635-538 1988 Simplex Recorder Co.. Gardner. MA OlMl-OWl Manuals Online! – 188 Manuals Online! –

.__._…_ . .-.. -.. -I and -9404 Alarm Systems and Installation 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – your local Time Recorder Co. office listed in the Pages for Warranty & Information. Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS DEFINITIONS To Recognize Normal, Trouble, and Alarm To Operate The Panel During An Alarm Condition To Reset The Fire Alarm System Following An Alarm Condition To Operate The Panel When Water Is Flowing In The System To Do In Case Of Trouble Verification Feature To Test The System to Perform LED Test ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. And Equipment Required Notes Requirements For System Wiring Wiring Specifications Checklist Panel Mounting And Wiring Peripheral Devices Wiring Checkout Procedure Panel Terminal Connections Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, or Combination Transient Suppressor/Zone Disconnect Terminal Connections Programming Power-Up

BfSimplex Transient Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, and Combination Transient Disconnect Boards Ensure power the 4001 control is OFF before proceeding. INDICATING APPLIANCE (SEE STEP 2) board the control panel as shown 1. INITIATING DEVICE (SEE 3 & 4) i electrical connections as follows: Connect board ribbon cable harness to board control the blue-marked Pl. Connect connector Pl. Ensure end lines up with pin 9 on each connector. other end For the 4001-9804 appliance circuit -10 (SIG -). suppressor board or TBl-9 For the 4001-9804, or -9807 board, connect device circuits as indicated Table 1. any of the designated zone terminals on the do not have initiating devices connected them, a 3.3K-ohm EOLR must be connected those terminals. BOARD 1 BOARD If using waterflow or sprinkler connect them as follows: Connect water-flow switch (normally ooen) to -5 (ZON3 – ) and TBl-6 + ).- Connect + ). srxinkler switch TBl-8 NO WIRES ARE CONNECTED TO ZONE A 3.3 K ACROSS THOSE TERMINALS. 1 Manuals Online! – 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner, MISS. 014414001 Manuals Online! –

BfSimplex Transient Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, and Combination Transient Disconnect Boards Ensure power the 4001 control is OFF before proceeding. INDICATING APPLIANCE (SEE STEP 2) board the control panel as shown 1. INITIATING DEVICE (SEE 3 & 4) i electrical connections as follows: Connect board ribbon cable harness to board control the blue-marked Pl. Connect connector Pl. Ensure end lines up with pin 9 on each connector. other end For the 4001-9804 appliance circuit -10 (SIG -). suppressor board or TBl-9 For the 4001-9804, or -9807 board, connect device circuits as indicated Table 1. any of the designated zone terminals on the do not have initiating devices connected them, a 3.3K-ohm EOLR must be connected those terminals. BOARD 1 BOARD If using waterflow or sprinkler connect them as follows: Connect water-flow switch (normally ooen) to -5 (ZON3 – ) and TBl-6 + ).- Connect + ). srxinkler switch TBl-8 NO WIRES ARE CONNECTED TO ZONE A 3.3 K ACROSS THOSE TERMINALS. 1 Manuals Online! – 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner, MISS. 014414001 Manuals Online! –

BfSimplex Transient Suppressor, Zone Disconnect, and Combination Transient Disconnect Boards Ensure power the 4001 control is OFF before proceeding. INDICATING APPLIANCE (SEE STEP 2) board the control panel as shown 1. INITIATING DEVICE (SEE 3 & 4) i electrical connections as follows: Connect board ribbon cable harness to board control the blue-marked Pl. Connect connector Pl. Ensure end lines up with pin 9 on each connector. other end For the 4001-9804 appliance circuit -10 (SIG -). suppressor board or TBl-9 For the 4001-9804, or -9807 board, connect device circuits as indicated Table 1. any of the designated zone terminals on the do not have initiating devices connected them, a 3.3K-ohm EOLR must be connected those terminals. BOARD 1 BOARD If using waterflow or sprinkler connect them as follows: Connect water-flow switch (normally ooen) to -5 (ZON3 – ) and TBl-6 + ).- Connect + ). srxinkler switch TBl-8 NO WIRES ARE CONNECTED TO ZONE A 3.3 K ACROSS THOSE TERMINALS. 1 Manuals Online! – 1966 Simplex Recorder Gardner, MISS. 014414001 Manuals Online! –

xqdu,usa~ u36- PU~J 8086-COOP le~ol Aq paJ!nbaJ II @b!ldde go!~ pue (aad z186- JO 8086-LOOP PaJ * IlSw! wol Aq PaJ!nbaJ II 6066-~~w paJ ain llsw! @bgdds y,p put? lead z166- Manuals Online! – 186- PUN 8086-LOOP

4001-9809 External Battery Box power to control panel is OFF before proceeding. the external battery box as follows: Unlock and open battery box ,door. Remove knockout plug on top or side of box for harness exit to fire alarm control panel. Holes are provided on the rear of the box for securing it to the wall. Battery box must be close-nippled At battery box mounting box with batteries. control panel with a protective metallic raceway (maximum feet position box and secure with fasteners which are capable of weight w/batteries = 42 Ibs.) with batteries and box) to control panel as follows: existing battery cable with the control panel) and connect external battery harness Place 18AH batteries mounted box. See Figure 1. A harness provided extends the battery cabinet below. You must run the harness the control panel, and up to the control panel battery terminal TBI. knockout the control panel. Connections are a above), Check all battery polarity. REVERSED CONNECTIONS MAY EQUIPMENT. Connect wire of battery harness black wire (without connector) connector) TBl-4 See Figure 2. control panel TBl-3 Connect wire of battery harness connector) positive +) terminal of one battery. Connect wire of battery harness (with connector) negative (-) of other battery. See Figure 2. Do not connect white wire DAMAGE TO EQlJ>PiENT DURING installation manual, Pub. No. FA4-31-001, batter-v terminals now. BATTERY POWER MAY Refer to the system operating final power connections. THROUGH KNOCKOUT THAT IS TO CONTROL 1 2 Manuals Online! – 1966 Shplex Gardner, Mass. 01441-0001 3 86 Manuals Online! –

[email protected] Alarm Relay Module alarm relay module is an accessory rated at 2A. When used, the relays work as follows: 4001 fire alarm systems. It contains four SPDT Relay Kl energizes when there is an alarm on Zone 1. Relay K2 energizes when there is an alarm on Zone 2. Relay K3 energizes when there is an alarm on Zone 3. Relay K4 energizes when there is an alarm on Zone 4. module may be mounted two ways: If the 4001-9804 suppressor, boards are NOT being used, zone disconnect, or -9807 transient module may be the control panel as shown in Figure 1. The module may be mounted externally a six-gang box (supplied by others) as in Figure 2. mounting six-gang trim plate before installation. board in the control panel, remove the relay board mounting bracket MOUNTING FROM MOUNT BOARD PANEL 1 1989 Simplex Recorder Co., Gardner, Mass 01441-0001 U.S.A. Manuals Online! – the alarm relay module to the panel as follows (refer to Figure 3): Connect the module ANN1 wire (TBl-1) TE33-4 (ANN1 -). the module ANN2 wire (TBl-2) the module ANN3 wire (Tel-3) the module ANN4 wire (TBl-4) TB3-5 (ANN2 -). TB3-8 (ANN3 -). TB3-7 (ANN4 -). Connect the module AUX – wire (TB2-8) to TB2-4 (AUX -). module AUX + wire (TB2-7) to Tf35-8 (NO of AUX 1). Connect a wire from the panel RMT+ to TB5-7 (C of AUXl). Refer to the system wiring diagrams, 841810, information on external device the alarm relay module. Refer to the 4001-9403 and -9404 Operating And details on panel configuration when using an Pub. No. FA4-31-001, relay module. RELAY & BRACKET ASSEMBLY HEAD SCREWS 4 2 11 89 Manuals Online! –

QSimplex Battery Meter Module the battery meter module using Figure 1 as a reference. Discard battery harness supplied with the control panel and use the harness with the battery meter module (P/N 733-498). battery meters to the batteries as shown in Figure 2. Refer to 4001-9403 and details on No. FA4-31-001, Installation Operating connections. MOUNT 4-GANG BOX SURFACE MOUNT ON MOLD BOX 2% DEEP BY OTHERS) Z-064 SCREWS 1 SCREWS 4 BATTERIES CONTROL DO NOT HARNESS SHIPPED WITH BATTERIES! 2 JJ 1967SimplexTlmeRecorderCo.,Gardner. 01441-0001 U.S.A. 187 Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! –

xqdu,usa~ u36- PU~J 8086-COOP le~ol Aq paJ!nbaJ II @b!ldde go!~ pue (aad z186- JO 8086-LOOP PaJ * IlSw! wol Aq PaJ!nbaJ II 6066-~~w paJ ain llsw! @bgdds y,p put? lead z166- Manuals Online! – 186- PUN 8086-LOOP

1. Check to see that you have all of the following: Class A, Style D Circuit Board Assembly #562-900). 3-Wire Cable Assembly #733-530). lo-Wire Cable Assembly #733-531). Ribbon Harness Assembly #733-464). Envelope in. screws. #748-147) 2.25 in. internally-threaded spacers and four 4-40 x Envelope (Part #748-l 90) containing 1 in. externally-threaded posts. 1: The Class A Circuit Board may be installed alone or in combination with an optional Disconnect Board, or an optional Suppressor/Zone Board, an optional Board. only the Class A Board listed above is to be installed along with the Class A Board, follow the procedures the procedures to be installed, Step 2; if one of the optional Step 3. Proceed as follows: Screw the 2.25 in. spacers onto the four threaded studs in the Fire Alarm Cabinet. Making sure that terminal block TBl uppermost, align the Class A Board with the spacers. Then, using four 4-40 screws, secure the board to the spacers. Making sure the ribbon cable blue edge is positioned as shown Figure 1, plug the ribbon cable onto of both boards. 1988SlmplexTlmeRscorderCo., Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A Main F/A PC Board 1 Making sure that the connector wire is both lowermost and aligns with pin 1, plug the 3-wire cable P3 of the Class A Board as shown in Figure 1. to properly align the connectors on either the ribbon cable or the 3-wire cable to the board pins can result in system damage. As shown in Figure 1, connect the 3-wire cable leads to TB2 on the Main F/A PC Board as follows: Black wire to – Red wire to + (TB2-5). Gray wire to – To the Class A Board terminals, connect the external devices as shown in Figure 4 (see page 4). Apply power to the panel. Then test the system in accordance with the directions the Instruction Manual. Proceed as follows: Screw the 2.25 in. spacers onto the four threaded studs in the Fire Alarm Cabinet. Making sure that terminal block TBl up, align the Class A Board with the spacers. Then, using the hex secure the board to the spacers. Making sure that the connector wire is both lowermost and aligns with pin 1, plug the 3-wire cable P3 of the Class A Board as shown in Figure 1. properly align 3-wire cable connector the pins can result system As shown in Figure 1, connect the 3-wire cable leads to TB2 on the Main F/A PC Board as follows: Black wire to – )1 (TB2-6). Red wire to + )I (TB2-5). Gray wire to -# (TB2-4). To the Class A Board terminals, connect the external devices as shown in Figure 4 (see page 4). Connect cable the Zone Disconnect, Zone Suppressor Zone Disconnect/ Board as follows (see Figure 2). USED ZONE DISCONNECT SUPPRESSOR BD. 6 DISCONNECT SUPPRESSOR SD. 2 Suppressor Board (#562-657) or Zone Disconnect/Suppressor (#562-666) Black lead to – Red lead to + terminal. Gray leads (from left to right and in sequence) Zone Disconnect Board (#562-664) -)I terminals. Black and red leads: cut off or tape (not used). Gray leads (from left to right and in sequence) + through – Making

1. Check to see that you have all of the following: Class A, Style D Circuit Board Assembly #562-900). 3-Wire Cable Assembly #733-530). lo-Wire Cable Assembly #733-531). Ribbon Harness Assembly #733-464). Envelope in. screws. #748-147) 2.25 in. internally-threaded spacers and four 4-40 x Envelope (Part #748-l 90) containing 1 in. externally-threaded posts. 1: The Class A Circuit Board may be installed alone or in combination with an optional Disconnect Board, or an optional Suppressor/Zone Board, an optional Board. only the Class A Board listed above is to be installed along with the Class A Board, follow the procedures the procedures to be installed, Step 2; if one of the optional Step 3. Proceed as follows: Screw the 2.25 in. spacers onto the four threaded studs in the Fire Alarm Cabinet. Making sure that terminal block TBl uppermost, align the Class A Board with the spacers. Then, using four 4-40 screws, secure the board to the spacers. Making sure the ribbon cable blue edge is positioned as shown Figure 1, plug the ribbon cable onto of both boards. Main F/A PC Board 1 1988SlmplexTlmeRscorderCo., Mass. 01441-0001 U.S.A Manuals Online! – Making sure that the connector wire is both lowermost and aligns with pin 1, plug the 3-wire cable P3 of the Class A Board as shown in Figure 1. to properly align the connectors on either the ribbon cable or the 3-wire cable to the board pins can result in system damage. As shown in Figure 1, connect the 3-wire cable leads to TB2 on the Main F/A PC Board as follows: Black wire to – Red wire to + (TB2-5). Gray wire to – To the Class A Board terminals, connect the external devices as shown in Figure 4 (see page 4). Apply power to the panel. Then test the system in accordance with the directions the Instruction Manual. Proceed as follows: Screw the 2.25 in. spacers onto the four threaded studs in the Fire Alarm Cabinet. Making sure that terminal block TBl up, align the Class A Board with the spacers. Then, using the hex secure the board to the spacers. Making sure that the connector wire is both lowermost and aligns with pin 1, plug the 3-wire cable P3 of the Class A Board as shown in Figure 1. properly align 3-wire cable connector the pins can result system As shown in Figure 1, connect the 3-wire cable leads to TB2 on the Main F/A PC Board as follows: Black wire to – )1 (TB2-6). Red wire to + )I (TB2-5). Gray wire to -# (TB2-4). To the Class A Board terminals, connect the external devices as shown in Figure 4 (see page 4). Connect cable the Zone Disconnect, Zone Suppressor Zone Disconnect/ Board as follows (see Figure 2). USED ZONE DISCONNECT SUPPRESSOR BD. 6 DISCONNECT SUPPRESSOR SD. 2 Manuals Online! – Suppressor Board (#562-657) or Zone Disconnect/Suppressor (#562-666) Black lead to – Red lead to + terminal. Gray leads (from left to right and in sequence) Zone Disconnect Board (#562-664) -)I terminals. Black and red leads: cut off or tape (not used). Gray leads (from left to right and in sequence) + throug

firealarmresources.com

4002 Fire Alarm Application Guide 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications Manuals Online! – were current as of publication, are subject other change without notice. l-1 56 (574-012) 1 96 OF CONTENTS …………………………………………………………………………….. Power of Expanded Simplex Programming of This Guide ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Rules of ESP ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ESP Programming Function Definitions Signals By Floor …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Signals By Zone …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Signal Operation Floor Above, Floor Below …………………………………………………………………………. Fan/Damper Operation Relay Control Bypass Control Switch Operation Tamper Zones Operation 1 /Stage 2 Operation Zoning Functions Delay and Abort Delay Functions Code ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Signal Operation Piezo Operation Operation Power Failure Operation Non-Default Operation Switch Non-Default Operation Point Matrix (Zone Grouping) Recall Operation Example A ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Example B ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Reset Special Operation Stagger Start Operation Successive Coding …………………………………………………………………………

3 ..Simplex Fire Alarm Pocket Guide 1.09 and Later) 1993 simplex Time l3BCOr*, co 2 Byte Op-code programmer syntax See RCU12120 Op-codes as required. for 2nd byte. ESP EDITOR MODE Mark positions DIP switch SWl. reads values of and SW2). Move DIP switch SW2-8 the LEFT position. Enter password The p~ezo will sound one of the following: Two pulses-Data Three pulses Five pulses stored ESP memory, and is correct. Data is stored ESP memory and is NOT correct. No data is stored the ESP memory. Ensure TROUBLE is ON. (CAUTION: System no a fire alarm system) Remove, and replace two left insert cards (blue). Enter ESP Eauations. ESP MODE Set DIP switches SW1 as marked. Set DIP switch SW2-8 Remove, TEST and the system and replace system operation. LED will ga OFF. cards. the RIGHT position. The system will perform a If not EDtTOR MODE, pelform 1 thru 5 of ESP Press and hold TO LOCATION for at 3 Listen 4 pulses on TROUBLE piezo and observe which will illuminate. Enter Data Base information. DATA BASE and ESP DATA BASE MODE Set DIP switches SW1 as marked. Set DIP switch SW2-8 TEST system operation. the RIGHT position system will periorm a and all LED will bo OFF (except POWER ON LED). ESP MODE ALARM OPCODE LOCATION IN MEMORY 01101001 ADD NUMBERS FOR 4 IDENTIFY MEMORY LOCATION. SIGNAL 1 AUX 1 MEMORY FAN CONTROL 1 TO CITY RELAY LIST OF PROGRAM BASE NOTE #l three sections, MSB, MIDDLE, and to select the following: – RCU 0, SWTCH 1 RCU 10, SWTCH 1 = TBL = RES = SIL = DRILL BASE NOTE #2 OFF/TIME ON = 114 Set = 7/l 2 Set BASE NOTE #3 signal control (S) and number coded rounds (RI and RO). = Silenceable = Non-Silenceable = Silenceable (Bit 3) (Bit 1) = 4 Rounds = 2 112 Set = 4Sec BASE NOTE #4 = AUX. 1 BYPASS SWITCH = AUX. 2 BYPASS SWITCH = CITY DISCONNECT SWITCH BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS ANR .w?. Switch SW1 = Alarm Velrification operation Alarm Venflcallon = Coded operation on Zone 1 (Cut JWll) = Waterflow operation Zone 7 (Signal 2 is non-silenceable) -4 = Sprinkler Supervision operation . ..Spnnkler super&Ion Zone 8 = Time Limit Cut Off operation Cutout after 10 minutes -7 = Silence Normal operation One mmute slgnal silence lnhlblt minutes slgnal silence lnhlbit minutes slgnal silence Inhibit = 2120 Connection ..Normal operation connectlon 1s present In system Switc

firealarmresources.com

[email protected] 4002 Harness Kit for CPU Upgrade of 740-792 Harness Upgrade Kit No. Nuts CPU to Battery 24V Unsupervised Power Harness CPU to Expansion Power Supply Transformer-to-CPU CPU to Power Supply replacing a 562-909 CPU Board with a 565-i 80 CPU Board and a 565-265 Power Supply Board, replace or the original harnesses with those from the 740-792 Harness Upgrade Kit in accordance with Figures 1 and 2. WITHIN 2 IN (50.8 MM) OF CONNECTOR CPU Board 1 ver) 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice, 12 94 HARNESS SUPPLY HARNESS HARNESSI XFMR ASSY PROVIDED WIRE NUTS) HARNESS CPU Board 2 12 94

Simplex Fire Alarm and Operating 1994 Simplex Xme Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of p&kation, are s&+xt change without notce. 3 94 your local Time Recorder Co. office listed in the Pages for Warranty & Information. OF CONTENTS 1 Operation Description Displavs Switches Condition …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. Condition Condition 4002 Optional Equipment Panel Operating Conditions Conditions Activation Test Procedures Test …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. TestTM ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… and Trouble Buzzer Test ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………. Evacuation Test (Drill) Representation Of Audible Zone Codes To Do In Case Of Trouble Troubleshooting Chart 2 Notes Checklist Box Installation Requirements For Fire Alarm Wiring Wiring Specifications and Wiring Peripheral Devices Pipe, Raceway, Cable Dev

Wimplex Life Alarm Alarm Systems List 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. SUPPlY BOARD (SEE NO% 11 BOARD SUPPLY BOARD MONITOR BOARD MONITOR BOARD EXPANSION BOARD DISCONNECT BOARD DISCONNECT BOARD WITH SUPPRESSION B (FORMERLY CLASS B) SUPPRESSION BOARD D (FORMERLY CLASS A) ADAPTER BOARD RELAY BOARD RELAY BOARD (4 RELAYS) AMP AUXILIARY RELAY BOARD CONTROL UNIT CONTROL STATUS CONTROL UNIT INTERFACE BOARD CONTROL BOARD POWER SUPPLY MODULE POWER SUPPLY REGULATED METER MODULE – DC ONLY METER MODULE – DC AMMETER ONLY GRAPHfC 7 PC BOARD B?ARD – SERVICE PARTS LIST CIRCUIT BOARDS -: _. _ –. .–JR-e # # NOTE 2) _ -. NOTE 4) 180 [email protected]%263 562-845 _____ [email protected] _ 111 _ l 562-W [email protected] .- 7 53 . . ..___ — – -/ _^ 1 I_ ___- -__-_-. – – ________._._ THE 562-909 CPU BOARD IS BACKWARD COMPATIBLE WITH THE PREVIOUSLY USED 562-784 CPU BOARD. THE 565-180 CPU BOARD IS NOT A REPLACEMENT FOR THE 562-909 CPU BOARD WITHOUT THE 565-265 SUPPLY BOARD AND 740-792 HARNESS UPGRADE KIT. THE 733-249,733-745,733-746,733-747, AND 733-785 HARNESSES SHOULD BE USED WITH THE 565-180 CPU ONLY. THE 565-265 POWER SUPPLY BOARD IS ONLY COMPATIBLE WITH THE 565-180 CPU BOARD. USE THE 562-779 BOARD WITH PRODUCT 4002-7102,4002-7002,4002-5003, 4002-5004. # # ZONES) ZONES) – 4-INCH MONITOR/CPU – FAN CONTROL PLUG – FOR COVERS – MONITOR MODULE – ZONE DISCONNECT MODULE – TROUBLE/INDICATOR MODULE – SIGNAL AND SWITCH SPACER BLOCK – 12 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) BLOCK – 16 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) BLOCK – 24 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) – RED – YELLOW – GREEN SPACER (GOES UNDER LED) TRIM PLATE – BEIGE TRIM PLATE -STAINLESS GROUP – SCU GROUP – RCU – SCU – RCU – RCU/SCU CITY & SWITCH ASSEMBLY 560 OHM, 1 NAT-l- 1,000 OHM, 1 WATT 10,000 OHM, l/2 WATT 3,300 OHM, 1 WATT RCU AND MOUNTING PLATES – FOR 562-909 CPU (2-INCH) – FOR 562-909 CPU (4-INCH) PLATE – FOR CPOINT PLATE – FOR 8-POINT PLATE – FOR 562-845, -847, -849, AND -851 PC BOARDS PLATE – FOR 562-797, A & B) ZONE MODULES A&B) ZONE MODULES AND -885 PC BOARDS

sBSimplex Network the Media Fiber Card must follow the instructions below to avoid damage to fiber optic cables during installation of the Fiber Optic Cards. The position of the plastic mounting screw is also shown. The Cable Clamps and Plastic Mounting are part of shipping group (Part No. 748-318). To accomplish the following steps, you must remove power from the unit and open the Display Door of the Controller. When attaching the Network Modular PC Board hardware, you must mount the plastic screw in the lower left of the board. See the illustration below. This placement avoids a short with the optic cable connectors. Attach the two cable clamps (adhesive back) where shown in the illustration below. To avoid damage to the fiber optic cables, use a gradual radius when bending the cables. Do not crimp cables. Feed the cables through the clamps and attach to Media Fiber Optic Card. See the illustration below. Clamp (2) Screw Open Optic Cables 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner. MA 014414001 (574-067) 11 94

4002 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATING AN ALARM/TROUBLE CONDITION SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND ALWAYS COMES FIRST! during a fire depend upon practices. sure you know what do. TO OPERATE THE PANEL DURING AN ALARM SITUATION: the zone in alarm via the control panel indicators. station activated, smoke detector activated, etc.). zone to determine cause of the alarm After all occupants are evacuated, unlock and open the panel door. To silence signals, press the alarm silence push button. are silenced, alarm silenced LED illuminates, and any red zone indicator a steady illumination. was flashing another alarm is reported from another zone, the alarm signals sound again, zone in alarm flashes until the alarm alarm silenced LED turns OFF, and the red indicator representing are again silenced. TO RESET THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOiLOWING AN ALARM CONDITION: When the alarm situation has been cleared, or replace all affected alarm-initiating devices stations detectors) accordance with the instructions provided with each device. Press and hold the SYSTEM RESET switch until LEDs illuminate The trouble buzzer sounds for 2 seconds and LEDs illuminate Note below.) approximately 5 seconds. TO DO IN CASE OF TROUBLE: Notify appropriate personnel. Unlock and open panel door. assistance. : The following options affect the system: tone device is sounding, press the trouble silence push button. Refer to the 4002 Customer manual for additional or call a local Simplex Branch Office WaterflowSprinkler you cannot silence an alarm or reset the system if water is flowing in the sprinkler Coded On Zone 1 – you cannot silence the signals while a code is being transmitted. – cannot silence an alarm or reset the system until the specified period has Silence ESP (Expanded Simplex Programming) Custom Project Specific Software Programming INSTRUCTIONS ARE /NTENDED TO BE FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE CONTROL PANEL FOR REFERENCE. to the Customer a detailed description of system operation. 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 speciflcaiions other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice.

Wimplex Life Alarm Alarm Systems List 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – SUPPlY BOARD (SEE NO% 11 BOARD SUPPLY BOARD MONITOR BOARD MONITOR BOARD EXPANSION BOARD DISCONNECT BOARD DISCONNECT BOARD WITH SUPPRESSION B (FORMERLY CLASS B) SUPPRESSION BOARD D (FORMERLY CLASS A) ADAPTER BOARD RELAY BOARD RELAY BOARD (4 RELAYS) AMP AUXILIARY RELAY BOARD CONTROL UNIT CONTROL STATUS CONTROL UNIT INTERFACE BOARD CONTROL BOARD POWER SUPPLY MODULE POWER SUPPLY REGULATED METER MODULE – DC ONLY METER MODULE – DC AMMETER ONLY GRAPHfC 7 PC BOARD B?ARD – SERVICE PARTS LIST CIRCUIT BOARDS -: _. _ –. .–JR-e # # NOTE 2) _ -. NOTE 4) 180 [email protected]%263 562-845 _____ [email protected] _ 111 _ l 562-W [email protected] .- 7 53 . . ..___ — – -/ _^ 1 I_ ___- -__-_-. – – ________._._ THE 562-909 CPU BOARD IS BACKWARD COMPATIBLE WITH THE PREVIOUSLY USED 562-784 CPU BOARD. THE 565-180 CPU BOARD IS NOT A REPLACEMENT FOR THE 562-909 CPU BOARD WITHOUT THE 565-265 SUPPLY BOARD AND 740-792 HARNESS UPGRADE KIT. THE 733-249,733-745,733-746,733-747, AND 733-785 HARNESSES SHOULD BE USED WITH THE 565-180 CPU ONLY. THE 565-265 POWER SUPPLY BOARD IS ONLY COMPATIBLE WITH THE 565-180 CPU BOARD. USE THE 562-779 BOARD WITH PRODUCT 4002-7102,4002-7002,4002-5003, 4002-5004. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – # # ZONES) ZONES) – 4-INCH MONITOR/CPU – FAN CONTROL PLUG – FOR COVERS – MONITOR MODULE – ZONE DISCONNECT MODULE – TROUBLE/INDICATOR MODULE – SIGNAL AND SWITCH SPACER BLOCK – 12 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) BLOCK – 16 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) BLOCK – 24 PLACES (562-909 BOARD) – RED – YELLOW – GREEN SPACER (GOES UNDER LED) TRIM PLATE – BEIGE TRIM PLATE -STAINLESS GROUP – SCU GROUP – RCU – SCU – RCU – RCU/SCU CITY & SWITCH ASSEMBLY 560 OHM, 1 NAT-l- 1,000 OHM, 1 WATT 10,000 OHM, l/2 WATT 3,300 OHM, 1 WATT RCU AND MOUNTING PLATES – FOR 562-909 CPU (2-INCH) – FOR 562-909 CPU (4-INCH) PLATE – FOR CPOINT PLATE – FOR 8-POINT PLATE – FOR 562-845, -847, -849, AND -851 PC BOARDS PLATE – FOR 562-797, A & B) ZONE MODULES A&B) ZONE MODULES AND -885 PC BOARDS

a Simplex Fire Alarm Servict Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS No. ………………………………………………………………………… Points …………………………………………………………. …………………………………………… Blocks.. …………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………… Switches.. …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………….. CPU …………………………………………………………. ..:. …………………………………………………. Features.. ………………………………………………. Zone Module.. ………………………………………………… Block.. ………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………. Zone Module.. ………………………………………………… Blocks.. ………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………. and SPR2). …………………………… Expansion Module.. ………………………………………….. Block.. ………………………………………………….. ………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………………. Relay Board.. ……………………………………………….. Blocks.. ………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………………. Disconnect/Suppression Module …………………………. Block.. ………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………….. Fan Control Module and RCUs/SCUs, Publication FA4-51-154. Manuals Online! – (see Figure 1) POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 Blocks Volts 24 Volts Volt Common TBl- Initiating Device Circuits (monitor zones) (TBl-1 B (formerly Class B) (f.w.d. 841-669, pg. 6) Terminate 3.3k E.O.L. resistor D (formerly Class A) (f.w.d. 841-669, pg. 8) coded manual station exists on zone 1, cut JW-11 (f.w.d. pg. 21) the appropriate wiring (f.w.d. 841-669, pg. 21) if the zone is connected a: Disconnect Module Suppression Module Zone Disconnect/Suppression Module Detector Power, TB2-I TB2-4 thru -12 (see Figure 2) & Annunciator Volt detectors bring 120 Volts into TB2-1 (Cut Volt detectors use TB2-2 ( + ) and TB2-3 ( -) 10 v 2 pg. 7) thru -11 is a pulse (-) for the zone in alarm Supervised Annunciator annunciator wiring (f.w.d. 841-669, pg. 18) is a ( + ) voltage 841-669, pg. annunciator Manuals Online! – POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 Manuals Onl

4002 Fire Alarm 1.09 and Later) 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specilications other were current as of publication, are subject change wlthout notlce. (574-011) 7 94 following steps are recommended learning ESP Programming the 4002 fire alarm system. ESP PROGRAMMING Read the ESP Programming Guide (FA4-41-153) exercises/situations the ESP Programming Guide on your 4002 fire alarm Perform Use.the Use the Programming Sheet No. M-1376) and the Data Base Programming Sheet No. M-l 377) when specified the ESP Programming Guide. Use the ESP Op-Code Listing when specified the ESP Programming Guide. System Program Work Order (Form No. M-1378), which is completed by sales personnel, determine your ESP Programming Compare examples examples the ESP Application Guide the ESP Application Guide to fit your programming and output statements as required. Extract portions such as delay or timing functions Applications as required. with your programming Change existing Practice writing ESP Programs which panel to insure proper operation. your customer applications. Test each ESP Program on your Write all ESP Programs on your Demo panel. Test each equation before removing (U26) from your panel. operation. Modify your ESP Program as required. the NOVRAM the customer panel, then test each equation NOVRAM insure OF CONTENTS .O ESP Programming Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . … 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ……………….. 5 Overview CPU Module . …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. .l Editor ..! ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………….. .:,. …………………………………………………………………………………………………. Location Indicators Data Base Edit Indicator Op-Code Present Location Switches Switch SW2 Location Switch SW1 Editor Pushbuttons Pushbutton Data Pushbutton To Location Pushbutton Date Pushbutton . ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Programming Fire Alarm the 4002 ESP 1992 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are sublect change without notice. (574-027) 9 92 OF CONTENTS Programming Kit .,.,,..,..,….,,..,.,,.,….,,.,….,..,…………………………… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 a New Job ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… New Job File Name and Job Header the Editor and Entering ESP Equations ……………………………………………………………………………………. Program ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Program Errors.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. the Data Base ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Non-general Alarm Monitor Zones ………………………………………………………………………………………….. Non-latching Monitor Zones … ………………………………………………………………………………………………… Monitor Zone Sensing Output List Specifier Coding Duty Cycle.. ……………………………………………………………. PNIS Specifier Master Code ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Non-default On-board Switches Non-default RCU/2120 Switches the Job ………………………………………………………… Computer the ESP Program the ESP Program Mode.. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. the Interface Module and the 4002 Panel ………………………………………………….. the 4002 Panel.. ………………………………………………………………………………….. the 4002 Panel. …………………………………………………………………… ………. 14 Computer 2 a Job that was Previously Entered and Built via the 4002 Programmer.. Procedures.. the ESP Editor Mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Loading the ESP Program the 4002 Panel ………………………………………………………………………. Previous and Revised ESP Programs.. the 4002 Panel into the Computer.. Revised ESP Program 3 a Job that was Previously Enter

4002 Life Alarm Alarm Systems 1994 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specificallons and other information shown were current as of pubkatlon, and are subject to change without notice. Manuals Online! – 6 94 when making qualified Simplex Representa- be performed and AC power system, system, When power FIRST is recommended equrpment comply with equipment and found Rules, which are designed be required a which case correct whatever interference. not and can radiate used may cause has a Class A of Part 15 of provide Subpart operated cause user at his own expense be Manuals Online! – OF CONTENTS 1 – Functional Description System Description Number Size Unit.. Monitor Zones Special Monitor Zone Characteristics – Zone 1 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Switch – Zone 8 …………………………………………………………………………………………………… Zone 7 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Zones Alarm Relays Detector Power Output Outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Circuit Master Box …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Contact Output Outputs Charger Supply Bus …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2 Size Unit Configuration

firealarmresources.com

Approved to ANSI/UL 864, Control Unit Accessory CAN/ULC S527; to FM Standards; CSFM Listed* digital voice message capability to non-voice alarm control panels: Remote booster amplifiers are available to expand area or extend to multiple notification areas Activate up to 8 separate messages by direct to fire alarm control panel NACs using the Interface Module option, or via supervised to relay contact closures 4003EC Voice Control Panel status (alarm, system or separate AC trouble) is via isolated contact allowing compatibility with a wide range of brand and other fire alarm systems Multiple 4003EC control panels can be interconnected system-wide Emergency Communication Systems Notification Systems (MNS) message using Simplex fire alarm Network node Broadcast live messages using the internal microphone by using a remote microphone; up to 18 remote are supported for compatibility with 4-021-01 (Unified Facilities Criteria) requirements Select from 8 digitally pre-recorded messages using control panel switches or controlled from the fire control panel; select a pre-tone and include a post if desired Custom messages can be ordered separately (as chip sets), or recorded directly at the panel external equipment new messages override messages) control panel details: Efficient Class D amplifier design provides 40 W @ or 70.7 VRMS with power-limited output One general alarm Class B audio NAC rated at 40 W; be optionally expanded to 4, Class B NACs or 2, A NACs using a Class A/B Splitter One general alarm Class B, 2 A strobe NAC with output formatted to synchronize either Simplex Cooper Notification (Wheelock) strobes (not mixed) Internal push-to-talk microphone and individual tone/message controls for convenient operator Strobe circuit activation is DIP switch selectable for recorded message, for microphone use, and for input Multiple connections are available for auxiliary output 24 VDC, 1/2 A maximum Internal battery charger for up to 12 Ah batteries in or up to 33 Ah batteries in a separate cabinet Removable terminal blocks for easy wiring Beige or red cabinet for surface mounting ULC listed models include low battery cutoff board booster amplifier details: Remote booster amplifiers are available with 80 W 2, 2 A strobe circuits), 160 W, and 320 W; each an efficient Class D amplifier design Fire Alarm Controls Communication Systems and Mass Systems; 4003EC Voice Control Panels Voice Control Panel booster amplifier details (Continued): Wiring options allow limited or detailed control with to AC power failure and non-fire alarm modes Wiring options allow control of non-alarm audio when on battery standby and selection of main trouble contacts or AC trouble contacts Booster amplifiers support local connection of paging microphones Removable terminal blocks for easy wiring Beige or red cabinet for surface mounting ULC listed models include low battery cutoff board optional features: Upgrade kit to support ten minute message timeout for compatibility with the audible message specifications in UFC 4-021-01 Supervised remote microphones with key switch beige or red for alarm paging, black for general Local Operating Console (LOC) providing enclosed and switch control for the 8 panel messages; UFC 4-021-01 requirements for local control Application Note: For control from a Wide Area System, connect audio (1 VRMS, 600 and closure wiring to an available input port on a Remote Microphone Expansion Module Four circuit NAC module, Class A or Class B for or control panel allows zone wiring separation Extensive non-fire alarm features are available for ringer tone activation, telephone page input, and music Non-fire alarm paging includes zone control and zone adjustments that are bypassed when the

HOW TO OPERATE A 4003 VOICE CONTROL PANEL USED AS A STAND-ALONE AUDIO PANEL MODE) SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST! taken during a fire depend upon local practices. Be sure you know what to do. TO INITIATE AN ALL CLEAR TO OPERATE MICROPHONE Remove mike from enclosure and (and hold) microphone switch. Chime tone will sound three times. Wait for green TO TALK to light. Make appropriate announcement. Releasing microphone switch tone or message if tone or was previously selected. When finished, replace mike in TO INITIATE AN SIGNAL TO EVACUATE ALL AREAS: Flip MANUAL EVAC switch. Red EVAC LED lights indicate that EVAC message is on all speakers. To make an announcement with see to Operate instructions shown TO SILENCE AN SIGNAL To silence speakers, flip up EVAC switch again. Red EVAC LED turns and speakers silence. EVAC EVAC CLEAR LED CLEAR SWITCH DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS TALK SWITCH TO TALK LED TO ALL AREAS: Flip up ALL switch. Red CLEAR LED lights to that ALL CLEAR is playing on all To silence speakers, flip up ALL switch again. Red CLEAR LED turns OFF speakers silence. YOUR SYSTEM SWITCH DOES NOT THIS SHEET, CONSULT FOR SPECIFIC SIMPLEX IS LISTED THE YELLOW PAGES. CASE OF TROUBLE, NOTIFY: ________________________ ________________________ ____________________ NO.: ___________________ INSTRUCTIONS ARE INTENDED TO BE FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE VOICE CONTROL PANEL FOR READY REFERENCE. Voice Control Panel Installation/Operating Instructions for detailed operating instructions. Manuals Online! – 1993 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. (574-040) Ed 11 93 TO OPERATE A 4003 VOICE CONTROL PANEL USED WITH A HOST FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL MODE OR ADJUNCT MODE) SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU ALWAYS COMES FIRST! taken during a fire depend upon local practices. Be sure you know what to do. TO INITIATE AN ALL CLEAR TO OPERATE MICROPHONE Remove mike from enclosure and (and hold) microphone switch. Chime tone will sound three times. Wait for green TO TALK to light. Make appropriate announcement. Releasing microphone switch tone or message if Alarm When finished, replace mike in TO INITIATE AN SIGNAL TO EVACUATE ALL AREAS: Flip MANUAL EVAC switch. Red EVAC LED lights indicate that EVAC message is on all speakers. To make an announcement with see to Operate instructions shown TO SILENCE ALARM silence speakers, perform host silence procedure at host Fire Control Panel. EVAC EVAC CLEAR LED CLEAR SWITCH DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS TALK SWITCH TO TALK LED TO ALL AREAS: Flip up ALL switch. Red CLEAR LED lights to that ALL CLEAR is playing on all To silence speakers, flip up ALL switch again. Red CLEAR LED turns OFF speakers silence. YOUR SYSTEM SWITCH DOES NOT THIS SHEET, CONSULT

Voice Control Panel and Operating Instructions A NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a with the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, are designed to provide reasonable protection against such when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may required to correct the interference. of Contents Overview……………………………………………………………………………1 ………………………………………………………………………………..1 Features ………………………………………………………………………2 Features ……………………………………………………………………….2 Components …………………………………………………………………..3 Modules ……………………………………………………………………………..3 VCP Configurations …………………………………………………………….3 Slave Configuration……………………………………………………………..4 Adjunct Configuration…………………………………………………..5 Alone Paging …………………………………………………………………….6 and Tone Initiation ……………………………………………………………7 Slave …………………………………………………………………………………7 Configuration…………………………………………………………………..7 Tone Options………………………………………………………………..8 Code Selection …………………………………………………………….9 Message Selection……………………………………………………………..9 Pre-tone …………………………………………………………………..9 Test Phrases ……………………………………………………………………..9 and Firmware………………………………………………………………..10 Interconnections ………………………………………………………………..10 Controller Assembly Description ……………………………………………11 Switch ……………………………………………………………………………….11 Programming………………………………………………………………12 Generation and Routing…………………………………………….12 ……………………………………………………………………….12 Message Initiation………………………………………………………12 Initiation Via Switches ………………………………………………….12 EVAC Switch………………………………………………………………13 CLEAR Switch ……………………………………………………………………13 Indications…………………………………………………………………….13 Activation………………………………………………………………..13 Microphone ………………………………………………………………….13 Descriptions ………………………………………………………………….14 SIGcard Description…………………………………………………………..14 Power Supply Descripti

4003 Voice Control Panel NAC Power Extender List Voice Control Panel Figure 1 the on reverse side of this sheet. For part descriptions by a number, reference the corresponding number in Figure 1. Number Assembly Transformer Assembly, Controller to Amplifier Resistor for Signal Circuits (10K, 1/2W) Circuit Signal Board, Class B (Non-Isolated) Circuit Signal Board, Class A (Non-Isolated) Circuit Signal Board, Class B (Isolation Capable) Circuit Signal Board, Class A (Isolation Capable) 3 Amp for Signal Circuits Battery Controller Assembly to Amplifier Assembly Power Supply to Amplifier to Signal to Controller Signal Power for Additional Signal Card Signal Retainer Assembly Supply Board (AC Power Landed On Terminals)* Supply Board (AC Power Wired to Transformer)** Group Assembly, 120 VAC (Connector Interface)* Assembly, 240 VAC (Connector Interface)* Assembly, 120 VAC (Hardwire Interface)** Assembly, 240 VAC (Hardwire Interface)** Controller Board units are installed using modular connectors. Field modifications are necessary for purposes. units are installed using hardwire connections for the AC power input. Modular are used for the power supply board input. Field modifications are necessary for purposes. 1999 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A Door 1. Voice Control Panel (Exploded) Door 2. NAC Power Extender (Exploded) NAC Power Extender Figure 2 the on reverse side of this sheet. For part descriptions by a number, reference the corresponding number in Figure 2. Number Detect Module Resistor for Signal Circuits (10K, 1/2W) Circuit Signal Board, Class A (Isolation Capable) Circuit Signal Board, Class B (Isolation Capable) Circuit Signal Board, Class A (Non-Isolated) Circuit Signal Board, Class B (Non-Isolated) 3 Amp for Signal Circuits Battery Earth Detect Module to Power Supply Interconnect (3.3K Ohm Resistor) Interconnect (Diode, 18 Volt Zener) Interconnect (Diode, 1N4004) Power Signal Signal Power for Additional Signal Card Supply Board (AC Power Landed On Terminals)* Supply Board (AC Power Wired to Transformer)** Group, Standard System Group, For Earth Detect Module Board Bracket Assembly, 120 VAC (Connector Interface)* Assembly, 240 VAC (Connector Interface)* Assembly, 120 VAC (Hardwire Interface)** Assembly, 240 VAC (Hardwire Interface)** units are installed using modular connectors. Field modifications are necessary for purposes. units are installed using hardwire connections for the AC power input. Modular are used for the power supply board input. Field modifications are necessary for purposes. A

CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Fire Alarm Controls Voice/Alarm Communications Equipment Series Voice Control Panels voice and tone functions to non-voice fire control panels: Alarms received from a host panel notification appliance (NAC) activate general alarm operation Manual operation also sends an alarm to a host panel device circuit (IDC) Earth fault detection is maintained by host panel Compatible with Simplex model 4004, 4005, 4006, or 4010 Also compatible for retrofit to installed Simplex model 4001, 4002, and 4020 features: Amplifier provides 75 W @ 25 VRMS with output microphone with manual controls Four general alarm Class A or Class B NACs Programmable tone and message sequence selection beige cabinet included features: Supervised remote microphone with keyswitch control Additional four circuit general alarm NAC card, as Class A or Class B; for separate control of notification appliances (typically strobes) Custom digitally recorded messages Available with 240 VAC input voltage listed to Standard 864 non-voice fire alarm control panels require the of voice and tone generation, Simplex 4003 Control Panels conveniently supply the required Functions include: on-board tone generation and announcements, 75W of amplifier power, supervised audio Notification Appliance Circuits and an internal microphone with local control. Operation is accessible by opening the locked door and revealing operating switches, status the local microphone, and the microphone control. of the Remote Microphone option is secured by of a keyswitch. This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 6911-0026:196 allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. It is to re-examination, revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New Department of Buildings MEA35-93E. FM approval requires operation with 120 VAC voltage. This product was not ULC listed as of document revision date. Additional listings be applicable, contact Simplex for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. and Speaker/Visible appliances NAC (4 NACs) appliances Voice Panel VOICE CONTROL PANEL IDC wiring NAC wiring VDC NAC from Expansion Module (4 NACs) control wiring for Expansion Module AND C. POWER Alarm Panel Series Voice Control Panel Wiring Reference (Continued) NAC Option. An optional, four circuit NAC module be installed in the 4003 to provide power for 24 VDC appliances. The expansion NAC is controlled a second NAC input from the host panel. Available power depends on audio power used, see table on 3. Applications Reference 4003 connects as the end-of-line device to a NAC and a dedicated IDC from the host fire control panel. Alarms from the host panel will a general alarm to the four, 4003 NACs to respond common tones and messages as selected. The IDC monitors the 4003 for system troubles and selection of the manual evacuation message to send an alarm signal to the host panel. panels require a dedicated Monitor ZAM for IDC connection.) Response. Alarm response can be selected to continuous tones, follow coded NAC input control, or play digitally pre-recorded messages with a combination of digitally generated tones. Panel Silence and Reset. Alarm Signal Silence Alarm Reset are performed at the host panel.

Cautions and Warnings Fire Alarm Connect Card and DACT Module Installation Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled components wrapped in anti-static material at all times. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference when operated in a commercial Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take measures may be required to correct the interference. 4004 Fire Alarm System is capable of supporting either one City Connect (565-577, 565-999, or 566-078) or one DACT module. This publication the procedure for installing a city connect card into a 4004 Panel. It also the procedure for re-installing a 2080-9044 DACT into a 4004 Panel for jobs. new DACT installations use the 4004-9810 DACT (565-626). Refer to the Closure DACT (Digital Alarm Communication Transmitter) Installation Instructions (574-049) for more information on the 4004-9810 Page # Connect Card Installation Module Installation This Publication following topics are covered in this publication: 1999 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. B Connect Card Installation Circuit 1 plugs and P3) all wiring information, use the 4004 Field Wiring Diagram (841-992). Also the Contractor Wiring Termination Label (519-698) inside the 4004 Panel. The label shows the following information: The installation location of the city connect card. The location of the wiring harness. Harness interconnection with the system card. The location of the city disconnect switches. Programming information necessary to configure the card. mount the city connect card, follow Steps 1 through 3 while referring to 1. Disconnect 4004 Panel power at the breaker before the city connect card. Remove the city connect card from the packing material. the city connect card by securing it with four #6 Torx screws Connect the Cable Harness (733-875) from the City Connect Card (P1) to System Board (P5). or operation plug (P6) 1 1 CITY1- CITY2+ CITY2- 1. City Connect Card Circuit 2 plugs and P5) Switches and SW2) on 565-577 and only. The are not present 566-078. on next page Connect Card Installation, Continued Settings city connect card has jumper settings that select either the Remote Station Polarity) Interface (see Table 1), which is the default jumper setting the factory, or the Municipal Master (Local Energy) Interface. Jumper to configure the city connect card for the Remote Station Interface or Municipal Master Interface are listed below. The city connect card has that illustrates the jumpers and selectable configurations = Reverse Polarity, = Local Energy). 1. Jumper Settings Master Energy) Station Polarity) to P2-2 to P3-8 to P3-10 to P4-2 to P5-8 to P5-10 to P2-3

Fire Alarm Instructions C and Trademarks Simplex Time Recorder Co., 1999. All rights reserved. in the United States of America. and Warnings in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent of Time Recorder Company. WALK TEST system test is protected under U.S. Patent # 4,725,818. NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. of Contents 1 4004 System Overview ……………………………………………………………………………..1-1 ………………………………………………………………………1-2 ………………………………………………………………………………..1-2 Input ………………………………………………………………………….1-2 Standby…………………………………………………………………….1-2 System Features …………………………………………………………..1-2 System Diagram……………………………………………………………1-3 2 Requriments and Accessories Requirments…………………………………………………………2-1 Requirements……………………………………………………….2-2 Accessories …………………………………………………………….2-2 3 Installation 4 Operating Instructions Box …………………………………………………………………………….3-1 …………………………………………………………………………………3-2 Modules…………………………………………………………………..3-2 Settings/Service Switches………………………………………….3-9 Instructions ……………………………………………………3-11 Panel Operation……………………………………………………………4-1 Key Definitions ………………………………………………………..4-1 Initialization (Power-Up) ……………………………………………..4-3 Conditions ………………………………………………………….4-4 Test…………………………………………………………………………….4-4 Testing (Fire Drills)…………………………………………………….4-4 Operating Instructions…………………………………………..4-5 5 Glossary of Terms 6 4004 Battery Selection Selection …………………………………………………………………..6-1 Selection Calculation ………………………………………………….6-2 1 System Overview 4004 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) is a general alarm, battery-backed, supervised system capable of operating two Notification Appliance (NACs) and monitoring two Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs) with capability of up to 8-IDCs. The 4004 FACP is capable of controlling auxiliary equipment such as fire doors and fans during fire condition. The 4004 provide audible and visible indications during Fire Supervisory, or Trouble conditions. If any of these conditions occur, the sounds the appropriate notification appliance(s) and flashes the display (the red ALARM ZONE display for fire alarm zone the yellow display for trouble indication, and the LED for

and Warnings Fire Alarm I/O Cards Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference when operated in a commercial Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take measures may be required to correct the interference. publication shows how to install and configure the 4004 Fire Alarm Cards which are listed below: 4004-9802 2-Point IDC (Low Current) Expander Card (Part No. 565-575) 4004-9804 4-Point IDC (Low Current) Expander Card (Part No. 565-589) 4004-9822 2-Point IDC/Relay Base (High Current) Card (Part No. 565-612) 4004-9824 4-Point IDC/Relay Base (High Current) Card (Part No. 565-613) 4004-9806 Class A Adapter Card (Part No. 565-585 or 565-789) 4004-9808 Annunciator Interface Card (Part No. 565-579) this Publication publication discusses the following topics: Page # IDC Card(s) Installation Card Installation A Adapter Card Installation 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A I/O Cards Installation Installation IDC Card(s) Power down the 4004 before installing an I/O card. the card from the packing material and use the appropriate paragraph to install any of the above cards into the 4004 panel. For all wiring use the Field Wiring Diagram 841-992. Possible locations for the are shown inside the 4004 door panel on the Contractor Wiring Label 519-698. The label illustrates the card-to-card connections, disconnect switch locations, and the programming information necessary to the added cards to the system. 2-Point and 4-Point IDC card locations are interchangeable. Four installations require a 2-point IDC card and six or eight circuit require a 4-point IDC card. a 2-Point or 4-Point IDC card as follows: 2-Point IDC Card (Low or High Current) – Carefully slide the 2- IDC expansion card P1 connector into the J3 connector of the card or the J3 connector of the 4-Point IDC expansion card. 4-Point IDC Card (Low or High Current) – Carefully slide the 4- IDC expansion card P1 connector into the J3 connector of the card or the J2 connector of the 2-Point IDC expansion card. Secure the card(s) to the 4004 mounting plate using the four supplied No. 6 screws for each IDC expansion card. Before programming the added IDC card(s), ensure that the zone switches are in the position. If open circuit on respective AUX output is desired, clip the appropriate IDC Card IDC Card (Zone 1) (Zone 2) (Zone 1) (Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Zone 4) The low current 2-Point/4-Point IDC card(s) use a 6.8k ohm End-of-Line (EOLR) for Class B operation. The high current 2-Point/4-Point card(s) use a 3.3k ohm EOLR for Class B operation. All IDC card can be converted to Class A operation by adding a Class A card (see installation instructions on page 3). Power-up t

4004 Fire Alarm List Shown Shown Shown NO. Box Assembly (Beige) Box Assembly (Red) Assembly (Beige) Assembly (Red) Pin Post Ground Strap Harness Harness Circuit Cable Assembly Interface Cable 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A NO. Board IDC Module IDC Module (High-Current Relay Base Module) IDC Module IDC Module (High-Current Relay Base Module) Connect Module Interface Module A Adapter Module PC Board Boards Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Assembly, 120 VAC Assembly, 220/240 VAC Assembly 11,00 mf Overlay Window Panel Wiring Termination Label Plate Group Keys Termination Label 10 K, 1/2 W 2.2 K, 1/2 W 6.8 K, 1/2 W 680 Ohm, 1/2 W 3.3 K, 1/2 W Firmware Chip Universal Extraction Tool A

4004 FIRE ALARM CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATING AN ALARM/SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE SAFETY, AS WELL AS THE SAFETY OF THOSE YOU, ALWAYS COMES FIRST. during you know what fire depend do. SILENCE KEY RESET KEY OPERATION – SUPERVISORY* TROUBLE CONDITION Displays Flashing. Tone On Flashing to Acknowledge Abnormal Condition Unlock and open the fire alarm control panel door. Read the (Fire Alarm Zone, Trouble, or both); the display(s) will the zone number for the zones with abnormal Press the (Acknowledge) key located on the User Panel until the tone alert (piezo) is silenced. Fire Alarm and Trouble conditions on the system displays; through system. You can also manually scroll through the status of alarm(s) and trouble(s) by using key. list of Fire Alarm Zone(s) and Trouble(s) the system are displays automatically list to You can only view Supervisory conditions by manually when the yellow Supervisory LED flashes. Use the key to review the status of Supervisory points, points are displayed after the alarm points and any system troubles. Review the Fire Alarm Zone and Trouble Display(s). Summon personnel on the red Fire Alarm Zone Display (Supervisory = zone with decimal point). respond. Supervisory conditions OPERATION to Silence Alarm Signals SILENCE key on the user interface panel. The SILENCED LED turns on and remains on steady. to Reset the System Restore/replace all affected devices (smoke alarms, pull etc.) in accordance with the instructions provided with device. Press the RESET key. System resets within 15 seconds. Dash (-) is displayed on the Fire Alarm Zone and Trouble Displays while system is in progress. After 15 seconds, the system is normal (cleared displays and LEDs with the POWER LED illuminated). displays Lamp Test the key for five seconds. The red and yellow seven-segment displays (all segments), piezo, Power On, Alarm Silenced, and Supervisory turn on and remain on until the key is released. case of trouble, notify: # BNSTRUCTIONS ARE INTENDED TO E FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO THE PANEL FCR READY REFERENCE. OPERATBNG BNSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILED OPERATION. 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publtcatlon. are subject change wlthout not~ce 11 95

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Control Fire Alarm Systems 4004R Suppression Releasing Panel for Automatic Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler Control alarm control panel designed specifically for release operation with: Four initiating device circuits (IDCs) Two notification appliance circuits (NACs) Two releasing appliance circuits (RACs) Two special purpose monitor inputs (SPMs) that accept release request and manual abort request for Release systems, and waterflow and supervisory Preaction or Deluge systems Three auxiliary relays with selectable functions Easily selected activity timing options release operation includes: Automatic extinguishing release Deluge and preaction sprinkler system release Dual or single hazard area protection Combined agent release and preaction operation** are selectable for cross-zoning or for activation a single detection input Short circuit RAC supervision Compatible with Listed/Approved 24 VDC or 12 VDC series connected actuators Escalation of Events: Single Audible Appliance Tone: Stage 1 activates or 20 bpm March Time pattern; Stage 2 120 bpm March Time pattern to indicate timer active; Release activates On Steady to release timer expired and actuator is activated Dual Audible Appliance Control** (Single Hazard): 2 provides a third NAC for dedicated Stage 1 Bell NACs 1 & 2 indicate release as On Steady interface provides: Status LEDs per circuit for Alarm, Trouble, and (where appropriate) Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset Operating mode selection and timer selections when in mode system components: Coil supervision module 2081-9046, one per RAC Maintenance Switch, one per RAC Abort Switch to UL Standard 864 and ULC Standard S527 Dedicated for Suppression Release. 4004R Release Panels provide conventional fire alarm circuits and are equipped with the features required a wide variety of single or dual hazard suppression release Capabilities include automatic extinguishing release and deluge and preaction sprinkler control. Requires Software Revision 4.01 or higher. discharge path NAC+ NAC- SUPERVISION MODULE (2 AMP) 2081-9046 INSTRUCTIONS 574-437 REV 1/4″ SEPARATION POWER LIMITED AND NONPOWER (YEL/BLK) WIRING CODE: T IME RECORDER CO. GARDNER MA. USA Switch SUPPRESSION / DISABLE 1 SUPPRESSION ABORT AND HOLD 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 Silenced Trouble Release 5 Trouble Release 6 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble Released Fault Active Power Disconnect AND C. POWER 2, 3, and 4 2 Suppression Release Panel Suppression Release Panel System Reference Drawing (Continued) Flexible I/O Capabilities. Four IDCs allow for either separately monitored zones or two, cross-zoned Two SPMs allow dedicated manual inputs for or abort; for waterflow and supervisory, or and pressure, depending on system type. Two appliance circuits (RACs) supervise to the coils and activate the actuators when required. The NACs and the three panel auxiliary relays provide condition information. Program Selections. The operator panel has a mode that allows selection of panel operation and detailed operating selections using an easily sequential programming operation. Log. The last 50 events are stored in memory. This information is accessed by a technician computer to the service port is also used to set the date and time. Feature Description Op

Cautions and Warnings Relay Module Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. FREQUENCY ENERGY This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference when operated in a commercial Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take measures may be required to correct the interference. publication shows how to install the 4004-9803 Relay Module (566-058) into 4004 Fire Alarm System. Only one of these modules can be installed in a 4004 Alarm System. The 4004 Fire Alarm System supports either a Relay Module or 4004-9810 Internal DACT or or -9829 City Circuit Module. reference information on installing the relay module, refer to the Contractor Termination Label (519-698) on the 4004 Door Panel. This Publication publication covers the following topics. Page # Module Parts 1. 742-311 Service Parts List Number Module Harness Screws 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. B Relay Module 4004-9803 Relay Module connects with a ribbon harness (733-952) to the board of the 4004 Fire Alarm System. The relay module provides to external devices through three dry relay contacts, which provide for Supervisory, and Trouble reporting. See Figure 1 below for connector applications requiring relay contact outputs for Alarm, Supervisory and the 4004-9803 Relay Module converts the open collector City/DACT into individual relay outputs that can be jumper selectable as either Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC). relay output is rated at 2A @ 32 VDC maximum and is for controlling power a power limited fire alarm power supply listed for the application. The Alarm activates on an alarm condition until reset. The Supervisory relay activates on supervisory condition until clear. The Trouble relay activates on a trouble until clear. Each relay has an LED to indicate its ON/OFF status. The relay module has dry relays. There are no markings on board or terminal block. P1, P2, and P3 are shown in Normally Closed position. 1 of P1, P2, and P3 is the pin on the relay module. 1 ALARM 1. 4004-9803 Relay Module the Relay Module the information in Table 2 to set the jumper positions for relays K1, K2, and to utilize Normally Open (NO)/Normally Closed (NC) contact positions. 2. Jumper Positions for NO and NC Relay Contacts Open Closed K1 (Alarm) K2 (Supervisory) K3 (Trouble) to P1-3 to P2-3 to P3-3 to P1-2 to P2-2 to P3-2 relay module (circled in Figure 2) installs into a hardware slot located to the of the 4004 System Board. Use Steps 1 through 9 to mount the relay module. Disconnect battery power from the 4004 System Board. At the breaker, disconnect AC power from the 4004 System Board. Ensure the jumpers on the module are set to the proper position before With TB1 of the

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Control Fire Alarm Systems 4004R Suppression Releasing Panel for Automatic Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler Control alarm control panel designed specifically for release operation with: Four initiating device circuits (IDCs) Two notification appliance circuits (NACs) Two releasing appliance circuits (RACs) Two special purpose monitor inputs (SPMs) that accept release request and manual abort request for Release systems, and waterflow and supervisory Preaction or Deluge systems Three auxiliary relays with selectable functions Easily selected activity timing options release operation includes: Automatic extinguishing release Deluge and preaction sprinkler system release Dual or single hazard area protection Combined agent release and preaction operation** are selectable for cross-zoning or for activation a single detection input Short circuit RAC supervision Compatible with Listed/Approved valves and actuators Escalation of Events: Single Audible Appliance Tone: Stage 1 activates or 20 bpm March Time pattern; Stage 2 120 bpm March Time pattern to indicate timer active; Release activates On Steady to release timer expired and actuator is activated Dual Audible Appliance Control** (Single Hazard): 2 provides a third NAC for dedicated Stage 1 Bell NACs 1 & 2 indicate release as On Steady interface provides: Status LEDs per circuit for Alarm, Trouble, and (where appropriate) Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset Operating mode selection and timer selections when in mode system components: Coil supervision module 2081-9046, one per RAC Maintenance Switch, one per RAC Abort Switch to UL Standard 864 and ULC Standard S527 for Suppression Release. 4004R Release Panels provide conventional fire alarm circuits and are equipped with the features required a wide variety of single or dual hazard suppression release Capabilities include automatic extinguishing release and deluge and preaction sprinkler control. Requires Software Revision 4.01 or higher. discharge path NAC+ NAC- SUPERVISION MODULE (2 AMP) 2081-9046 INSTRUCTIONS 574-437 REV 1/4″ SEPARATION POWER LIMITED AND NONPOWER (YEL/BLK) WIRING CODE: TIME RECORDER CO. GARDNER MA. USA Switch SUPPRESSION / DISABLE 1 SUPPRESSION ABORT AND HOLD 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 Silenced Trouble Release 5 Trouble Release 6 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble Released Fault Active Power Disconnect AND C. POWER 2, 3, and 4 2 Suppression Release Panel Suppression Release Panel System Reference Drawing (Continued) I/O Capabilities. Four IDCs allow for either separately monitored zones or two, cross-zoned Two SPMs allow dedicated manual inputs for or abort; for waterflow and supervisory, or and pressure, depending on system type. Two appliance circuits (RACs) supervise to the coils and activate the actuators when required. The NACs and the three panel auxiliary relays provide condition information. Program Selections. The operator panel has a mode that allows selection of panel operation and detailed operating selections using an easily sequential programming operation. Log. The last 50 events are stored in memory. This information is accessed by a technician computer to the service port is also used to set the date and time. Feature Description Panel. The operator pan

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Control Fire Alarm Systems 4004R Suppression Releasing Panel for Automatic Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler Control alarm control panel designed specifically for release operation with: Four initiating device circuits (IDCs) Two notification appliance circuits (NACs) Two releasing appliance circuits (RACs) Two special purpose monitor inputs (SPMs) that accept release request and manual abort request for Release systems, and waterflow and supervisory Preaction or Deluge systems Three auxiliary relays with selectable functions Easily selected activity timing options release operation includes: Automatic extinguishing release Deluge and preaction sprinkler system release Dual or single hazard area protection Combined agent release and preaction operation** are selectable for cross-zoning or for activation a single detection input Short circuit RAC supervision Compatible with Listed/Approved 24 VDC or 12 VDC series connected actuators Escalation of Events: Single Audible Appliance Tone: Stage 1 activates or 20 bpm March Time pattern; Stage 2 120 bpm March Time pattern to indicate timer active; Release activates On Steady to release timer expired and actuator is activated Dual Audible Appliance Control** (Single Hazard): 2 provides a third NAC for dedicated Stage 1 Bell NACs 1 & 2 indicate release as On Steady interface provides: Status LEDs per circuit for Alarm, Trouble, and (where appropriate) Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, and System Reset Operating mode selection and timer selections when in mode system components: Coil supervision module 2081-9046, one per RAC Maintenance Switch, one per RAC Abort Switch to UL Standard 864 and ULC Standard S527 Dedicated for Suppression Release. 4004R Release Panels provide conventional fire alarm circuits and are equipped with the features required a wide variety of single or dual hazard suppression release Capabilities include automatic extinguishing release and deluge and preaction sprinkler control. Requires Software Revision 4.01 or higher. discharge path NAC+ NAC- SUPERVISION MODULE (2 AMP) 2081-9046 INSTRUCTIONS 574-437 REV 1/4″ SEPARATION POWER LIMITED AND NONPOWER (YEL/BLK) WIRING CODE: T IME RECORDER CO. GARDNER MA. USA Switch SUPPRESSION / DISABLE 1 SUPPRESSION ABORT AND HOLD 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 Silenced Trouble Release 5 Trouble Release 6 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble 1 Trouble 2 Trouble Released Fault Active Power Disconnect AND C. POWER 2, 3, and 4 2 Suppression Release Panel Suppression Release Panel System Reference Drawing (Continued) Flexible I/O Capabilities. Four IDCs allow for either separately monitored zones or two, cross-zoned Two SPMs allow dedicated manual inputs for or abort; for waterflow and supervisory, or and pressure, depending on system type. Two appliance circuits (RACs) supervise to the coils and activate the actuators when required. The NACs and the three panel auxiliary relays provide condition information. Program Selections. The operator panel has a mode that allows selection of panel operation and detailed operating selections using an easily sequential programming operation. Log. The last 50 events are stored in memory. This information is accessed by a technician computer to the service port is also used to set the date and time. Feature Description Op

4004 &4 0 05 i re Alarm Solutions Small And Mid-Size Facilities To 36 Zones To 8 Zones Model 4004 LEDs, discrete LEDs switches for easy setup, and service screw terminals quick wire and removal and concise n s t a l l a t i o n , and instructions the door label panel programming changes to be easily on-site to speed up installation time programming time is less 5 minutes 4 screws and the single assembly can be for pulling conductors design allows only what you need but also allowing easy expansion installed cabinet provides trim for semi-flush markers for 1/2 and knockouts for and nailing design uses surface components to save and improve performance low profile cabinet 1 41 x 16 x 37 easily on 16 center studs e re the challenge need to provide a fire alarm control for a or It has to be a good product means that it must install quickly, be customized to conform to the local fire alarm codes, must properly, and can be easily tested verify performance. make it easy for you the is Simplex. We have been products for the end, and the end of fire systems throughout the evolution regional and national fire codes. We what is required for both performance and for quick and installation. 4004 and 4005 provide many and programming features asso- with systems but are designed for optimized as small and mid-size They are easy to install, easy to and are modular order only the you need. 4004 is primarily for the and provides two notification circuits (NACs). Each is for audible or visible oper- It comes standard with two initiating circuits (IDCs) and can be up to eight. 4004 uses two, 7-segment LED and discrete LEDs to provide status in a logical and easily under- manner. Displayed information tells which zones are in alarm, super- i s o r y, or trouble and also indicates addi- panel status such as auxiliary output zone, low battery, ground fault, city trouble, or other pertinent infor- All of this improves operator assists in servicing, and also in panel installation and setup. to illustration this page). 4005 is a higher capacity panel for facilities. features include eight IDCs and NACs. It can be expanded up to 36 or up to 32 programmable NACs or relay outputs. status and custom labels are by an alphanumeric LCD (two lines of 40 characters each) a series of logically positioned for control and programming. to illustration on next page). t a n d a rd Features both the 4004 and 4005: Designed for Quick and Easy and Setup Modular Design, Select Only What Need, Provides for Future x p a n s i o n Patented Walk Test, One-Person Te s t i n g Alarm Verification and Zone Selectable per Zone Active Status Reminder Program Notification as: Te m p o r a l Continuous, Fast or March Ti m e Front Panel Programming allows to be made easily on-site Combination Wa t e r f l o w / S u p e r v i s o r y Programmable by Zone Low Battery and Depleted Warnings Optional Class A Operation Compatible with Simplex 4003 Vo i c e and 4009 NAC Power Extender And More Model 4005 chassis mount only 4 for installation or of entire panel LCD and multi-function keys for easy-to-use review of alarm and trouble logs, and front programming n a p – i n – p l a c e modules tools or mounting required cabinet desig

Fire Alarm and Operating C and Trademarks and Warnings information in this document is subject to change without notice. part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without written consent of Simplex Time Recorder Company. 2000 by Time Recorder Company Plaza MA 01441-0001 Rights Reserved in the United States of America Test is protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,725,818. All other logos product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their companies. NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your Simplex product, the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making internal adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by Simplex Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. handle as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the Static Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio It has been tested and found to comply with the limits a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of equipment in a residential area may cause interference in which the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever may be required to correct the interference. of Contents 1 System Overview ………………………………………………………1-1 ……………………………………………………………………………..1-1 this Chapter………………………………………………………………………….1-1 and Part Numbers ………………………………………………………..1-2 ………………………………………………………………………………1-2 Modules ………………………………………………………………………1-6 Panel Modules ……………………………………………………………..1-6 Board………………………………………………………………………..1-6 Supply / Charger………………………………………………………1-7 Distribution Board …………………………………………………….1-7 IDC Card (low current) …………………………………………….1-8 NAC/Relay Card……………………………………………………..1-8 Modules ………………………………………………………………….1-9 IDC and 2 NAC/Relay Card ………………………………………………1-9 A Adapter Card…………………………………………………………1-9 I/O Card…………………………………………………………………1-9 Power Supply…………………………………………………….1-9 Circuit Card…………………………………………………………………1-9 Card ……………………………………………………………………….1-9 2 Installation………………………………………………………………..2-1 …………………………………………………………………………………2-1 this Chapter………………………………………………………………………….2-1 Notes ……………………………………………………………………….2-1 and Equipment………………………………………………………………..2-2

Cautions and Warnings Adapter Kit Fire Alarm Kit Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. 4005/4002 Fire Alarm Adapter Kit is designed to allow the 4005 electronics be installed into a 2-, 4-, or 6-unit 4002 back box (a 2-unit box is used as an throughout this publication). Each kit comes with a 4005/4002 adapter a retainer panel, and a ship group containing appropriate mounting harness, and installation instructions. 4005-9150 (Part No. 636-783) High-Current electronics are shipped without box and door assemblies. The 4005-9150 comes with a ship group appropriate mounting hardware and installation/operating the following steps, the supplied engineering documentation, and Figures 1 2 to install a 4005/4002 Adapter Kit. All mounting hardware is supplied otherwise noted. the correct mounting holes in the 4002 back box by placing the plate into the box to line up the corresponding holes (see Figure 1). Screw two No. 8 x 5/16-inch long mounting screws (Part No. 426-033) the two top holes in the back box (identified in Step 1) while an 1/8-inch gap from the seated position of each screw. Carefully place the teardrop holes of the adapter plate onto the two screws in Step 2 (see Figure 1). Allow the plate to hang from the screws will tighten them in the next step). the two remaining mounting screws through the bottom screw holes of adapter plate into the back box and tighten all screws. Screw four No. 8 x 5/16-inch long mounting screws (Part No. 426-033) into four holes of the adapter plate while leaving an 1/8-inch gap from the position of each screw (see Figure 1 for the position of each screw). Mount the 4005 electronics assembly to the four screws installed in Step 5 then tighten all screws (see Figure 2). Using the 841-986 interconnection diagram, check all internal connections. necessary, remove the existing 4005 battery harness (733-807) and it with the battery harness (733-898) supplied in the adapter kit ship DO NOT connect the harness to the batteries at this time. on next page 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications and information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. B Adapter Kit Continued Using the 841-990 field wiring diagrams, connect all field wiring to the Pay careful attention to the routing of Power-Limited and Non-Power wiring as defined on the Module and Wiring Identification Label No. 526-201) located on the back of the retainer panel. Maintain a separation of Power-Limited and Non-Power-Limited wiring. Module wire point identifications can be written on this label in the spaces to their locations. Carefully mount the optional dress panel, if present. Using the retainer clips mounting screws supplied, mount the retainer panel (see 2). You must mount both the dress and retainer panels so that the display is visible through the opening in the retainer panel. Back Box Plate Electronics Dress Clips 1. Adapter Plate Panel 2. 4005 Electronics Assembly High-Current Installation four appropriate holes in the back box while leaving an 1/8-inch gap the seated position of each screw. the back box. Refer to the 4005 Fire Alarm – Installation/Operating (Part No. 574-068) for more information. the following steps, the supplied engineering documentation, and Figure 3 to the 4005-9150 High-Current electronics assembly into a 4005 back box. mounting hardware is supplied unless otherwise noted. Mount the 4005 back box according to the instructions found on the label Screw four No. 8 x 5/16-inch long mounting screws (Part No. 426-0

and Warnings Fire Alarm Circuit Card Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (Use the 553-484 control kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. 4005-9809 City Circuit Card (Part No. 565-550) provides alarm, and trouble reporting to a Proprietary or Municipal monitoring and supports three different types of city circuits (Local Energy, Reverse and Form “C”). This publication describes how to install and configure 4005 Fire Alarm City Circuit Card (refer to Figure 1). P3 and P4 1. 4005 City Circuit Card NOT APPLY AC OR BATTERY POWER TO THE UNLESS IN THE PRESENCE OF A SIMPLEX REPRESENTATIVE. Power down the 4005 installing a city circuit card. 1997 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice B to Field Wiring Diagram #841-990 for all TB1 wiring information. Refer the Module Identification Chart on the inside of the panel door for the of the city circuit cards. Install the City Circuit Card Bracket below the CPU using the two screws Determine the designation of your City Circuit (1 or 2) and mount the card the bracket stand-offs. City Circuit 1 mounts on the left side of the bracket and City Circuit 2 on the right (refer to the silk-screen on the CPU board below P5 and P6). Using the ribbon cable provided, connect P1 of the city circuit card to either (left side) or P6 (right side) of the CPU. city circuit card has two different circuits. Circuit 1 provides Local Reverse Polarity City, and Form “C” reporting. When configuring 1, use the table below for Connectors P2 & P4 jumper settings and 2 for Connector P3 jumper settings. Circuit 2 provides a Form “C” that operates on system Trouble (see Note 4). For additional read the following notes and refer to the 4005 Field Wiring (841-990). CIRCUIT Polarity (Alarm and Polarity (Alarm and Trouble) Polarity (Alarm Only) Polarity (Supervisory Only) Energy (Alarm Only) Energy (Supervisory Only) Pins Pins 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2 2-3 on next page Continued Energy Only or Supervisory Only) Polarity Only or Supervisory Only) 13 Polarity & Trouble or & Supervisory/Trouble) “C” 2. P3 Connector The city circuit card supports three common varieties of city connections: Polarity, Local Energy, and Form “C”. Select the type of city by configuring the jumpers on Connector P3 (see Figure 2). Shunt connections are not supported by the 4005 city circuit card. They are in a 4005 FACP using an external relay controlled by an 8-Point driver output. Refer to the 4005 Field Wiring Diagram (841-990) for You can configure the city circuit to activate on either an alarm or a condition. Make this selection by configuring the jumper on P4. Installing a jumper on Pins 1 and 2 activates the circuit on installing a jumper on Pins 2 and 3 activates the circuit on a condition. When configuring the circuit as reverse polarity, there are a few special You may configure a Reverse Polarity to indicate a or trouble condition to the city by de-energizing the city

Cautions and Warnings Installation Fire Alarm I/O Cards Instructions NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the 553-484 Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. publication shows how to install and configure the 4005 Fire Alarm (I/O) Cards which are listed in Table 1. Refer to Field Wiring 841-990 for additional wiring information. 1. 4005 I/O Cards Number Number IDC Low-Current Card IDC High-Current Card NAC/Relay Card and 2-NAC/Relay Card A Adapter Card I/O Card ASSY 1. 4-Point NAC/Relay Card DO NOT apply AC or battery power to the 4005 unless in presence of a Simplex Technical Representative. down the 4005 before installing an I/O Card. 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. A Installation (Continued) Jumper settings for NAC/Relay cards are for Relay Circuits only. NAC/Relay Card: Class B Notification Appliance Circuit, place relay in the NAC position from TB1 (K1 & K2 in Figure 1). an Auxiliary Relay circuit, place relay in the AUX position toward TB1 & K4 in Figure 1). For Normally Open contacts, move jumper to the NO For Normally Closed contacts, move the jumper to the NC position to the silkscreen on the board). IDC and 2NAC/RELAY ASSY 2. 2-Point IDC/2-Point NAC/Relay Card IDC / 2-Point NAC/Relay Card: a Class B Notification Appliance Circuit, place relay in the NAC position from TB1 (K1 in Figure 2). an Auxiliary Relay circuit, place relay in the AUX position toward TB1 in Figure 2). For Normally Open contacts, move jumper to the NO position. Normally Closed contacts, move the jumper to the NC position (refer to the on the board). on next page Installation (Continued) POINT I/O ASSY 565-554 3. 8-Point I/O Card I/O Card: P1-P8 must be installed in position 2-3 for each circuit used a driver. Jumpers P1-P8 must be installed in position 1-2 for each used as an input. Refer to Table 2 for proper jumper/circuit correlation. 2. Jumper Settings No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Steps 1 through 3 to install any of the cards listed in Table 1 (except the A Adapter Card) into the 4005 panel. Refer to Field Wiring Diagram for all wiring information. Refer to the A Adapter section of publication when installing a Class A Adapter on an I/O card. After setting jumpers and relays to their appropriate positions, choose a Location (1 through 10) for the card inside the 4005 panel (refer to 4 and the label inside the door of the 4005 for possible locations). You can use any open slot as long as field wiring permits. When installing cards with removable relays in Physical Slots 1 through 5, ensure that the writing on the relays is right side up. When installing cards with removable relays in Physical Slots 6 through 10, ensure that the writing on the relays is upside down. You must install an Expansion Power Distribution Board when using Slots 6 through 10 (refer to Part No. 574-072 for more Continued on next page Installation (Continued) Disconnect electrical power and i

Cautions and Warnings Fire Alarm Interface Operating Instructions REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES – To proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to hardware or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. To ensure that other operations are inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and system operation verified. In addition, changes to all control units or controlled by the system operating software require a 10% test of the system, including a test of at least one device on each input output circuit to verify critical system functions such as notification control functions, and off-premises reporting. the instructions in the installation, operating and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) operation and depend upon proper installation. 4005 PC Interface is intended to simplify the use of the front panel to edit labels, and archive program files from the 4005. Although you use the 4005 PC Interface to program a CFIG file without being to the front panel, you can upload a previously saved file in order to modifications to a panel. All actions of the FACP are emulated by the PC with the exception of editing labels. To edit a label you can simply the new label instead of the character-by-character scrolling method used by front panel. PC or compatible with an available Serial (COM) port. Version 1.04 of the 4005 Firmware installed in the FACP. A Standard Upload/Download Cable (Part No. 733-794). The 4005 PC Interface Distribution Diskette (Part No. 741-092) facilitate the programming process, Log On to the 4005 at an Access Level 4. causes a Simplex Service Mode trouble. Acknowledge the trouble before All actions explained in this publication assume panel access at 4. successfully use the 4005 PC Interface you should be familiar with the publications and have them available during programming: Fire Alarm (cid:1) Installation Instructions (574-068) Fire Alarm (cid:2) Rev. 1.02 Release Note (574-083) Fire Alarm (cid:1) Programming Instructions (574-059). All figures shown in this publication are shown as a Microsoft 95 Prompt window. following is a list of requirements needed to use the PC Interface program. 1999 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice B Steps 1 through 4 and Figure 1 to configure the 4005 FACP and PC to use PC Interface program. Port (P1) Create a new directory or folder on the hard drive of your PC called 4005. Copy the contents of the 4005 PC Interface Diskette into the directory. (Use Help function of MS-DOS or Windows for further information on new directories and copying files.) Connect the 733-794 download cable from the available COM port of the to the RS232 port (P1) of the 4005 CPU (shown in Figure 1). The stripe of the cable indicates Pin 1. P1-1 of the RS232 port is on the left of the P1 connector. PORT RUI RUI DET PWR 1 2 3 4 5 CPU BD 0565-469 B 1. 4005 Base Panel When connecting to a PC powered from an AC source, the panel indicates an Earth Fault trouble. Before using the program, acknowledge the trouble and continue (refer the PC Interface Screen – Drop Down Menus section this publication). Once communication has been established between the 4005 PC through the download cable, the panel will no longer

Fire Alarm Expansion Power Supply & Distribution Boards Instructions HAZARD electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing be performed by qualified Simplex publication shows how to install the 4005-9813 Expansion Power Supply (Part No. 565-481) and the 4005-9807 Power Board (Part No. 566-252) into the 4005 Fire Alarm. Refer to the label on the inside of the 4005 panel door for the of each board. Power Supply (See Figure 1) 4005 Expansion Power Supply provides up to 5 Amps of alarm power and mounts in the left side of the 4005 back This supply is intended for use with the main 4005 Power (Part No. 565-479) and is not intended as a standalone supply. Settings SUPPLY – Low Battery Cutout this jumper installed, the Low Battery Cutout is enabled. the jumper is removed (cut), the feature is disabled. When the Low Battery Cutout causes the signal power tap to be off (tripped) when the battery voltage drops below 18V the system is running on batteries). – Power Module Supervisory Input (PMSI) this jumper installed, the PMSI is ignored by the and a trouble cannot be initiated on the PMSI line. the jumper is removed (cut), the PMSI feature is When enabled, an open circuit on this input will a trouble; the input must be pulled low (24C or 0V) clear the trouble. All general trouble conditions are reported to the power supply. The main power supply then the information to the CPU. LINE AC NEUT EARTH 1 2000 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Westminster, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. B Settings – Voltage Select Switch determines the desired line voltage range. When the label shows on the switch, the power supply is set for its low range When the label shows on the switch, the power supply is set for its high input range (187V-264V). Ensure that SW1 is set to the proper voltage range before applying power. – Brownout Range Switch SW2 to its default (ON) position (as indicated by the silk-screen) for nominal operation in the low-input range or 220V). Set SW2 to its OFF position for high-input range (240V) operation. Steps 1 through 4 to install the Expansion Power Supply board. Using the screws provided, install the plastic chassis channels into the left-hand side of the back box. Position the white insulation sheet (supplied) in the left side of the back box. Slide the Expansion Power Supply board into the chassis channels while keeping the insulation in position behind the board. Using the screws provided, tighten the Expansion Power Supply board to the chassis through the two bottom holes indicated in 1. Refer to Pub. No. FA4-41-653 to configure the Expansion Power Supply once it’s installed in the 4005. Connections terminal block is for AC input connections. Contractor wiring is connected to TB1 of the expansion power supply from TB2 of main power supply as follows: Power Supply Line Neutral Ground Power Supply – Expansion Supply System Connector 8-position connector is used to connect the expansion power supply to the main power supply. This connection commons the two provides battery distribution, and feeds the expansion supply supervision signal to the main power supply. the supplied 8-wire cable (Part No. 733-882), connect P1 of the expansion power supply to P2 of the main power supply. Power supply wiring is shown on the label inside the 4005 panel door. Distribution Board (See Figure 2) Power Distribution Board is essentially a backplane for the I/O cards. In addition to bussing data and control signals between the and I/O cards, the power distribution board provides signal power from the power s

Fire Alarm Panel Programming D is blank text and Trademarks and Warnings 2000 by Simplex Time Recorder Company rights reserved. Simplex Plaza, Westminster, MA 01441 in the United States of America. in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent of Time Recorder Company. Test is protected by US Patent No. 4,725,818. REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES – To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to hardware or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must be tested and proper system operation verified. AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in the operating and programming manuals. These instructions must be to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. Fire Control Panel (FACP) operation and reliability depend upon proper and programming. NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any internal or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Simplex HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Therefore, as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components (use the Static Control Kit). Keep uninstalled component wrapped in anti-static material at all times. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide protection against such interference when operated in a commercial Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take measures may be required to correct the interference. i and Standards 4005 is listed for the following listing categories. 864 Listings for Type of System: the sounding of an alarm via listed notification appliance(s). 4005-9809 City Circuit Module. UL 864 Power-Limited Fire Alarm Control Unit. Local (formerly NFPA 72A). Auxiliary (formerly NFPA 72B). Remote Station – protected premise (formerly NFPA 72C). Proprietary – protected premise (formerly NFPA 72D). Central Station – protected premise (formerly NFPA 71). 4005-9809 City Circuit Module. 4005-9810 DACT. 4005-9809 City Circuit Module or the 4005-9810 DACT. 864 Listings for Type of Service: Automatic, Manual, Waterflow, and Sprinkler Supervisory. 864 Listings for Type of Signaling: Coded, Non-Coded, March-Time, and DACT. requires 4005-9810 DACT. Mutual Approved Same as UL above Safe (Requires 2081-9636, 2081-9062, or 2081-9063 Safe Barrier Module) Approvals CSFM MEA on next page ii Referenced 1993 National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) referenced publications are below. The installer should be familiar with these codes, as well as any

(cid:1) (cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:4)(cid:7) (cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:12)(cid:7) (cid:3)(cid:10)(cid:13)(cid:8)(cid:14)(cid:15)(cid:7)(cid:4) (cid:4)(cid:11)(cid:16)(cid:12)(cid:17)(cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:7) (cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:13)(cid:7)(cid:18)(cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:12)(cid:4) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:15) (cid:4)(cid:11)(cid:8)(cid:14)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:4) (cid:12)(cid:11) (cid:19)(cid:11)(cid:4)(cid:4)(cid:3)(cid:20)(cid:8)(cid:7) (cid:19)(cid:6)(cid:11)(cid:20)(cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:18)(cid:4) (cid:17)(cid:3)(cid:12)(cid:2) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:4)(cid:7) (cid:21)(cid:7)(cid:22)(cid:23) (cid:24)(cid:23)(cid:25)(cid:26) (cid:27)(cid:28)(cid:29)(cid:30)(cid:31) (cid:11)(cid:19)(cid:13)(cid:11)(cid:15)(cid:7) (cid:16)(cid:11)(cid:6) !”(cid:29) (cid:19)(cid:6)(cid:11)#(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:18)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:10)# (cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:4) (cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:7)(cid:10) (cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:9)(cid:20)(cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:23) (cid:30) (cid:4)(cid:9)(cid:18)(cid:19)(cid:8)(cid:7) !”(cid:29) (cid:7)$(cid:14)(cid:9)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:10) (cid:14)(cid:4)(cid:3)(cid:10)# (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:27)(cid:28)(cid:29)(cid:30)(cid:31) (cid:3)(cid:4) (cid:4)(cid:2)(cid:11)(cid:17)(cid:10) (cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:11)(cid:17) %(cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:7) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10) (cid:12)(cid:8)(cid:13)(cid:3)(cid:5) (cid:14)(cid:6)(cid:15)(cid:16)(cid:10) (cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:16)(cid:18)(cid:15) (cid:19) (cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:13)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:10) (cid:11)(cid:16) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:20)(cid:21)(cid:21)(cid:22) (cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:23)(cid:16) (cid:24)(cid:18)(cid:4)(cid:23)(cid:25) (cid:2) (cid:12)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:5)(cid:23)(cid:3)(cid:28)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)&(cid:23) (cid:7)(cid:12) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:15) (cid:21)(cid:7)(cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:12) (cid:19)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:4) (cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:7) (cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:17) (cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:3)(cid:12)(cid:7)(cid:15) (cid:3)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:7)(cid:19)(cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:12)(cid:8) (cid:11)(cid:16) (cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:7) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7)(cid:6)(cid:23) ((cid:4)(cid:7) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:29)(cid:7)(cid:16)(cid:12) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:15) (cid:21)(cid:3)#(cid:2)(cid:12) (cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:6)(cid:11)(cid:17) )(cid:7) (cid:12)(cid:11) (cid:7)(cid:12) (cid:11)(cid:6) (cid:21)(cid:7)(cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:12) (cid:19)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:12) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:15) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7)(cid:10) (cid:14)(cid:4)(cid:7) *(cid:7)+(cid:12) (cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:15) “(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:14)(cid:4) )(cid:7) (cid:12)(cid:11) (cid:4)(cid:13)(cid:6)(cid:11)(cid:8)(cid:8) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:11)(cid:14)#(cid:2) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:10)(cid:14)(cid:18)(cid:20)(cid:7)(cid:6)(cid:4) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10) (cid:29)(cid:3)(cid:5)(cid:13)(cid:3)(cid:5) (cid:14)(cid:6)(cid:15)(cid:16)(cid:10) (cid:17)(cid:6)(cid:16)(cid:18)(cid:15) (cid:30) (cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:13)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:10) (cid:11)(cid:16) (cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:7) (cid:20)(cid:21)(cid

4005 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM OPERATING AN ALARM/TROUBLE/SUPERVISORY SAFETY, AS WELL AS THE SAFETY OF THOSE AROUND YOU, ALWAYS COMES FIRST. sure you know what practices. fire depend during do. LED FLASHES AND TONE-ALERT PULSES LED FLASHES AND TONE-ALERT SOUNDS 07 06 * TROUBLE * Unlock and open the panel door. Readand follow the instructions on display. It will toggle between Screens 1 and 2. A Trouble Condition Condition described handled example. A a similar manner. 1 = 3 SUPERVISORY = 0 TROUBLE = 0 ZONES 02 07 06 Unlock and open panel door. Read and follow the instructions the display (see Screen 1 for an example). 2 q 3 SUPERVISORY = 0 TROUBLE ACK to review 0 Press the (ALARM ACK) key under the flashing red LED. Readthe display. The tone-alert is silenced and the display shows pertinent report such as shown in Screen 3. 3 Floor East Wing Detector 12 Readthe Alarm Information on the display. Summon appropriate to respond. TO SILENCE THE SIGNALS Press the (ALARM SILENCE) key and read the display. The display shows signal status. ALARM SILENCED LED turns ON. TO RESET THE SVSTEM When the alarm condition has been cleared, restore or replace affected devices (smoke detectors, pull stations, etc.) in with the instructions provided with each device. Reset the system. Press the (SYSTEM RESET) key. system displays Screen 4 after a completed System with no alarms present. 4 Alarms Present, System Reset Complete previous screen, press any key Press any key to return to the SYSTEM NORMAL screen. 1 = 0 SUPERVISORY = 0 TROUBLE = 3 * TROUBLE ACK to review Press the (TROUBLE ACK) key under the flashing yellow LED. the Trouble information on the display (see Screen 2 for example). 2 Floor East Wing Detector 12 Summon appropriate personnel Ensure that response personnel respond. or replaces the device (switch, wire, notification appliance, etc.) in with device instructions. necessary, press (SYSTEM RESET) when the abnormal has been corrected. After a short delay, the system returns to normal and displays screen similar to Screen 3. 3 SYSTEM NORMAL ** 20-July-95 your system configuration sheet, Simplex for specific operations. Simplex is listed in Yellow Pages. not match case of trouble, notify: # ONSTRUCU00NS BE FRAMED M~MNUED UHE UNUENDED READY Operalor ffw deUaiOed opesauisoa. 1995 Simplex Time Recorder Co. specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change Without notice, 8 95

4005 Fire Alarm List Boards Shown Shown Shown Shown NO. (English) Distribution Module IDC Module IDC Module (High-Current Relay Base Module) NAC/Relay Module Supply Module Power Supply Module Circuit Module IDC and 2 NAC/Relay Module 1998 Simplex Time Recorder Co., Gardner, MA 01441-0001 U.S.A. specifications and other information shown were current as of publication, and are subject to change without notice. 11 98 NO. Boards Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown Shown I/O Module A Adapter Module Module Controller Software Chip (U21) Box (Beige) Box (Red) (Beige) (Red) Pin Snap Post for Class A Adapter Cards Snap Post for Power Distribution Cards No. 6 Torx, 3/8 (for Expansion Power Supply) Bracket Harness Distribution Harness Circuit Cable Power Supply Harness Power Harness Panel Supply Cover (reads Fire Alarm Control Panel Supply Insulator Bracket, CCDACT for Class A Fuse (Fast-Acting) DPDT Universal Download Group 11 98

4005 Fire Alarm Sheets the following sheets to record ALL 4005 Fire Alarm programming NAME: CONTACT: NO.: SYSTEM PROGRAMMING NO.: REP.: 1 2 AS REQUIRED AS REQUIRED GENERAL ALARM ALARM VERIFICATION WATERFLOW SPRINKLER SUPERVISION SIGNAL CUTOUT O-60 MINS. SIGNAL SILENCE O-60 MINS. SIGNAL OPERATION ONE) TIME MARCH TIME CODE CODE ENERGY C POLARITY SELECTIVE SIGNAL OPERATION SELECTIVE RELAY CONTROL SELECTIVE DOOR HOLDER RELAY CONTROL SELECTIVE SWITCH OPERATION CUSTOM FAN/DAMPER RELAY CONTROL CROSS-ZONING NON-ALARM MONITOR POINTS NON-LATCHING MONITOR POINTS (TRACKING) CITY CONNECTION ONE) AC POWER FAIL (CONTROL) ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS AS REQUIRED) LIST QUANTITY ON SYSTEM POINT TYPE ELEVATOR RECALL (ALT FLOOR) OPERATION RCU SWITCH NON-DEFAULT OPERATION SCU/RCU MEMORY POINT MATRIX (ZONE GROUPING) 1996 Simplex Time Recorder Co.. Gardner, MA 01441-0001 specifications other were current as of publication, are subject change without notice. Manuals Online! – 1 96 Manuals Online! – PANEL PROGRAMMING MENU POINT CARDS SMPL OPTIONS LEVELS CFIG T; CFIG 2 Programming Menu Structure Edit Point Point Type Custom Label – 40 Characters l Modes (valid for RCU/SCU annunciators and 8-point only) Switch (control) Modes: mode (point used by SMPL) all points (global) all Fire alarms all Supervisory alarms all Trouble alarms a system reset an alarm silence ON/OFF point button track point button hold point point OFF disable/enable point l List Contents Manuals Online! – For list pseudos, operator can add points or delete points from the list. LED (tracking) modes: mode (point used by SMPL) the Fire alarm state the Supervisory alarm state the Trouble alarm state the Disable state the ON state the OFF state Manuals Online! – 3 Input Operators Table operator AND operator OR oDerator 4 Output Operators Table ON OFF ON OFF MARCH Point On Point Off Point On Point Off Point Output Code Output Code Slow March Output Code EQUATIONS the following to record your SMPL equations. Manuals Online! – Manuals Online! – System Options Time/Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *12-Hour, 24-Hour Active Point Reminder SUPV, TBL) sounds every 8 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES, *NO Alarm Silence/Reset Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-60 Minutes (0)* Alarm Signal Cutout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-60 Minutes (0 with no cutout)* Doorholder drop on Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Fire Alarm Control Panels 4005 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels 8 to 36 IDCs and 4 NACs features: 80 Character, alphanumeric LCD readout with wide angle Eight, Class B Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs) Four, Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) 4 A power supply/battery charger Power-limited design Pluggable terminal blocks Internal DACT is included on UL listed models; separately as required for ULC listed models system accessory compatibility: 4602 Series Remote Control Unit (RCU) and Status AND C. POWER Unit (SCU), two-wire serial 4601 Series Annunciators 4003 Voice Control Panels 4009 NAC Power Extenders features: Menu-driven programming On-site programmable custom labels Four operator access levels Historical event logs Circuit selectable alarm verification WALKTEST one-person system testing** Selectable active status reminder expansion: Two circuit IDC, two circuit NAC/relay Four circuit NAC/relay Four circuit IDC (low current and high current Four circuit Class A NAC or IDC zone conversion Eight circuit I/O module Remote station/city connection Additional 5 A power supply Listed to Standard 864 Refer to page 6 for additional ULC listing information. This product has been approved by California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7165-0026:212 for allowable values and/or concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York of Buildings MEA35-93E. See page 7 for ULC designations. Additional may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Products Westminster. 4005 Fire Alarm Control Panel areas requiring eight to thirty-six IDC zones, Simplex series fire alarm control panels provide flexible circuit monitoring, extensive programmable capability, and LCD annunciated circuit-specific labels. Surface mount components, efficient programming, and easy-to-use control operation combine to provide an extensive feature in a compact, friendly package. status and circuit information is efficiently by an alphanumeric LCD readout featuring two of 40 characters each. The panel control switches are marked for intuitive operation. Programming of selectable features is performed by using the display the panel control switches while in the programming 4005 series fire alarm control panel provides for a wide variety of mid-size facilities in the fields: Educational, Health Care, Business, Hospitality, Residential, and General Assembly. modular design allows IDCs and NACs to be in groups of two or four to satisfy circuit without specifying excess capacity. If the expands, then additional modules be easily installed on-site. WALKTEST performance testing is protected under US Patent No. 4,725,818. NACs may be individually configured for dry contact relay operation. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for fire alarm control panels suitable for Control applications. 3/2009 4005 Module Features CPU board contains the main microprocessor and programming, evaluates the status of all I/O processes the required responses, and provides a timer that resets the panel in the event of an operation. Additional details are below. Controls the LCD readout and switches that co

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Fire Alarm Control Panels 4005 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels 8 to 36 IDCs and 4 NACs features: 80 Character, alphanumeric LCD readout with wide angle Eight, Class B Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs) Four, Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) 4 A power supply/battery charger Power-limited design Pluggable terminal blocks Internal DACT is included on UL listed models; separately as required for ULC listed models system accessory compatibility: 4602 Series Remote Control Unit (RCU) and Status AND C. POWER Unit (SCU), two-wire serial 4601 Series Annunciators 4003 Voice Control Panels 4009 NAC Power Extenders features: Menu-driven programming On-site programmable custom labels Four operator access levels Historical event logs Circuit selectable alarm verification WALKTEST one-person system testing** Selectable active status reminder expansion: Two circuit IDC, two circuit NAC/relay Four circuit NAC/relay Four circuit IDC (low current and high current Four circuit Class A NAC or IDC zone conversion Eight circuit I/O module Remote station/city connection Additional 5 A power supply Listed to Standard 864 Refer to page 6 for additional ULC listing information. This product has been approved by California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7165-0026:212 for allowable values and/or concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to revision, and possible cancellation. Accepted for use City of New York of Buildings MEA35-93E. See page 7 for ULC designations. Additional may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Products Westminster. 4005 Fire Alarm Control Panel areas requiring eight to thirty-six IDC zones, Simplex series fire alarm control panels provide flexible circuit monitoring, extensive programmable capability, and LCD annunciated circuit-specific labels. Surface mount components, efficient programming, and easy-to-use control operation combine to provide an extensive feature in a compact, friendly package. status and circuit information is efficiently by an alphanumeric LCD readout featuring two of 40 characters each. The panel control switches are marked for intuitive operation. Programming of selectable features is performed by using the display the panel control switches while in the programming 4005 series fire alarm control panel provides for a wide variety of mid-size facilities in the fields: Educational, Health Care, Business, Hospitality, Residential, and General Assembly. modular design allows IDCs and NACs to be in groups of two or four to satisfy circuit without specifying excess capacity. If the expands, then additional modules be easily installed on-site. WALKTEST performance testing is protected under US Patent No. 4,725,818. NACs may be individually configured for dry contact relay operation. Contact your local Simplex product supplier for fire alarm control panels suitable for Control applications. 3/2009 4005 Module Features CPU board contains the main microprocessor and programming, evaluates the status of all I/O processes the required responses, and provides a timer that resets the panel in the event of an operation. Additional details are below. Controls the LCD readout and switches that co

Closure DACT Alarm Communication Transmitter) Programming Instructions E and Trademarks 2005 Tyco Safety Products Westminster, Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of document date, and are subject to change without notice. Simplex, SimplexGrinell and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or other countries. in the United States of America. in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent Tyco Safety Products. and Warnings NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim the carrier and notify Simplex. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical power when making any adjustments or repairs. Servicing should be performed by qualified Representatives. FREQUENCY ENERGY – This equipment generates, uses, and can radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device to Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable against such interference when operated in a residential installation. and Warnings, Continued of Symbols following symbols are used in this publication to alert you to unusual and hazardous conditions. – When you see this symbol, it indicates a potential danger that correct procedures or practices in order to prevent personal injury. – This symbol is used to indicate correct operating or maintenance in order to prevent damage to, or destruction of, equipment or other DEVICE – When you see this symbol, you use proper CMOS/MOSFET handling precautions to avoid electrostatic and damage to the device. Grounded wrist straps should be worn and ESD safety precautions observed when handling electro-sensitive printed boards. of Contents 1 Started …………………………………………………………………………………….. 1-1 Documentation …………………………………………………………………. 1-1 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-1 1-2 Requirements……………………………………………………………….. 1-2 System Connection ……………………………………………………….. 1-3 Requirements for 4004/4005 Versions…………………………………… 1-3 Requirements for 4020/4100/4120 Versions…………………………… 1-4 Limitations…………………………………………………………….. 1-4 Inputs (Initiating Circuits)…………………………………………………. 1-4 Indicators …………………………………………………………………………….. 1-5 2 …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-1 …………………………………………………………………………………………. 2-1 Installations…………………………………………………………… 2-2 …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2-2 Installations …………………………………………………………………………. 2-2 and 4020/4100/4120 Installations …………………………………………… 2-3 the 4004-9810 CCDACT Kit ………………………………..

Fire Alarm Control Panel List publication lists the service parts for the 4006 Fire Alarm Control Panel well as service parts for optional modules. Some of the parts for the main are shown in Figure 1 below. Door Assembly, Red (without Annunciator) Lock, Labels, etc.) Door Assembly with Annunciator, Red Lock, Labels, etc.) Cover Local PC Board Assembly Overlay (deadfront) Lock, Door Clip Pipe No. Window, Grey Note Table 2) 1. 4006 Fire Alarm Control Panel No. 650-018 Insulator 174-053 Assembly 166-654 566-638 734-196 378-115 378-030 378-004 Header (Double Rows) Board (Note: For reference only; must entire assembly [743-577] in Table 4 to System Board) Download Port K, W Resistor (**4081-9002 EOL K, W Resistor (**4081-9008 EOL Ohm, W Resistor (**4081-9011 EOL panel termination only on spare circuits; use EOL harness field wiring use listed 8-digit PID to order EOL harness 1. Replacement Parts for Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) 2. Replacement Parts for FACP (continued) 2004 Tyco Safety Products Westminster, Westminster, MA 01441-0001 USA specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date, and are subject to change without notice. Simplex, and the Simplex logo are trademarks of Tyco International Services AG or its affiliates in the U.S. and/or countries. on next page A Parts FACP 3 continues to show replacement parts that are shown in the illustration on previous page. 3. Replacement Parts for FACP (continued) No. No. Spacer, (6 mm) (Phillips), 6-32 x 5/16 (8 mm) Long (Nylon) #6-32 #6-32 #6-32 (Slotted Torx), 6-32 x (6 mm) Long (Torx), 4-40 x 3/16 (5 mm) Long 4-40 Unc-2A Female, 6-32 x 2 (51 mm) Long (Nylon) (Torx), 4-40 x 5/16 (8 mm) Long F/F, 4-40 Unc x 0.62 (16 mm) Long Nylon External Lock, #6 External Lock, #8 #4-40 Strap #4 x 0.125 (3 mm) Long (5 mm) Hex Post 4-40 x 11/16 (17 mm) available; local purchase only Parts Shown in Figure 1 the FACP) 4 lists replacement parts that are not shown in the illustration on the page. 4. Replacement Parts Not Shown in Figure 1 No. Local LED Annunciator Download Cable (Laptop to Bay Assembly (Includes System Keyswitch, Labels, etc.) Parts for Power Supply 5. Replacement Parts for Expansion Power Supply No.

firealarmresources.com and Trademarks 2005 Tyco Safety Products Westminster, Westminster MA 01441-0001 USA in the United States of America. in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent of Tyco Safety Simplex, the Simplex logo, IDNet, SmartSync and WALKTEST are registered trademarks of Tyco International Ser- AG or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. analog smoke detection is protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,155,468; 5,173,683; IDNet addressable communications are protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,796,025. IDNet duplicate device detection protected under U.S. Patent No. 6,034,601. WALKTEST system test is protected under US Patent No. 4,725,818. Smart- horn/strobe operation is protected under U.S. Patent No. 6,281,789. Two wire synchronization circuit operation is pro- by U.S. patent No. 5,559,492. Information equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the door of this equip- is a label that contains, among other information, the following product identifier: US:5QWAL01B4008. If requested, number must be provided to the telephone company. the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by an authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users service to report the need for service to our company or to one of our authorized agents. Service can be arranged our office at: Safety Products Technology Drive MA 01473 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN), which is 01 for the DACT installed in this panel, is used to determine the number of that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total number of RENs, contact the local telephone For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN is part of the product identifier, which uses the format The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g. 01 is a REN of 0.1). the DACT causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discon- of service may be required. But if advance notice isn practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as If your service is discontinued, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the opera- of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the neces- modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. trouble is experienced with the DACT, please contact Tyco Safety Products at the location identified above. If the equipment causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the is resolved. Dialing Equipment equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an emergency situation. It must be able to do this if other equipment (telephone, answering system, computer modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do so, DACT must be electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same telephone line. Proper is depicted in the figure below. If you have any questions concerning these instructions you should consult your company or a qualified installer about connecting the alarm dialing equipment for you. Jack Jack

ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; (NYC) Acceptance* Fire Alarm Control Panels 4006 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels up to Ten IDCs and Four NACs panel operator convenience features: Wide viewing angle 2 x 20 (40 character) alphanumeric and dedicated LEDs provide convenient panel information Operation is programmable using a multi-function and the panel LCD or via service computer (PC) RS-232 service port provides upload/download PC for panel configuration and event history logs Software updates are via PC download Convenient library of standard custom label terms Standard on-board DACT provides: Contact ID, 3/1, 4/2, and SIA formats WALKTEST silent or audible system test Voltage and current for both the battery charger and the can be displayed at the front panel LCD Standard Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs): Five Class B IDCs with optional expansion to ten, all individual zone disable Monitor 2-wire or 4-wire initiating devices including smoke detectors Optional Class A Adapter Module Standard Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs): Class A or Class B outputs with solid state overcurrent per NAC, each rated for 2 A Selectable for Simplex SmartSync two-wire control or synchronized strobe control Power Supply: Provides 3 A maximum @ nominal 24 DC Automatic input power selection operates with 120 VAC 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz On-board temperature compensated battery charger for to 12.7 Ah batteries in cabinet (UL and ULC) and up 25 Ah batteries in separate cabinet (UL only) standard features: Programmable Active Status Reminder Two auxiliary relays NACs, and Relay outputs are power limited (AC battery circuits, and City Circuit Module outputs non-power limited) Available with beige or red cabinet UL listed to Standard 864 option modules: Door mounted 24 LED annunciator (standard on ULC 3 A Expansion Power Supply with two on-board 2 A that operate the same as standard NACs (Beige) Standard Control Panel i r e A l a r m A n n u n c i a t o r AND C. POWER (Beige) Control Panel with 24 LED Annunciator option modules (Continued): Expansion IDC module with five Class B IDCs Class A IDC Adapter Module, City Interface Module, Auxiliary Relay Module Remote LCD and LED/Switch Annunciators areas requiring from five to ten initiating zones, the 4006 Series fire alarm control panels provide initiating circuit monitoring, extensive control capability, and LCD annunciated 20 character custom labels. See page 2 for additional ULC and MEA information. This product has been approved by California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7165-0026:318 for allowable values and/or concerning material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, and possible cancellation. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. 8/2012 Standard Feature Details Class B IDCs are each capable of supporting up to 30 current-limited smoke detectors or electronic heat (see list on page 4) as well as manual stations and compatible contact closure initiating devices. IDCs capable of Class A operation with an optional adapter and can be programmed as Style C (short or open a trouble) for use with current limited devices only. 2 A On-Board NACs provide conventional reverse operation

firealarmresources.com and Trademarks 2005 Tyco Safety Products Westminster, Westminster MA 01441-0001 USA in the United States of America. in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written consent of Tyco Safety Simplex, the Simplex logo, IDNet, SmartSync and WALKTEST are registered trademarks of Tyco International Ser- AG or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. analog smoke detection is protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,155,468; 5,173,683; IDNet addressable communications are protected by U.S. Patent No. 4,796,025. IDNet duplicate device detection protected under U.S. Patent No. 6,034,601. WALKTEST system test is protected under US Patent No. 4,725,818. Smart- horn/strobe operation is protected under U.S. Patent No. 6,281,789. Two wire synchronization circuit operation is pro- by U.S. patent No. 5,559,492. Information equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the door of this equip- is a label that contains, among other information, the following product identifier: US:5QWAL01B4008. If requested, number must be provided to the telephone company. the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs should be performed by an authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users service to report the need for service to our company or to one of our authorized agents. Service can be arranged our office at: Safety Products Technology Drive MA 01473 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN), which is 01 for the DACT installed in this panel, is used to determine the number of that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total number of RENs, contact the local telephone For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN is part of the product identifier, which uses the format The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g. 01 is a REN of 0.1). the DACT causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discon- of service may be required. But if advance notice isn practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as If your service is discontinued, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the opera- of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the neces- modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. trouble is experienced with the DACT, please contact Tyco Safety Products at the location identified above. If the equipment causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the is resolved. Dialing Equipment equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an emergency situation. It must be able to do this if other equipment (telephone, answering system, computer modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do so, DACT must be electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same telephone line. Proper is depicted in the figure below. If you have any questions concerning these instructions you should consult your company or a qualified installer about connecting the alarm dialing equipment for you. Jack Jack

Expansion Power Supply (EPS) Installation Instructions 4008/4006-9801 Expansion Power Supply (EPS) is an option module installs into the main fire alarm control panel. The EPS provides two NACs, and filtered/regulated 24 VDC, alarm power. 3 A alarm power may be split between the two NACs and the A auxiliary 24 VDC power tap. Refer to the NAC ratings section of these for circuit loading restrictions. The expansion power supply is to the right of the main system board (MSB) at the bottom of the and is connected by the installer via three separate harnesses. EPS per system is allowed. 1, below, is an illustration of the EPS assembly. Input Fire Alarm System to 49 degrees C to 120 degrees F to 93% relative humidity condensing) = 4.38 in ( 11.2 cm) = 7 in (17.8 cm) = 4 in (10.2 cm) A per NAC; 3 A.alarm power 24 VDC V, 60Hz, 2 A max V, 50 Hz, 1.5 A max this Document interconnections ……………….3 wiring………………………………..5 24 V wiring …………………..6 ratings ………………………………7 Figure 1 The Expansion Power Supply EPS assembly is shipped with the following: EPS assembly (bracket with two PCBs) Screws/washers (441-002; qty: 2) AC harness (734-179): black/white leads Battery harness (734-180): red/black leads Data flex harness (166-438): flat cable This document contains instructions on installing the EPS into the fire control panel. For programming instructions, refer to the Front Panel Operating, and Programming Instructions (579-704 for 4006, or for 4008). 2004 Tyco Safety Products, Westminster, MA 01441 USA All specifications were current and are subject to change without notice. 579-707 A Manuals Online! – http:/ Power Supply (EPS) Installation Instructions the EPS to the main annunciation cabinet as shown the figure below the EPS to the cabinet with slotted torx screws (441-002). Figure 2 Mounting the EPS Manuals Online! – http:/ Power Supply (EPS) Installation Instructions interconnections the following steps and the figure on the next page to the EPS to the Main System Board (MSB). Remove AC and battery power from the panel. You be wiring to the AC line. Be sure the circuit is OFF and tagged. You have the option of removing the Depleted Battery jumper (R76) on the EPS. Removing the has the following effects: system will NOT initiate an alarm if the first occurs after the depleted battery state has detected. system will shut down 60 seconds after the battery condition is detected. the jumper if required. Note that there is a option in the programmer that must be see the Front Panel Installing, Operating, and Instructions (579-704 for 4006, for 4008). Connect the data flex harness (166-438) from J1 on EPS to on the 4006-9801 on the 4008-9801 The AC harness (734-179) is used to connect AC from the MSB to the EPS. source is 120 VAC, 60 Hz (single phase) or VAC (nominal), 50 Hz (single phase). 3/8″ insulation from the black and white the black wire lead to the LEFT MSB power terminal (TB4) marked the white wire lead to the RIGHT MSB power terminal (TB4) marked the snap-on AC harness connector to P6 the EPS. Connect the battery harness (734-180) from P3 on the to the battery connector on the MSB (P13 on the P14 on the 4008). Do not connect the harness to batteries until you are ready to power up the Connectors should be aligned such that: P13 or P14 on the MSB, the red wire is on the and the black wire is on the right. P3 on the EPS, the red wire is on the bottom the black wire is on top (closer to R76; see figure on the next page). Manuals Online! – http:/ Power Supply (EPS) Installation Instructions SYSTEM BOARD

4007ES Fire Control Panels Extinguishing, Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Releasing Control ULC Listed; FM, NYC Fire Approved* control using the Simplex 4007ES Fire Alarm Control to provide**: Coverage for multiple areas of Automatic Extinguishing Release and/ Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Release including audible of events Control of compatible Listed/Approved 24 VDC automatic control Releasing appliance circuits (RACs) by connecting Notification appliance (NACs) to Suppression Release Peripherals for actuator and control Additional actuator circuit control NACs are available using 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders with Suppression Release Peripherals Escalation of Events: Temporal or 20 bpm march time pattern for first cross-zone alarm; 120 march time pattern to indicate releasing timer active; On steady indicate releasing timer expired and actuator is activated Requires NACs dedicated to conventional horn control (not SmartSync with strobes controlled on separate NACs IDNet NAC Extenders provide: Up to eight NACs for notification requirements and input to release peripherals, controlled via IDNet Suppression Release Peripheral (SRP) with Command Control: Dual command control requires IDNet and an activated NAC to initiate NAC provides wiring supervision to the actuator including monitoring coil continuity and short circuit supervision to the coil supervision Release Peripheral control features: An on-board DC-DC regulator compensates for voltage drops to the and ensures proper control circuit voltage over a wide range Provides a single RAC for control of actuators for up to 2 A using a 3 A input (1 A using a 2 A NAC input) system components: 4007ES Series control panel with Releasing Appliqu Dedicated NAC output from 4007ES (or compatible NAC Extender) Coil supervision module, one per RAC Maintenance Switch, one per RAC Abort Switch Listings reference: UL 864 – Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit Accessories, Fire Alarm (UOXX); ; Control Units, Releasing Device Service UL 2017 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO detection), (FSZI) ULC-S559 – Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (DAYRC) ULC-S527 – Control Units, System, Fire Alarm (UOJZC); Control Unit System, Fire Alarm (UOXXC); Control Units, Releasing Service (SYZVC) 1: Series Releasing Typical Block Diagram combined with Suppression Release Peripherals, the 4007ES fire alarm control panel provides actuator supervision and control use in automatic extinguishing, and deluge or preaction releasing Hazard area initiating and notification devices are controlled either conventional or addressable circuits per standard 4007ES The necessary releasing system logic is implemented within 4007ES control panel as required for the local application. NYC Fire Dept COA #6191A. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. ** Release Control operation described in this document is also available with 4007ES Control Panels with software revision 3.03 or higher. Refer to data S4007-0001 for model 4007ES control panel details including IDNet communications information. Rev. 7 4/2019 Extinguishing, Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Releasing Control used, connect to an addressable Supervised IAM model or similar addressable adapter module. The Simplex switch and the IAM mount in a single gang box, 2-1/2″ depth. Addressable Manual Releasing Stations are used to initiate of the releasing actuators with the appropriate time delay by the fire alarm control panel. Notification Requirements. Each hazard area typically requires audible and visible fire alarm notification and additional NACs for area releasing status notification. Suppression is compatible with conventional panel mounted NACs as as for use with the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender. Additional Suppression Release Peripheral Reference. Refer to Instructions 579-385. Releasing

Datasheet Fire Control Units Fire Detection and Control with Addressable Initiation and Addressable Notification ULC, CSFM Listed; FM, NYC Fire Approved* either shielded or unshielded, twisted or untwisted single pair outputs are Class A or Class B Standard panel SLC provides up to 100 addressable points; optional loop expansion modules provide an additional isolated with short circuit isolation for the IDNet 2 channel; each loop module also provides an additional 75 addressable points the IDNet 2 channel capacity for a total of up to 250 addressable feature summary: Current and previous panel configuration are both maintained in on- memory to allow easy selection of desired revision An internal Ethernet service port is available for service computer to perform configuration updates, downloads and report downloads, and system software updates Internal USB interface allows a memory stick/thumb drive to store job update revised jobs and panel software, and save detailed reports from the panel modules and connections include: Fire alarm network interface card (NIC) for ES Net or 4120 network Peer-to-Peer network communications, supports either Class B or Point or Event DACT assembly that is compatible with Connected X operation Gateway Up to two additional IDNet 2 addressable device output loop with 75 additional point capacity each Front mounted 48 LED annunciator with custom label inserts. Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI) Remote LED annunciator support through remote unit interface (RUI) port for use with unshielded, twisted pair wiring (UTP) Eight point zone/relay modules individually selectable as IDC or relay 2 A at 30 VDC (resistive) Alarm relays and auxiliary relays Dual RS-232 ports for printer, PC annunciator or third party interface City connections, with or without disconnect switch 4003EC Voice Control Panels 4009 Series IDNAC Repeaters Battery brackets for seismic area protection mechanical: Compact red or platinum cabinet for convenient surface or semi-flush rated NEMA 1 and IP30 Listings reference: UL 864 – Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit Accessories, Fire Alarm (UOXX); Control Units, Releasing Device Service UL 2017 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO detection), (FSZI) ULC-S559 – Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (DAYRC) ULC-S527 – Control Units, System, Fire Alarm (UOJZC); Control Unit System, Fire Alarm (UOXXC); Control Units, Releasing Service (SYZVC) 1: 4007ES FACU front view with Simplex ES Net or 4120 fire alarm networks standard combination of addressable initiation and notification in. (109 mm) diagonal color touchscreen display: Convenient and intuitive user interface provides detailed system status individual point information Supports dual language selection, including unicode character A custom background display appears when operation is normal a 3 A IDNAC signaling line circuit (SLC) output power that provides enhanced power delivery to addressable appliances: A constant 29 VDC source voltage is maintained during alarm, even battery operation. This allows strobes to operate at higher with lower current and ensuring a consistent current draw and drop margin under both primary power and secondary battery Efficiencies include lower strobe currents, wiring distances up to two three times farther than with conventional notification, support more appliances per IDNAC SLC, and smaller gauge wiring. This installation and maintenance savings, with high assurance appliances will operate as normal during worst case alarm IDNAC SLCs are compatible with both TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert notification appliances, and remote 4009 IDNAC to extend power and wiring distance and provide for up to addressable notification appliances. Power supply provides battery backup charging of up to 33 Ah; up to Ah for cabinet mounted batteries and up to 33 Ah batteries for in close-nippled remote battery cabinet. isolated IDNet 2 addressable initiating device SLC: Provi

ULC, CSFM Listed; NYC Fire Dept Approved* Flexible standard combination of addressable and addressable notification (109 mm) Diagonal color touchscreen display: Convenient and intuitive user interface provides detailed status and individual point information Supports dual language selection, including unicode languages A custom background display appears when operation is (see page 7 for details) a 3 A IDNAC SLC (signaling line circuit) power supply that provides enhanced power to addressable notification appliances: A constant 29 VDC source voltage is maintained during even during battery operation, allowing strobes to at higher voltage with lower current and ensuring a current draw and voltage drop margin under both power and secondary battery standby Efficiencies include lower strobe currents, wiring distances to 2 to 3 times farther than with conventional support for more appliances per IDNAC SLC, smaller gauge wiring. This provides installation and savings. with high assurance that appliances operate as normal during worst case alarm conditions SLCs are compatible with both TrueAlert ES and addressable notification appliances, and remote IDNAC Repeaters to extend power and wiring distance farther and provide for up to 127 addressable appliances Power supply provides battery backup charging of up to Ah; up to 18 Ah for cabinet mounted batteries and up 33 Ah batteries for mounting in close-nippled remote cabinet isolated IDNet+ addressable initiating SLC: Provides built-in short circuit isolation for monitoring control of TrueAlarm analog sensors and IDNet monitoring and control devices; for use either shielded or unshielded, twisted or untwisted pair wiring; outputs are Class A or Class B Standard panel SLC provides up to 100 addressable optional additional loop expansion modules an additional isolated loop with short circuit for the IDNet+ channel; each loop expansion also provides an additional 75 addressable points the IDNet+ channel capacity for a total of up to 250 points Feature Summary: Current and previous panel configuration are both in on-board memory to allow easy selection of revision An internal Ethernet service port is available for service connections to perform configuration updates, and uploads; report downloads, and system updates USB interface allows a memory stick/thumb drive store job revisions, update revised jobs and panel and save detailed system reports from the panel 4007ES Fire Control Panels Fire Detection and Control with Addressable and Addressable Notification Panel Front View modules and connections include: Fire Alarm Network Interface for Peer-to-Peer fire alarm communications, supports either Class B or Class operation Point or Event DACT assembly that is compatible with IP Up to two additional IDNet+ addressable device output connections with 75 additional point capacity each Front mounted 48 LED annunciator with custom label Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI) Remote LED annunciator support via RUI (remote unit communications port for use with unshielded, pair wiring (UTP) Eight Point Zone/Relay Modules individually selectable IDC or relay rated 2 A @ 30 VDC (resistive) Alarm relays and auxiliary relays Dual RS-232 ports (for printer, PC annunciator or third interface) TrueInsight Remote Gateway City connections, with or without disconnect switch 4003EC Voice Control Panels 4009 Series IDNAC Repeaters Battery brackets for seismic area protection (see page 2) Mechanical: Compact red or platinum cabinet for convenient surface or mounting; rated NEMA 1 and IP30 Listings reference: UL 864 – Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit System, Fire Alarm (UOXX); ; Control Releasing Device Service (SYZV) UL 2017 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO (FSZ

ULC, CSFM Listed; NYC Fire Dept Approved* 4007ES Fire Control Panels 4007ES Hybrid, Fire Detection and Control Panel with and/or Conventional Initiation Satisfies a variety of new and retrofit applications (109 mm) diagonal color touchscreen display: Provides detailed system status and point information Supports dual language selection, including unicode languages A custom background display appears when operation is (see page 6 for details) Point Zone/Relay Module: Each point is selectable as an IDC input or Relay output, A IDCs require 2 points (one out and one return); module is standard, up to 3 additional modules can field installed for a total of 4 eight point zone/relay per system Each point on the IDC/Relay Module can be configured a control relay rated 2 A @ 30 VDC (resistive) as normally open or normally closed Can be powered directly from the power supply or the optional 25 VDC Regulator Module IDC end-of-line resistor value can be selected from a range of resistance values for retrofit convenience isolated IDNet+ addressable initiating SLC: Provides built-in short circuit isolation for monitoring control of TrueAlarm analog sensors and IDNet monitoring and control devices; for use either shielded or unshielded, twisted or untwisted pair wiring; outputs are Class A or Class B Standard panel SLC provides up to 100 addressable optional additional loop expansion modules an additional isolated loop with short circuit for the IDNet+ channel; each loop expansion also provides an additional 75 addressable points Supply Features: Four Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) selectable Class A or Class B with 6 A total available current NAC end-of-line resistor value can be selected from a range of resistance values for retrofit convenience Additional notification power capacity is available using 4009 IDNet NAC Extender Battery backup charging of up to 33 Ah; up to 18 Ah for mounted batteries and up to 33 Ah batteries for in close-nippled remote battery cabinet Mechanical: Red or platinum cabinet; rated NEMA 1 and IP30 Listings reference: UL 864 – Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit System, Fire Alarm (UOXX); Control Releasing Device Service (SYZV) UL 2017 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO ULC-S559 – Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (FSZI) ULC-S527 – Control Units, System, Fire Alarm Control Unit Accessories, System, Fire Alarm Control Units, Releasing Device Service Hybrid Panel Front View Feature Summary: Current and previous panel configuration maintained in memory An internal Ethernet service port is available for service connections to perform configuration updates, and uploads; report downloads, and system USB interface allows a memory stick to store job update revised jobs and panel software, and save system reports from the panel modules and connections include: Fire Alarm Network Interface for Peer-to-Peer fire alarm communications, supports either Class B or Class operation Point or Event DACT assembly for IP Communicators Up to two additional IDNet+ addressable device output loop with short circuit fault protection and with 75 point capacity each Front mounted 48 LED annunciator with custom label LEDs are programmable for up to 24 IDC zones of and trouble annunciation or other custom requirements Remote LED annunciator support via RUI communications for use with UTP wiring Dual RS-232 ports (for printer, PC annunciator or third party TrueInsight Remote Gateway Alarm relays and auxiliary relays City connections, with or without disconnect switch 4003EC Voice Control Panels 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders to extend NAC capability for and distance Battery brackets for seismic area protection (see page 2) This product has bee

Datasheet Fire Control Units Hybrid, Fire Detection and Control Unit with Addressable and/or Conventional ULC, CSFM Listed; FM, NYC Fire Approved* with Simplex ES Net and 4120 fire alarm networks a variety of new and retrofit applications in. (109 mm) diagonal color touchscreen display: Provides detailed system status and point information Supports dual language selection, including unicode character A custom background display appears when operation is normal point zone/relay module: Each point is selectable as an IDC input or Relay output, Class A IDCs two points (one out and one return); one module is standard you can field install up to three additional modules for a total of 8 point zone/relay modules for each system You can configure each point on the IDC/Relay module as a control rated 2 A at 30 VDC (resistive) as either normally open or normally Power comes directly from the power supply or through the optional VDC Regulator Module You can select the IDC end-of-line (EOL) resistor value from a wide of resistance values for retrofit convenience isolated IDNet 2 addressable initiating device SLC: Provides built-in short circuit isolation for monitoring and control of analog sensors and IDNet communications monitoring and devices; for use with either shielded or unshielded, twisted or single pair wiring; outputs are Class A or Class B Standard panel signaling line circuit (SLC) provides up to 100 points; optional additional loop expansion modules an additional isolated loop with short circuit isolation for IDNet 2 channel; each loop expansion module also provides an 75 addressable points supply: Four notification appliance circuits (NACs) selectable as Class A or Class with 6 A total available current You can select the NAC EOL resistor value from a wide range of values for retrofit convenience Additional notification power capacity is available using the 4009 IDNet Extender Battery backup charging of up to 33 Ah; up to 18 Ah for cabinet- batteries and up to 33 Ah for batteries mounted close- remote battery cabinet mechanical: Red or platinum cabinet; rated NEMA 1 and IP30 Listings reference: UL 864 – Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit Accessories, Fire Alarm (UOXX); Control Units, Releasing Device Service UL 2017 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO detection), (FSZI) ULC-S559 – Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (DAYRC) ULC-S527 – Control Units, System, Fire Alarm (UOJZC); Control Unit System, Fire Alarm (UOXXC); Control Units, Releasing Service (SYZVC) 1: 4007ES Hybrid Unit front view feature summary: Current and previous panel configuration maintained in on-board An internal Ethernet service port is available for service computer to perform configuration updates, downloads and report downloads, and update system software Internal USB interface allows a memory stick to store job revisions, revised jobs and panel software, and save detailed system from the panel modules and connections include: Fire alarm network interface card (NIC) for ES Net or 4120 network Peer-to-Peer network communications, supports either Class B or X operation Point or Event DACT assembly for Connected Services Gateway Up to two additional IDNet 2 addressable device output loop with short circuit fault protection and with 75 additional capacity each Front mounted 48 LED annunciator with custom label inserts; LEDs programmable for up to 24 IDC zones of alarm and trouble or other custom annunciation requirements Remote LED annunciator support through remote user interface (RUI) port for use with UTP wiring Dual RS-232 ports for printer, PC annunciator or third party interface Alarm relays and auxiliary relays City connections, with or without disconnect switch 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders to extend NAC capability for power and Battery brackets for seismic area protection; see Mechanical for more information This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to

Small fire panel, big protection. 4007ES brings advanced fire alarm technology to smaller projects. day SIMPLEX fire alarm help protect millions people in large facilities that from hospitals, hotels and to airports, office and sky scrapers. choose SIMPLEX for their industry-leading reliability, long-term value technology. Now, the SIMPLEX panel brings advanced to smaller facilities. packed many of the features you find in larger panels like networking, suppression release, port protocol for building integration, TrueAlert ES notification technology, a color touchscreen display into a compact, cost-effective As a result, you get capabilities, a streamlined and increased flexibility make the SIMPLEX 4007ES powerful solution for a wide variety facilities: Primary schools Small- to mid-size office buildings Libraries Retail shops Small healthcare facilities Small campus buildings Small multi-tenant facilities The perfect fire alarm for small to mid-sized (up to 250 points) Can be networked with other fire alarm panels graphical workstations Agency listed for suppression applications Computer port protocol for system integration Flexible wiring infrastructure to make expanding easier & more cost- Programmable end of line configuration for retrofit of conventional Compatible with revolutionary ES addressable appliances networking capabilities optional network interface card adds full SIMPLEX capabilities to the 4007ES. You can up to 687 nodes to create a solution campus-type environments with smaller buildings multi-tenant facilities apartment complexes, assisted living facilities, strip malls and Networked 4007ES panels are also compatible the full suite of TrueSite Workstation system solutions. release with the full range of SIMPLEX release peripherals and maintenance the 4007ES is a flexible, cost-effective for controlling single or multi-hazard systems. touchscreen operation a 4.3 (10.9 cm) color touch screen display and menu-driven interface, the SIMPLEX 4007ES remarkably easy to use. You can quickly access view reports, and perform a variety of In addition we offer a passcode protected version of the panel user interface with the functionality as the panel. installation addressable SIMPLEX 4007ES panels integrate with addressable devices and appliances, offer a flexible wiring infrastructure that can make installation faster, easier, and more cost- The SIMPLEX 4007ES Hybrid panel is with both addressable and conventional devices, so it ideal for retrofit and expansion This model also makes the use of existing much easier through its compatibility with or unshielded and twisted or untwisted wire 18 AWG). In addition, the SIMPLEX 4007ES has end of line resistor compatibility. This allow the use of existing wiring infrastructure having to find and replace any already-installed of line resistors. 2016 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. FD513_EN / 07/2016 trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. power of TrueAlert ES technology with our advanced TrueAlert ES addressable the SIMPLEX 4007ES is compatible with appliances that offer an array of intelligent TrueAlert ES appliances are continuously and the panel identifies the exact when repair or maintenance is needed. revolutionary and NFPA compliant self-test TrueAlert ES appliances can test helping ensure they ready to work an emergency. self-test process can be initiated manually or to run automatically and takes just to complete. Testing can be done when most convenient, minimizing disruption to occupa

4007ES Operator Manual C Warnings and Copyright Warnings AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS- Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon installation. NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED- Upon unpacking your Simplex inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the and notify an authorized Simplex product supplier. HAZARD – Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs be performed by a representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier. HAZARD – Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows: Ground yourself before opening or installing components. Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times. RULES AND REGULATIONS PART 15 – This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor- with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 2015- 2016 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice. SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is prohibited. 4007ES Operator Manual (579-1165) user interface is touchscreen based on 4007-9101 4007ES and 4007-9201 4007ES Hybrid* Fire Alarm Control (FACP). The various functions of the panel are access-level protected, thus restricting access to sensitive features appropriate personnel only. 4606-9202 and the 4606-9205 are Color Touchscreen LCD Annunciators for 4007ES panels. They provide remote of the FACP status. Access to Annunciator switch functions can be enabled or locked using the keyswitch. maximum of six color touchscreen annunciators can be installed on a 4007ES panel. Refer to the Programmers 579-1167, for more information on how to enable/disable the operations on the Color Touchscreen LCD = The user interfaces for the 4007ES and the 4007ES Hybrid FACPs are identical and referred to collectively as 4007ES in this this Interface ……………………………………….. 4 Panel Setup ……………………………………………………….18 Conditions ……………………………………. 5 Alarm Log ………………………………………………………….20 and Trouble Conditions ……….. 10 Trouble Log ……………………………………………………….21 Menu ………………………………………….. 13 Search ………………………………………………………………22 Access Level ……………………………….. 14 Diagnostics ………………………………………………………..23 Info …………………………………………. 16 Report Menu ……………………………………………………..28 ………………………………………………………………..31 4007ES Installation Manual 4007ES Programmer Manual 4007ES/4007H Service Parts List Color Touchscreen LCD Annunciator Installation Manual Interface 4007ES Operator Manual (579-1165) Interface user interface is used to operate the FACP. User Defined LEDs Labels LED 2 LED LED LED Silenced LED LED 1. 4007ES User Interface User Defined LEDs Labels LED 2 LED LED LED Silenced LED LED 2. Color Touchscreen

MAPNET II and IDNet Addressable Devices Communications Compatibility Chart Compatible with MAPNET II, 4010 IDNet, 4100U, and 4008 IDNet Communications B IDC ZAM Base with connections for remote or relay; and supervised remote relay A IDC ZAM Sensor Base Sensor Housing without relay Base Sensor Housing with relay Station, Standard Sensor Housing without relay Station, Breakglass Sensor Housing with relay Station, Push Base with connections for remote LED or unsupervised relay ULC, FM, MEA with Special Considerations IAMs; 4090-9051 is and w/o LED II provides Class B monitoring of N.O. contacts from 4008, 4010, or 4100U also provides sense Addressable Controller IDNet (4100 and 4100U control using RUI) Address Base Address Base use with only II, 4010 IDNet, and 4008 IDNet; two consecutive does not provide TrueSense operation; see for 4100U applications of 4098-9754 ULC, FM, MEA Multi-Sensor, one address for heat, and TrueSense operation only) 4100U IDNet only; use with standard sensor bases, only one address Releasing Station, Push with MAPNET II or IDNet Releasing panels only mA AMZ, revision 2.01 firmware II or